En Vento Katalog

7/28/2019 En Vento Katalog

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-vento-katalog 1/252

Duct units

0 3 / 2 0 1 2

C A

T A L O G U E



The Vento duct air handling units, including their

individual parts, are not intended, due to their con-

cept, for direct sale to end customers. They are sold

exclusively to specialized installation companies

within the scope of commercial relations.Vento duct air handling units are manufactured in accor-

dance with valid Czech and European regulations and

technical standards.

Vento duct air handling units must be installed and

used only in accordance with this documentation.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages

resulting from use other than intended and the custo-

mer bears the risks of such use.

The installation and operating documentation must

be available for the operating and servicing staff.

It is advisable to store this documentation close to the

Vento unit.

When handling, installing, wiring, commissioning,repairing or servicing the Vento duct air handling units,

it is necessary to observe valid safety rules, standards

and generally recognized technical rules.

In particular, it is necessary to use personal

protective work aids (e.g. gloves) because of sharp

edges and corners when performing any handling,

installing, dismounting, repairing or checking of

Vento duct units.

All device connections must comply with the respective

safety standards and regulations.

Any changes or modications to individual compo-

nents of the Vento system which could affect its safety

and proper functioning are forbidden.

Any changes or modications to individual compo-

nents of the Vento duct units which could affect thesafety are forbidden. When disposing of components and materials, it is

necessary to observe the respective environmental

protection and waste disposal regulations. In case of

nal device liquidation, it is necessary to follow thepolicy of differential waste disposal. We recommend

metal parts be scrapped and other parts be disposed of

in accordance with separated waste regulations.

Before installing and using the Vento air handling

units, it is necessary to familiarize yourself with and

observe the directions and recommendations included

in the following chapters.

Vento duct system‘s components can be used innormal rooms (IEC 60364-5-51, respectively ČSN332000-5-51 ed.2, ČSN 332000-3); the differences arestated with individual components, and they are genera-

lly related to degree of protection (resistance to foreign

objects and water) and allowable temperatures.

Up-to-date version of this document is available

at website www.remak.eu

Introduction

Technical data updated on 19th March, 2012



Fans RP fans ....................................................................................................... 4

RQ fans ......................................................................................................32

RO fans ......................................................................................................50RF fans .......................................................................................................58

RPH fans ....................................................................................................86

RP Ex, RQ Ex fans ................................................................................... 108

Fan output

controllers TRN controllers ...................................................................................... 130

TRRE, TRRD controllers .......................................................................... 138

PE controllers ...........................................................................................142

Exchangers Electric heaters ......................................................................................... 144

Water heaters ......................................................................................... 156

Mixing sets ...............................................................................................180

Water coolers ...........................................................................................188

Direct coolers ...........................................................................................202

Heat Exchangers Plate heat exchangers .............................................................................. 214

Accessories Filtration Classes .................................................................................... 222

KFD bag lters........................................................................................ 224

KF3 bag lters ........................................................................................ 225

KF5 bag lters ..........................................................................................226

KF7 bag lters ..........................................................................................227

VFK insert lters ..................................................................................... 228

VF3 ltration inserts..................................................................................229

LKR blade dampers .................................................................................. 230

LKS blade dampers ..................................................................................231LKSX blade dampers ...............................................................................232

LKSF blade dampers................................................................................233

SKX mixing sections............................................................................... 234

TKU attenuators .......................................................................................236

PK pressure dampers ............................................................................... 240

PZ louvers ................................................................................................241

DV, DK elastic connections ...................................................................... 242

EP, GK counter-anges ............................................................................243

EKP drop eliminators ................................................................................ 244

Contents

Page



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Materials

The external casing and connecting anges of RP fansare made of galvanized steel sheets (Zn 275 g/m2). Im-

peller blades - with forward curved blades and diffusers- are made of galvanized sheet steel while motors are

made of aluminium alloys, copper and plastics. All ma-terials are carefully veried and checked so they ensurelong service life and reliability of the fans.

Impellers

After connecting the fan with a three-phase motor to thepower supply, the proper direction of the impeller rota-

tion must be checked. The inspection opening on themotor cup is sealed with a rubber plug. The RP fans'impellers rotate always to the left, i.e. counter clockwise(looking through the inspection opening on the motor cup). Impellers along with the motor are perfectly stati-

cally and dynamically balanced.Motors

Compact single-phase and three-phase asynchronousmotors with an external rotor and a resistance armatu-

re are used as drives. The motors are situated insidethe impeller, and during operation are optimally cooledby the owing air. The motor's high quality enclosedball bearings with permanent lubricating lling enablethe fans to reach a service life above 40,000 operatinghours without maintenance. The motor electric protec-

tion degree is mostly IP 54 for RP 40-20 and IP 44 for RP 50-25 with F insulation class. The motor windingsare impregnated to provide them with additional protec-

tion against moisture. The motors feature low build-upcurrent.

Electrical Equipment

Single-phase motors are equipped with a starting capa-

citor which is mounted on the fan casing. The wiring isterminated in a terminal box of IP 54 protection degree.For wiring diagrams, refer to the section "The Wiring".Warning: Three-phase motors must be connected inaccordance with the data stated in the section "Techni-cal Data", respectively on the motor rating plate.

Motor Protection

As standard, permanent monitoring of the internal motor temperature is used in all motors. The limit temperatureis monitored by thermal contacts (TK-thermo-contacts)situated in the motor winding. The thermo-contacts areminiature thermal tripping elements which after beingconnected to the protective contactor circuit protectthe motor against overheating (damage) due to phasefailure, forced motor braking, current protection circuitbreakdown or excessive temperature of transportedair. Thermal protection by means of thermo-contacts iscomprehensive and reliable providing they are correctlyconnected. This type of protection is essential especi-ally for speed controlled and frequently started motorsand motors highly thermally loaded by hot transportedair. Therefore, the fan motors cannot be protected byconventional thermal protection ensured by the motor overcurrent protective elements!

Fan Use

Fully controlled, low-pressure RP radial fans intendedfor the square duct can be universally used for complexair-conditioning, from simple venting installations tosophisticated air-handling systems. Ideally, they can be

used along with other components of the Vento modular system which ensure inter-compatibility and balancedparameters.

Operating Conditions, Position

These fans are designed for indoor applications. Out-door applications are possible providing sufcientroong is ensured. They are designed to transport air without solid, brous, sticky, aggressive, respectivelyexplosive impurities. For outdoor applications it is nece-

ssary to nish the fans with a protective coating (exceptrating plates). The transported air must be free of corro-

sive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to zinc and/or aluminium. Acceptable temperature of transported air can range from -30 °C to +55 °C, and with types RP 40-20/20 up to +70 °C. The maximum nominal values for each fan are included in table 6. The RP fans can workin any position. When positioned under the ceiling, it isadvisable to situate the fan with the motor cup directeddownwards to ease access to the motor terminal box.

However, if the transported air is oversaturated withmoisture or if the risk of intensive steam condensationinside the fan exists, it is better to situate the fan's cupupwards. We recommend adding a 1-1.5 m long pieceof straight duct to the fan's outlet to reduce pressure lo-

sses in an assembly.

Dimensional Range

RP fans are manufactured in a range of nine sizesaccording to the A x B dimensions of the connectingange. Several fans differing in the number of motor poles are available for each size. When planning the

fan for the required air ow and pressure, thefollowing general rule isapplied; the lager fanswith higher number of

poles reach the requiredparameters at lower RPM,which results in lower noise and longer servi-ce life. Fans with higher number of poles alsohave lower air velocity inthe cross section, whichresults in lower pressurelosses in the duct andaccessories, however, athigher investment costs.

The standard dimensionaland performance range of single-phase and three-

-phase RP fans enablesthe designers to optimizeall parameters for air owup to 11,730 m3 per hour.

A x B [mm]

40-20

900-500

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

800-500

700-400

600-350

600-300

500-300

500-250

400-200

Technical Information

1000-500100-50

Fig. 1 - Dimensions



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X

C o n t r o l l e r s

. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .

W a t e r h e a t e r s

V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X

W a t e r c o o l e r s

C H V

D i r e c t c o o l e r s

C H F

H e a t e x c h a n g e r s

H R V

A c c e s s o r i e s

. . .

Maximum thermo-contact permanent loading is 1.2 A at250V / 50V (cos ϕ 0.6), (respectively 2 A at cos ϕ 1.0)

Fan Output Control

The output of all RP fans can be fully controlled by

changing the speed. The fan's speed is changed de-pending on the voltage at the motor terminals. The fanparameter tables contain voltage controllers correspon-

ding to each fan. Generally, several types of controlcan be used with fans. However, voltage control is themost suitable for RP fans.

Five Stage Voltage Control (Transformer)

Voltage control of single-phase and three-phase RPfans is the most suitable, technically as well as operati-onally. There is no interference, humming, squeaking or vibration of the motor.RP fans can be steplessly controlled providing the

change in voltage is stepless. In practice, stage voltagecontrollers are usually used. TRN stage voltage cont-rollers can control the fan output in ve stages in 20%steps, refer to Table 1 showing the correlation betweenthe input voltage and selected stage of the controller for single-phase and three-phase motors.

RP fan motors can be operated within a range of approx. from 25% to 110% of the rated voltage. All va-

lues respect the 400/230 V power supply system. Therange of TRN controllers is intended to control the spe-

ed, respectively output, of all Vento fans. The possibilityof remote control (by manual switch or by a switch in

the control unit, respectively by automatic switching of ve stages based on the external control signal of 0 -10V from the OSX control unit) is a signicant feature of this product line.

Accessories

RP fans belong in the wide range of Vento modular ven-

ting and air-handling system components. Any air-han-

dling set-up, from simple venting to sophisticated com-

fortable air-conditioning, can be created by selecting

suitable elements. Universal duct RP fans can be usedalong with a wide range of elements and accessories:

KFD Bag Filters and KF3, KF5, KF7 Filter Inserts

VFK Insert Air Filters and VF3 Filter Inserts

DV Elastic Connections

LKR, LKS, LKSX, and LKSF Regulatingand Closing Dampers

PK Pressure Dampers

PZ Louvers

TKU Splitter Attenuators

VO Water Heaters

SUMX Mixing Sets

EO, EOS, EOSX Electric Heaters

CHF Direct Coolers

CHV Water Coolers

HRV Plate Heat Exchangers

SKX Circulating Air Mixing Chambers

Control Units and NS Sensors

TRN Controllers, their controls,TRR and TRRD Controllers

STE, STD Protecting Relays

This product line includes single-phase and three-phaseTRN controllers. These controllers cover every type of Vento fan.Simplied TRR controllers can also be used; however,they do not provide protection function.

Stepless Electronic Control

Stepless electronic voltage control of the output is of -fered only with single-phase fans. The disadvantage of electronic control provided by PE 5 controllers is greater warming of motors. A partial disadvantage is also thefact that the designer does not have the possibility toexactly dene for the user the stage of required output

related to the load of the ventilated space. Steplesscontrol can be provided by means of frequency inver -ters, which can be delivered on request.


Table 1 - the input voltage and controller's stage

Motor type

single-phase

three-phase

Curve characteristics – controller's stage



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Motor

E - single-phase

D - three-phase

Number of motor's poles

4 - four-pole

6 - six-pole8 - eight-pole

Impeller diameter (cm)

Flange connection B dimension (cm)

Flange connection A dimension (cm)

Duct radial fan

RP 60 - 30 / 28 - 4 D

The most used names of the fan's individual parts andstructure assemblies are dened on the fan's sectionalview (see gure # 3).


For example, type designation RP 60-30/28-4D speci-es the type of fan, impeller and motor..

Fan Description and Designation

The key for type designation of RP fans in projects andorders is dened in gure # 2.

Figure 2 - Type designation of RP fans

The duct Vento RP radial fans are designed to be in-

stalled in a duct line or into the assembly of other VentoSystem air-handling elements. The Vento RP fan design

is perfectly functional.

Terminal box

Inspection opening

Motor Stator

Cup

Flange

Fan casing

Impeller

Diffuser

Figure 3 - RP Fan Sectional View



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Operating Characteristics

The output characteristics of RP fans are measured inthe most modern testing laboratory for aerodynamicand electric measurements of fans and pressure lossesof passive elements. The Remak testing laboratory

complies with EN 24 163 and AMCA STANDARD 210-74 Standards. The following text explains the relation-

ships and correlation between important data contained

in the "Data Section" of the catalogue.

selected points of each working characteristic, e.g. 5a,5b and 5c of characteristic .

Some RP fans have a so-called forbidden area. Theforbidden (non-working) area is dened by thedashed lines, and it is marked in the graph when any

characteristic ends with point "c", e.g. 5c, which doesnot lie on the dynamic pressure curve "p

d".

Such fan must not be operated with a free inlet or freeoutlet; it must always be connected to a duct system

of which resistance cha-

racteristic, e.g. , doesnot go through the for -bidden area. This fan (if not controlled) must bethrottled to the minimumpressure loss ?ps minin accordance with the

data tables. If the fan isoperated in the forbid-

den area without beingprotected by the prescri-bed method, the motor can be damaged due toelectric overloading. If the protection is perfor -med by the prescribedmethod, the thermo-

-contacts will activatethe protection, and thefan will be stopped. The

characteristics give thetotal pressure ∆p

t(Pa).

The fan static pressurevalue ∆p

scan be cal-

culated by subtractingthe dynamic pressurep

d, which can also be

plotted by curve on

the graphs, i.e. ∆ps

=

∆pt- p

d.

In the "Data Section" of the catalogue, below each RPfan graph across the entire width of the page you can

nd a table of fan parameters at selected working po-ints. In this table you can read all important aerodyna-

mic and electric parameters for a selected point.Points 5a, 4a, 3a, 2a, and 1a are characterized byzero air ow, i.e. inlet is fully throttled. At these pointsthe fan's motor has the lowest input, and it works withalmost no load. Working points 5b, 4b, 3b, 2b, and1b are characterized by the highest efciency, andtherefore it is advisable to select the effective workingpoint in this area of the curve for the fan's operation;which of course is not compulsory because the motor can permanently work in any part of the characteristicmarked by a solid line, i.e. a - c. Working points 5c,4c, 3c, 2c, and 1c are characterized by maximum loadof the motor and the highest air ow, and if the fan hasno forbidden area then these points lie on curve

(representing pd value) when the fan works with freeinlet and free outlet, i.e. ∆p

s= 0 Pa.

Output characteristics in the "Data Section" starting onpage 12 determine the relationship curve of the air ow

rate V (m3

/h) and total fan pressure ∆pt = ∆ps + pd (Pa).The example in Graph 1 gives a detailed explanation. All RP fans are fully controllable, and connected to theTRN controller.Each output stage set on the controller (stage 5, 4, 3, 2,and 1) corresponds to one of the characteristic curves. If no controller is connected to the fan, thefan can only be operated in accordance with curve .

The characteristic of the particular duct system has aparabolic map curve of the relation V-∆p

t(e.g. curve ).

The effective working point of the fan - duct systemassembly will lie at the intersection of the fan curvecorresponding to the selected output stage and thecurve of the connected duct system. The output of thefan controlled by changing the voltage is dependent onthe load. Therefore, not only are the voltage and speedchanged but also the current and input. The tables nextto the characteristics in the "Data Section" of this cata-

logue always include changes in these values for three

V - air ow rate (m3/h)

∆ p

t

-totalpressure

(Pa)


Graph 1



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Sound Pressure

Sound pressure is the pressure induced by acousticwaves. The waves are a consequence of the noisesource's mechanical vibrations, and they are super -posed on atmospheric pressure. Sound pressure is

directly perceived through the human ear as an effect of acoustic waves at the given observer location. Its valueat the measuring site, respectively at the observationsite, depends on the distance from the noise source,room size, reection, acoustic wave absorption capa-

bility of insulation materials situated within the source'ssurrounding, etc. Values of sound pressure [Pa] percei-vable by the human ear (from the audibility threshold tothe threshold of feeling) lie within the range of severalorders, which means that in practice the basic physicalunit [Pa] is inapplicable. Therefore, the sound pressurelevel as a ratio has been implemented in acoustics.

Sound Pressure Level LP

The sound pressure level, similarly as sound pressure,is a volume criterion at a particular measuring site, re-

spectively observation site. Using this ratio the audiblerange of acoustic waves (noise, sound, tone, etc.) canbe expressed by absolute values around 100 dB, i.e.from 40 dB to 140 dB.

Lp

p P = 20

0

log

whrere p0

is a reference sound pressure p0

= 2.10 -5 Pa.

Noise and Noise LevelNoise is a type of acoustic wave. It is characterized bya higher number of non-periodic components and widespectrum of frequencies. The ear distinguishes notonly noise intensity but also perceives its componentsdepending on the frequency, i.e. components with thesame sound pressure level but different frequency areperceived differently. Maximum human ear sensitivityranges from 3500Hz to 4000Hz while this sensitivitydrops in higher and lower frequency areas. Each noisecomponent has its own partial sound pressure level.The total sound pressure level in a given location within

the surroundings of the noise source is representedby a one-digit value giving the sound volume in thislocation which can be calculated from the sound pre-

ssure levels of its individual frequency components. For practical purposes, noise measurements are perfor -med in accordance with the ISO 3743 - 2 Standard atfrequencies ranging from 45 to 11200Hz. This range isdivided into eight parts (octave bands) while the ratio of limiting frequencies is 1:2. Noise-meters are equippedwith transmittance lters corresponding to the respecti-ve octave bands, while the value measured in a parti-cular octave band is indicated as the mean frequencyof the octave band. The above described differences inhuman physiological sensitivity to noise components of different frequencies can be simulated by so-called "Co-

rrecting Weighting A". Basically, it is a correction of theacoustic pressure level measured value within particular octave bands by correction factors set by the standard(for mean frequencies - refer to Table # 3).

1 - Value of nominal power supply voltage2 - Maximum power input of the motor at working point 5c.

3 - Maximum current at nominal voltage at working point 5c.

4 - Mean speed, rounded to tens, measured at working point 5b.5 - Capacitor capacity with single-phase fans.

6 - Maximum permissible transported air temperature.7 - Maximum air ow at working point 5c.8 - Maximum total pressure between points 5a - 5c

9 - Minimum permissible static pressure at point 5c.10-Total weight of the fan.11-Recommended fan output controller.

12-Recommended protecting relay of the fan without controller and

control unit.

Noise Parameters

Noise parameters are measured in Remak's special

acoustic chamber adjacent to the aerodynamic testinglaboratory. The method of measurement enables theacoustic parameters to be measured at the selected fanload in accordance with ISO 3743.The uniform method of evaluation and presentation of noise emissions of air-handling devices has not beenconstituted yet. Standards in effect allow the use of se-

veral methods. The facts mentioned above must alwaysbe taken into account when comparing data provided bydifferent manufacturers (2.

To understand the data contained in this catalogue,refer to the following glossary, the description of used

measuring methods, and the assessment outline of themeasured data.

Tabulka 2 charakteristiky hodnot

(2 Attention! Some manufacturers present their noiseparameters at the maximum fan speed area, i.e. at zero air ow

rate, where the noise is the lowest. In practice, these values are

not applicable.


As far as the fan's operation, shape of the working cha-

racteristic and the fan's state parameters are concernedit makes no difference whether the fan at the particu-

lar air ow rate is throttled to the pressure loss ?ps inthe inlet or outlet, or whether the pressure loss ?ps is

divided. A table showing the most important values issituated next to each fan's characteristic in the "DataSection" of this catalogue (Table 2). These values arealso listed on the fan's rating plate.The meaning of individual lines is as follows:

RP 40-20/20-4D

1 –

2 –

3 –

4 –

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 –

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 –

Table 2 - Fan Parameters

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor

Max. working temp.

Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure

Min. static pressure (5c)

Weight

Five-stage controller

Protecting relay

m



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


Correction of these measured values is called "Fre-

quency Weighting". Values of the sound pressure inoctave bands, corrected by the correction factors for these bands, are expressed as a sound level in octavebands L

pA okt.

The total sound level LpA can be calculated from theknown values of the sound level in octave bands LpA okt

L PA

i

n L PAiokt

==

∑10 101

10

log

where LPAi okt

okt is the sound pressure level in the "i"octave band.

Sound Power

As mentioned in the preceding section, the sound pre-

ssure, sound pressure level and sound level depend onthe actual conditions of measuring (distance from thesound source, room size, reection, acoustic wave ab-

sorption capability of insulation materials situated withinthe source's surrounding, etc). Therefore, these valuesare not suitable to specify the acoustic properties of thedevice. The sound power value is used for this purpo-

se; this value species the source of acoustic waves,e.g. a fan, independently of the current conditions of the acoustic measurement, and represents the total

sound power radiated by the source to its surrounding.The sound power is measured in Watts. The followingrelationship is valid between sound power and soundpressure

W S p

c= ⋅

⋅

2

ρ

Sound Power Level LW

Sound power level species the source of acoustic wa-

ves independently of the environment. Sound power level is dened by the following relationship

L

W

W W = 10

0

log

where W0

is a reference sound power W0

= 10 -12 W.

It is necessary to emphasize that the sound power levelis not measured but calculated from the measured va-

lues of the sound pressure level. L

pA okt.

and LpA

values are measured with noise sources,for example, fans, using noise meters, then the A-scale

sound power level, i.e. LWA, can be calculated, which isthen used as a value to specify the acoustic propertiesof the device in question (fan).In the "Data Section" of this catalogue you can nd theL

WAvalue - A-scale sound power level and values L

WAokt

for individual mean frequencies of octave bands

Measuring Method Used

It is necessary to stress the fact that the values presen-

ted by the manufacturer are measured under conditionsspecied by the standard used. These values cannotexpress noise conditions in a particular location or roomin which the device, for example, fan, is to be installed.

The actual sound level depends on many other factorssuch as the construction-acoustic properties of theroom, respectively space, distance from the noise sour -ce, room interior furnishing, etc.When working on a particular project, rst it is necessa-

ry to familiarize yourself with the method used by themanufacturer to measure presented parameters, thento analyze the location of the device which is the noisesource and make a preliminary calculation of the soundlevel in the place of movement of persons. If unfavou-

rable noise conditions are expected, it is necessary tosuggest measures to decrease the sound level.

Eventually, it is advisable to verify the actual soundlevel on the site, and if necessary suggest additionalmeasures.The method in accordance with the ČSN ISO 3743Standard, i.e. technical methodology for reverberantchambers, was used to determine the noise parametersof fans, i.e. sound power level L

WA, presented in this

catalogue. In accordance with this Standard, the soundpressure levels in octave bands L

PAoktwere measured,

from which the sound power levels in these octavebands L

WAoktwere calculated.

In the Data Section of this catalogue you can nd, inaddition to the characteristic of each fan, the values

of sound power level LWA [dB(A)] and LWAokt [dB(A)] for working point 5b on the curve corresponding to nominalvoltage, while the sound power presented was calcula-

ted from the measurement towards the inlet, outlet andsurrounding (Table # 4).

Table 3 - Correction factors of A-scale weighting ltMean frequencyof the octave band

Correction of the

sound power K Ai

Correction curve of A scale weighting lter

A c o u s t i c p o w e r c o r r e c t i o n

Mean frequency of octave bands (Hz)



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


3. If the noise is transmitted via a duct (the fan is si-tuated outside the room) it is necessary to reduce thecalculated values of the sound power by the attenuationcorresponding to the planned duct line, ventilation grills,attenuators, etc.

4. From the catalogue select a suitable fan complyingwith the calculated value (if the fan is situated directly inthe room - maximum value of the sound power, other -wise follow point 3), respectively the fan closest to thegiven value.

5. When selecting the fan, also take into account theoption of the working point considering the requiredsound level. The fan's maximum value of the soundpower level is within the area of maximum air ow (i.e.point 5c).

6. If no value of sound power listed in this cataloguecomplies with the requirements, it is possible to consultthe manufacturer for values of the sound power of other fan output characteristics, i.e. curves # 4, 3, 2, or 1, or for other working points.

7. Apply additional measures to attenuate noise: atte-

nuators (see "Accessories" Catalogue), attenuation bythe ceiling, anti-noise insulation, change in the fan'slocation or duct line, etc.Warning: The sound power level indicates the po-

wer radiated to the surrounding of the fan, and the

sound level in the particular place, respectively in

the room, cannot be directly assumed from its va-

lues without the appropriate calculation. The sound

level values are, due to the inuence of the environ-ment (attenuation, directionality, reection, etc.),

numerically signicantly lower than the values of

the sound power level.

Markings Usedm weight kgS area, surface m2V air ow rate m3/hn speed rpm

t air temperature °C∆p

sstatic pressure difference Pa

∆pt total pressure differencePap

ddynamic pressure Pa

ρ air specic density kg/m3

LWsound power level dB

LWA

A scale sound power level dB(A)L

WAoktA scale octave sound power level dB(A)

LPA

A scale sound pressure level dB(A)W sound power WW0 reference sound power 10 -12 W W

p sound pressure Pap0 reference sound pressure 2.10 -5 Pa

c sound velocity m/sKA A weighting lter correction dB(A)U voltage VI current AP electric input WC capacity mF

In air-handling equipment, the

values of the sound power le-vel will be closer to the valuesvalid for working point 5b. A schematic drawing of themeasured fan position in theroom in which the measure-

ment is performed is shown ingure # 4 (towards inlet, outlet,surrounding).

Outline of Noise

Attenuation Methods

The fans of the Vento air-hand-

ling system are intended for di-rect installation into duct lines,and thanks to the quality of their design they generallyprovide very favourable values of noise parameters.In some cases, especially if fans are not located in aseparate technical background of the building, and for example are situated in the ceiling, it will be necessaryto consider thoroughly the option of a suitable fan typeand its working point which provide the required air owrate, respectively pressure, at minimum noisiness.Generally, we can say that fan noisiness depends onthe following:

Fan speed, i.e. number of motor's poles (with increa-

sing speed the noisiness is increased signicantly)

n Design (backward or forward curved impeller bladesand shape of the casing).

Air ow rate at the given working point.

When considering the noise parameters of the designedequipment, the following procedure is recommended:

1. Specify the maximum permissible sound level in thegiven location.

2. The relevant sound power level of the noise sourcecan be calculated from the known, respectively consi-

dered data like room size, wall material and its relatedcoefcient of sound absorption, and distance from thenoise source.

Table 4 - Sound power values

Figure 4

Total sound power level LWA

[dB(A)]

Sound power level LWAokt

[dB(A)]

to outlet

to inlet

Point

Inlet Outlet Surrounding

to surrounding



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Dimensions, Weights and Performance

For important dimensions of RP fans, refer to Figure # 5and Table # 5.

Obrázek 4

m

Vmax.

– maximum air ow rate at minimum permissible pressure loss

∆pt max.

– maximum total pressure of the fan is maximum sum of ∆ps

and pd

(∆ps

+ pd) max.

∆ps min.

– minimum allowed static pressure (pressure loss of connected duct) indicates the lowest value to which the fan must

be throttled (at nominal voltage at working point 5c) not to be overloaded and thus opening the thermo-contacts and activating

motor protection.

N – fan speed measured at the highest efciency working point (5b), rounded to tens.

U – nominal power supply voltage of the motor without control (all values in the table are to this voltage).

Pmax.

– maximum electric input of the motor at maximum loading, i.e. at air ow Vmax.

Imax. – maximum phase current at voltage U and maximum allowed loading, i.e. at air ow Vmax at working point 5c(this value must be checked and measured current must be written on the guarantee card)

tmax.

– maximum permissible transported air temperature at air ow Vmax.

C – prescribed capacitor capacity with single-phase fans

control – prescribed fan output voltage controller

m – weight of the fan (±10%)

G is maximum dimension;it can be lower depending

on the terminal box type.

Fan Parameters

Figure 5 - Fan Dimensional Diagram

Table 5 - Fan dimensions

Table 6 - Fan basic parameters and nominal values

FanDimensions in mm

Fan typeController ∆ ∆

RP 100-50/45-..

RP 100-50/56-..

∝Single-phase fans

Three-phase fans

m



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Fan parameters

Data Section

Table 7 contains all RP fans arranged accordingto total pressure and maximum air ow to make ittransparent. However, in most cases the airow-pre-

ssure interrelationship is more important than onlythe maxima of individual values.Graph 2 enables quick selection of a suitable fanand alternate comparison of RP fans. Only thehighest characteristics of each fan at nominal supplyvoltage, i.e. without a controller or with a controller set to ve stage, are included in this graph.The Data Section of the catalogue contains all im-

portant information and measured data of RP fans.

Table 7 - Fans listed according to pressure and output

Graph 2

∆

FANS IN ASCENDING ORDER ACCORDING TO MAXIMUM OUTPUT

ACCORDING TO MAX. PRESSURE ACCORDING TO MAX. AIRFLOW

Fan

TypeFanType

Max. airowTotal pressure

pt max

(Pa)

∆ p t - t o t a l p r e s s u r e ( P a )

RP FAN CHARACTERISTICS

QUICK SELECTION

V - air-ow rate (m3/h)



RP Fans

V – air-ow rate (m3/h)

∆ p t – t o t a l p r e s s u r e ( P a )




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point

Parameters in selected working points

5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP 40-20/20-4D

RP 40-20/20-4E

m

40

m



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RP 50-25/22-6D

RP 50-25/22-4D

m

m



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP 50-25/22-4E

RP 50-30/25-6D

Forbidden(Non-working)

Area

m

m



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RP 50-30/25-4D

m

m

RP 50-30/25-4E



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP 60-30/28-6D

m

m

RP 60-30/28-6D



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

m

m

RP 60-30/28-4E

RP 60-35/31-6D


Area



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

m

m

RP 60-35/31-4D

RP 70-40/35-8D


Area



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

m

m

RP 70-40/35-6D

RP 70-40/35-4D

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

m

m

RP 80-50/40-8D

RP 80-50/40-6D



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

m

m

RP 80-50/40-4D

RP 90-50/45-4D



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

m

m

RP 90-50/45-6D

RP 90-50/45-8D



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

Forbidden

(Non-working)

Area

m

m

RP 100-50/45-4D

RP 100-50/45-6D



RP Fans






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Point


5b 5b 5b

Inlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Point


5b 5b 5bInlet

Voltage

Outlet Surrounding

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

∆

∆

∆

∆

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

m

m

RP 100-50/45-8D

RP 100-50/56-4D



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Installation

RP fans (including other Vento elements and equip-

ment) are not intended, due to their concept, for directsale to end customers. Each installation must be perfor -med in accordance with a professional project created

by a qualied air-handling designer who is responsiblefor the proper selection of fan. The installation and co-

mmissioning may be performed only by an authorizedcompany licensed in accordance with generally validregulations.The fan must be checked carefully before its installa-

tion, especially if it has been stored for a longer time.In particular, it is necessary to check all parts and cableinsulation for damage, and whether the rotary parts canrotate freely.n It is recommended to insert the DV elastic connecti-ons in front of and behind the fan (see Figure # 6).

It is advisable to always place the KFD or VFK air l-ters in front of the fan to protect the fan and duct again-

st dirtying and dust fouling.n If the fan is installed in such a way that persons or ob-

jects can come into contact with the impeller, the guardgrid must be mounted.In cramped areas, it is advisable to consider thenecessity to situate directly behind the fan's outlet theduct adapting piece, attenuator, heat exchanger, heater,etc. Figure # 7 shows the fan's outlet design and arran-

gement. It is obvious that from the entire cross-section(e.g. 500 x 250) only 1/4 of the outlet cross-section isfree.

Dividing

partition

Figure 6 - Application of elastic connections

Figure 7 - Fan outlet arrangement

Installation, Maintenance and Service

Spiral

casing

Free

outlet

(4 This recommendation applies for all duct fans

This means that the airow velocities close behind thefan can be as much as four times higher than, for exam-

ple, in the inlet. Therefore, the greater the distance of

Figure 9 - Suspension using perforated strips

Figure 8 - Fan anchoring

attenuators (or other resistant elements) from the outlet,the better (4. On the inlet side, the DV elastic connecti-on will be sufcient as a distance piece in most cases.The fan must be suspended by separate suspensi-ons so that no loading can be transferred to the elasticconnections or connected duct. Anchoring to the ceiling with steel anchors and sus-

pension using threaded rods (see g. # 8), perforatedgalvanized strips (see g. # 9) or an ancillary construc-

tion is recommended.

RP fans can work in any position. When positionedunder the ceiling, it is advisable to situate the fan withits motor cup directed downwards to ease access to themotor terminal b.

If transported air is oversaturated with moisture or if the risk of intensive and permanent steam condensationinside the fan exists (e.g. showers, kitchens, laundryplants, etc.), it is better to situate the fan's motor capupwards!

Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing ontothe connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento system, use galvanized screws and nutsM8 (M10 only for RP 90-50 and RP 100-50). It is ne-

cessary to ensure conductive connection of the angeusing fan-washers placed on both sides, at least on one

ange connection.To brace the anges with a side longer than 40 cm, itis advisable to connect them in the middle with another screw clamp which prevents ange bar gapping (seeg. # 10).



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


WiringThe wiring can be performed only by a qualied wor -

ker licensed in accordance with national regulations.The fans can be equipped with two types of terminalboxes:a) An all-plastic terminal box xed with screws to thefan casing, and equipped with WAGO terminals; max.cross-section of connecting conductors 1.5 mm2 (seeg. # 11).b) A plastic terminal box xed with screws to the motor stator, equipped with screw terminals (see g. # 12).

The wiring connection to the terminals can be per-

formed following the marking on the motor cables in theterminal box, or following the label on the terminal boxlid.

The following cables are recommended to connectfan motors:HO5VVH2 - F 2Ax0.75 - thermo contact circuitCYKY 3Cx1.5 - single-phase motor power supplyCYKY 4Bx1.5 - three-phase motor power supply The fan can be started after its mounting into theduct system for which it has been designed, respective-

ly fully throttled by closing either the intake or dischargeto avoid its overloading! (Applicable for fans with non-

-working area). The fan is loaded by increasing the

air ow, i.e. by releasing the throttling.

After starting the fan with three-phase motor, the co-

rrect direction of the impeller rotation must be checked.To do so, remove the rubber plug from the inspectionopening in the fan cup (see g. # 13).

Obrázek 10 – screw connection

Figure 11 - All-plastic terminal box on the casing

Figure 12 - Plastic terminal box on the stator

Figure 13 - Rubber plug of the inspection opening

After starting the fan, the current must also be me-

asured, and it must not exceed the maximum allowedcurrent Imax. stated on the rating plate. If the measured

values exceed the given current value, it is necessary tocheck the duct system regulation.The fans are equipped with thermo-contacts situatedin the motor winding; they are connected to the TK ter -minals. If the motor is overloaded, the thermo-contactwill open. To evaluate the failure, the thermo-contactmust be connected to the control or regulating system(e.g. control unit, TRN controller or STE(D) relay) whichis able to evaluate the failure, and protect the motor against unwanted thermal effects. The proper functio-

ning of the control system must ensure that after coo-

ling down and the thermo-contact closing, the motors

cannot be spontaneously started. Before restarting thefan (failure deblocking), it is necessary to check theduct system regulation, the electrical parameters of themotor and the entire wiring.

Rubber plug

Arrow indicating thedirection of rotation



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Operation, Maintenance and ServiceThe fan does not require special maintenance. Duringoperation, it is especially necessary to check proper functioning of the fan, its smooth running, to keep it andits surroundings clean, and to load the fan only withinthe range given by its output characteristics.If a failure occurs, make sure that the power supply isdisconnected. Check the fan for foreign objects inside,free impeller rotation. If the fan does not run after it hasbeen restarted, the following procedures must be follo-

wed depending on the protection system used:If the fan is protected by STE or STD relays: Turn

the fan on/off using the buttons on the protecting relay.n If the fan is protected by a TRN controller: Turn thefan on/off using the switch on the remote controls of thecontroller.

If the fan is protected by the control unit: Press theunblocking button on the control unit (the horn symbol),and restart the unit.If the fan does not start: Check the wiring, and measurethe motor winding impedance. If the motor is damaged,contact your supplier.Warning! When performing any maintenance or re-

pairs, the device must always be disconnected from

the power supply!

Figure 14 - Wiring diagram

TK

– motor thermo-contact terminalsU1, U2

– single-phase motor power supplyterminals 1f - 230V/50HzPE

– protective conductor terminal

TK

– motor thermo-contact terminalsU1, V1, W1

– three-phase motor power supplyterminals 3f - 230V/50HzPE



On the following pages you will nd some basicexamples of the fan connection to output controllersand control units. AeroCAD software is available for precise design of the wiring.

The wiring diagrams with front-end elements (protectiverelays, controllers, control units) are included in the in-

stallation manual, respectively in the AeroCAD project.

single-phasefan motor

three-phasefan motor



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP Fans without Output Control

and with STE(D) Protecting Relay Figure 14 - Fan connection

The RP fan connection in a simple venting system wit-hout output control is shown in gure # 14.

This connection ensures:Full thermal protection of the fan using thermo-con-

tacts and protecting relay, STE (single-phase) or STD(three-phase).Manual switching of the fan on/off using buttons onthe STE(D) protecting relay.

After pressing the button marked "I" on the STE(D) protecting relay,the fan starts and the button will stay in the depressed position, sig-

nalling the fan's operation. The fan can be stopped by pressing thebutton marked "0".If the motor winding is overheated above 130 °C due to overloading,the thermo-contacts in the motor winding will open. Upon the thermo-

-contacts opening, which are interconnected with the fan terminal box,the STE(D) protecting relay circuit TK, TK will be disconnected. As areaction to this state, the STE(D) protecting relay will disconnect thepower supply to the overheated motor. After cooling down, the motor is not automatically restarted. The failure must be conrmed (unbloc-

ked) by the operator by pressing the red "I" button.

2 3 0 V

RP

STE (D)

230V / 50Hz(3 x 400 V / 50Hz)

2 3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

( 3 x 4 0 0 V

/ 5 0 H z )

RP Fans with Output Control

and TRN Controller Figure 15 - Fan connection

The RP fan connection in a venting system with outputcontrol using TRN controller with ORe5 controller isshown in gure # 15.This connection ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within thestage range 1-5 as well as full protection via thermo-

-contacts.

Fan switching on/off manually, by the ORe5 remotecontroller or any other switch (like room thermostat, gasdetector, pressostat, hygrostat, etc).

RP

2 4 V =

TRN

ORe5

2 4 V =

Thermostat (optional)

2 3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

( 3 x 4 0 0 V

/ 5 0 H z )

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

Upon selecting the required output stage using a selector on the

ORe5 controller the fan will start at corresponding speed. The closedswitch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals and the thermo-contact cir -cuit connected to TK,TK terminals are essential for the fan operation.The switch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals can externally stop thefan. If this option is not used, it will be necessary to interconnect ter -minals PT1 and PT2.If the fan is overloaded, the thermo-contact circuit will be disconne -

cted due to overheating of the motor winding. As a reaction to thisstate, the controller will disconnect the fan power supply, and the redcontrol light on the ORe controller will signal the failure. After coolingdown, the motor is not automatically restarted. To restart the fan, itis necessary rst to set the selector to the "STOP" position, and thusconrm failure removal, and then to set the required fan output. In thisarrangement, the option "STOP" on Ore5 must not be blocked

Example B

Example A



RP Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RP Fans without Output Control

and with Control Unit Figure 16 - Fan connection

The RP fan without output control connection in moresophisticated venting systems using the control unit is

shown in gure # 16.This connection ensures:Full thermal protection of the fan via thermo-contactsand control unit.Fan switching on/off by the control unit. The motor protection must always be ensured by the control unitwhile TK,TK thermo-contact terminals are connected to5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the control unit.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protectingand safety functions of the fan as well as the entire system are ensu -

red by the control unit.

24 V=

3 x 4 0 0

V

/ 5 0 H z

2 3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

3x 400V / 50 Hz

RP

24 V=

RP

RP Fans with TRN Controllers

and Control Unit Figure 17 - Fan connection

The RP fan with TRN output controllers and a commoninternal controller in more sophisticated venting sys-

tems using the control unit is shown in gure # 17. Theinternal controller is installed in the control unit duringproduction.This connection ensures:Fan switching on/off by the control unit. The motor

protection must always be ensured by the control unitwhile TK,TK thermo-contact terminals are connected to5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the control unit.Common selection of fan output by the internal se-

lector within the stage range 1-5. The control unit canbe equipped with two internal selectors, wile each fancan be controlled separately. In the connection accor -ding to example D, all additional functions of the contro-

ller must always be blocked by interconnecting the PT2and E48 terminals in the controller.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protectingand safety functions of fans as well as the entire system are ensured

by the control unit.

TRN TRN

3

x400V,50H

z

RP

3

x4

00V,50Hz

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

2 4 V

=

Control

unit

RP

2 4 V =

2 30

V,50Hz

2 4 V

=

3x 400V / 50 Hz3x 400V / 50 Hz

Control

unit

C

o n t r o l u n i t

Example D

Example C



RP Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP Fans with Automatic Output Control, TRN Contro-

ller and OSX Control Unit Figure 18 - Fan connection

The RP fan connection in a special venting system withautomatic output control using TRN controller and OSX

control unit is shown in gure # 18. Two TRN controllerscan be controlled by the OSX control unit. The fans arecontrolled together to the same output.This connection ensures: Automatic selection of the fan output within the stagerange 0 - 5 as well as its protection via thermo-contactsand the protection integrated into the TRN controller. Automatic selection of the controller output stage is en-

sured by the OX controller integrated into the OSX con-

trol unit in relation to any physical quantity which is readby the active sensor equipped with an analogue output(signal source 0- -10V). The OSX control unit has seve-

ral additional functions. One of them is the possibility to

stop fan operation using the "STOP" button regardlessof the value of the input voltage.Manual start of the system at the output stage co-

rresponding to the selected voltage. Regardless of theactual value of the control voltage, it is possible, usingthe "MANUAL" button, to connect the input of the OXcontroller for the voltage selected by the TEST trimmer OX controller. The OX controller factory default settingof this button feature is to the full output..

The fans in the picture are started, controlled and protected by TRNcontroller. Automatic OX controller evaluates the continuous signalof 0-10V coming from the converter (source of the signal) and in six

adjustable levels switches stages 0-5. Thermal or pressure converter,converters for measurement of relative or absolute humidity, concen-

tration of gas, vapours or explosives in air, sensors of air quality andmany other converters of different physical quantities can be used assources of the control signal.

If the fan is overloaded, the thermo-contacts TK, TK will disconnectdue to overheating of the motor winding. The system will switch thepower supply of the overloaded fan off, and the failure will be sig-

nalled by an LED on the OSX control panel. After cooling down, themotor is not automatically restarted. The failure must be conrmed bypressing the separate unblocking button on the OSX control panel for each fan. As most similar installations can vary from case to case, it isadvisable to consult the operating conditions with the manufacturer.

0V – 10V =

24 V =

active sensor (source of 0-10V signal

OSX Control box

230V / 50Hz

RP

230 V, 50 Hz

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

RP

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

3 x 4 0 0 V ,

5 0 H z

TRN

3 x 400 V, 50Hz

TRN

Example E



RQ Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Fan Applications

Fully controlled, low-pressure RQ Radial Fans intended

for square ducts can be universally used for complex

air-conditioning, from simple venting installations to

sophisticated air-handling systems. Ideally, they can be

used along with other components of the Vento modular

system, which ensures inter-compatibility and balanced

parameters.


These fans are designed for indoor and outdoor appli-

cations, and to transport air without solid, brous, sticky,

aggressive, respectively explosive impurities. The

transported air must be free of corrosive chemicals and

chemicals aggressive to zinc and/or aluminium.

The acceptable temperature of transported air can

range from -30 °C to +55 °C, and with type RQ 20-4D

up to +70 °C. The maximum nominal values for eachfan are included in table 4. RQ fans can work in any

position.

Dimensional Range

RQ fans are manufactured in a range of seven sizes ac-

cording to the A x B dimensions of the connecting outlet

ange. Several fans differing mainly in the number of

poles the motor uses are available for each size. When

planning the fan for the required air ow and pressure,

the following general rule is applied; fan motors with a

higher number of poles reach the required parameters

at lower RPM, which results in lower noise and longer service life. Fans with a higher number of poles also

have lower air velocity in the cross section, which re-

sults in lower pressure losses in the duct and accesso-

ries, however, at higher investment costs. The standard

dimensional and performance range of single-phase

and three-phase RQ fans enables designers to optimize

all parameters for air ow up to 7.800 m3 per hour.

Materials

The external casing of RQ fans is made of galvanized

steel sheets (Zn 275 g/m2). Impeller blades and diffus-

ers are always made of galvanized sheet steel while

motors are made of aluminium alloys, copper andplastics. The motor's high quality enclosed ball bear-

ings with permanent lubricating lling enable the fans

to reach a service life above 40,000 operating hours

without maintenance. All materials are carefully veried,

checked so they ensure long service life and reliability.

Motors

Compact single-phase and three-phase asynchronous

motors with an external rotor and a resistance armature

are used as drives. The motors are situated inside the

impeller, and during operation are optimally cooled by

the owing air. The motors feature low build-up current.Impellers along with the motor are perfectly statically

and dynamically balanced. The motor electric protec-

tion degree is IP 54 for RQ and IP 44 for RQ 25 with F

insulation class. The motor windings are impregnated

providing additional protection against moisture.


The wiring is terminated in a terminal box of IP 54 pro-

tection degree. Single-phase motors are equipped with

a starting capacitor which is mounted on the fan casing.

For wiring diagrams, refer to a separate section.

Warning: Three-phase motors must be connected in

accordance with the data stated in the section "Techni-

cal Data", respectively on the motor rating plate.

Motor Protection

As standard, permanent monitoring of the internal motor

temperature is used in all motors. The limit temperature

is monitored by thermal contacts (TK-thermo-contacts)

situated in the motor winding. The thermo-contacts are

miniature thermal tripping elements which after being

connected to the protective contactor circuit protect the

motor against overheating (damaging) due to phase

failure, forced motor braking, current protection circuitbreakdown or excessive temperature of the transported

air. Thermal protection by means of thermo-contacts is

comprehensive and reliable providing they are correctly

connected. This type of protection is essential espe-

cially for speed controlled and frequently started motors

and motors highly thermally loaded by hot transported

air.

Therefore, the fan motors cannot be protected by con-

ventional thermal protection ensured by the motor over-

current protective elements!

Maximum permanent thermo-contact loading is 1.2

AMP at 250V / 50V (cos ϕ 0.6), (respectively 2 AMP atcos ϕ 1.0).

Fan Output Control

Generally, several types of control can be used with

fans. However, voltage control is the most suitable for

RQ fans. RQ fans can be steplessly controlled providing

the change in voltage is stepless. In practice, stage volt-

age controllers are most often used. TRN stage voltage

controllers can control the fan output in ve stages in

20% steps, with which ve pressure-airow relation cur -

ves in the working characteristic of each fan comport.

(1 RQ fan motors can be operated within a range from approx. 25%to 110% of the rated voltage.(2 For detailed information, refer to the chapter "Fan Output controllers".

Refer to table 1(1 showing the correlation between the

input voltage and selected stage of the controller for

single-phase and three-phase motors. All values re-

spect the European 400/230 V power supply system.

The recommended product line includes single-phase

and three-phase TRN controllers (simplied TRRE andTRRD controllers can also be used to control RQ fans;

however, they do not provide a protection function (2

Technical information

Table 1 - input voltage and controller's stage

Motor type

Single-phase

Three-phase

Controller's stage and voltage



RQ Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Measuring the Parameters

The output characteristics of RQ fans are measured in

the modern REMAK testing laboratory for aerodyna-

mic and electrical measurements of fans and pressure

losses of passive elements. This testing laboratory

is equipped with a LabView® computer system from

National Instruments® for the automatic collection and

evaluation of all measured data. This testing laboratory

complies with EN 24 163 and AMCA STANDARD 210-

74(3 Standards.

Noise parameters of RQ fans are measured in

REMAK's acoustic testing laboratory in accordance with

the ISO 3743 Standard, which establishes the technical

method of the sound power level determination in a

special reverberant chamber. A measuring line of aero-

dynamic parameters is used to set the fan to the requi-

red working point when measuring the noise.


Output characteristics in the "Data Section" (page 40)

determine the relationship curve of the air ow rate

V (m3/h) and total fan pressure Dpt= Dp

s+Dp

d(Pa). For

an explanation of the correlations and relations of im-

portant data, refer to the section "RF Fans" .

Noise Parameters

In the "Data Section" of this catalogue you will nd noi-

se parameters radiated to the outlet, surroundings and

inlet.

The total sound power level LWA [dB (A)], i.e. the total

level of the radiated A-scale sound power, is alwaysgiven.Further, the octave value LWAokt of the A-scale

sound power level for octave bands from 125 Hz to 8

kHz is also given. (4

Fan Description and Designation A table showing the most important values is included in

addition to each fan's characteristics in the "Data Secti-

on" of the catalogue. The meaning of individual lines is

explained in the following table 2. These values are also

listed on each fan's rating plate.

RQ 28 - 4 D

Motor

E - single-phase

D - three-phase


4 - four-pole

6 - six-pole

8 - eight-pole


Fan Type

(3 For more detailed information on the testing method, refer to

REMAK Air-handling Magazine No. 2, available at www.remak.eu (4 For a recap of technical acoustic terms, an explanation of the

measuring methodology and an outline of noise attenuation, refer to the

catalogue sections "Duct Radial Fans" or "RF Roof Fans.

Type designation of RQ spiral fans in projects and or-

ders is dened by the key (see gure # 1). For example,

type designation RP 28-4D species the type of fan,

impeller and motor (6

(5 Operation of the fan without controller and control unit

(6 The requirement for non-standard materials must be expressly

specied in your order.

Accessories

RQ fans belong in the wide range of Vento modular

venting and air-handling system components. Any air-

-handling set-up, from simple venting to sophisticated

comfortable air-conditioning, can be created by selecti-

ng suitable elements. The following accessories can be

ordered along with RQ fans:

Elastic connections DV, DK, counter-anges

(page 241)

TRN Controllers and their controls

TRRE, TRRD Controllers

STE, STD Protecting Relays


Figure 1 – Fan designation

Table 2 - Fan marking

.

Fan type designation

Value of nominal power supply voltage

Maximum power input of the motor at working point

Maximum current at nominal voltage at working point

Mean speed, rounded to tens, measured at working point 5b

Capacitor capacity with single-phase fans

Maximum permissible transported air temperature

Maximum air ow at working point 5c

Maximum total pressure between points 5a - 5c

Minimum permissible static pressure at point 5c

Total weight of the fan

Recommended fan output controller

Recommended protecting relay (5

µ



RQ Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Figure 2 - Fan Dimensions

Table 4 - Fan's basic parameters and nominal values

Table 3 - Fan Dimensions

Explanation of symbols used in table # 4V

max.- maximum air ow rate at minimum

permissible pressure loss

n - fan speed measured at the highest efciency

working point (5b), rounded to tens

U - nominal power supply voltage of the motor

without control

Pmax.

- maximum power input of the motor

Imax.

- maximum phase current at voltage U and

maximum allowed loading, i.e. at air ow

Vmax

at working point 5c

t max. - maximum permissible transported air temperature at air ow Vmax.

C - prescribed capacitor capacity with

single-phase fans

control - prescribed fan output voltage controller

m - weight of the fan (±10%)

Dimensions, Weights andPerformance

For important dimensions of RQ fans, refer

to gure # 2 and table # 3.

Technical data are included in table # 4. All

further important data are included alongwith each fan's characteristics in the "Data

Section" of the catalogue.

µ

(1 Fan's round elastic inlet connection (2 Fan's square elastic outlet connection

Fan parameters

µ



RQ Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Tabulka 5 – textData Sect

Table 5 contains all RQ fans arranged in one column

according to total pressure and maximum air ow to

make it transparent. However, in most cases the air -

ow-pressure interrelationship is more important than

only the maxima of individual values.

Graph 1 enables quick selection of a suitable fan and

alternate comparison of RQ fans. Only the highest cha-

racteristics of each fan at nominal supply voltage, i.e.

without a controller or with a controller set to the fth

stage, are included in this graph.

RQ FAN CHARACTERISTICS FOR QUICK SELECTION



Fan parameters

Graph 1

Table 5 - Fans listed according to pressure/air ow



Ventilátory RQ


Point

Inlet Outlet SurroundingPoint






[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 20-4E

RQ 20-4D

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point









[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RQ 22-4E

RQ 22-6D

Forbidden

(non-working) area

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point







[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 22-4D

RQ 25-4E

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point









[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RQ 25-6D

RQ 25-4D

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point







[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 28-4E

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point









[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RQ 28-4D

RQ 31-6D

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point







[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 31-4D

RQ 35-8D

µ

µ

Forbidden

(non-working) area



Ventilátory RQ


Point









[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RQ 35-6D

RQ 35-4D

Forbidden

(non-working) area

Forbidden

(non-working) area

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point







[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]




[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 40-8D

RQ 40-6D

µ

µ



Ventilátory RQ


Point









[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Installation

RQ fans (including other Vento elements and equi-

pment) are not intended, due to their concept, for di-

rect sale to end customers. Each installation must be

performed in accordance with a professional project

created by a qua-

lied air-handling

designer who is

responsible for

the proper selec-

tion of fan. Theinstallation and

commissioning

may be perfor-

med only by an

authorized com-

pany licensed in

accordance with

generally valid

regulations.

The fan must

be checked care-

fully before its in-stallation, especi-

ally if it has been

stored for a longer time. In particular, it is necessary to

check all parts and the cable insulation for damage, and

to see whether the rotating parts can rotate freely.

Figure 3 - Anchoring openings


It is recommended to use elastic connections; a DV

elastic connection on the discharge side and the DK

elastic connection on the intake side.

It is advisable to always place an air lter in front of

the fan to protect it and the duct against dirtying and

dust fouling.

If the fan is installed in such a way that persons or

objects can come into contact with the impeller, the

guard grid must be mounted.

The RQ fans are provided on three sides with an-choring holes to be anchored to the foundations in one

of three possible positions (see g. #3). The

RQ fans can be anchored with four anchoring bolts; ho-

wever, we recommend using silent-blocks to eliminate

the transfer of vibrations.

All versions of RQ fans can work in any position.

Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing onto

the connecting ange face. To connect individual parts

of the Vento system, use galvanized screws and nuts

M8. It is necessary to ensure conductive connection of

the ange using fan-washers placed on both sides, at

least on one ange connection.

Wiring

The wiring can be performed only by a qualied wor -

ker licensed in accordance with national regulations.

RQ 40-4D

Forbidden

(non-working) area

µ



RQ Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

To do so, remove the rubber plug from the inspection

opening in the fan cup (see. gure 6).


asured, and it must not exceed the maximum allowed

current Imax.

stated on the rating plate. If the measured

values exceed the given current value, it is necessary tocheck the duct system regulation.

The fans are equipped with thermo-contacts situa-

ted in the motor winding; they are connected to the TK

terminals. If the motor gets too hot, the thermo-contact

will open. The thermo-contact must be connected to the

Rubber plug

Arrow indicating the

direction of rotation

After connecting the fan with

three-phase motor, the proper direction of the impeller rotation

must be checked. The inspecti-

on opening on the motor cup is

sealed with a rubber plug. The

RQ fans' impellers rotate always

to the left, i.e. counter clockwise

(looking through the inspection

opening on the motor cup).

RQ fans can be equipped with two types of connecti-

ng terminal boxes:

a) An all-plastic terminal box xed with screws to the

fan casing, and equipped with WAGO terminals; max.

cross-section of connecting conductors 1.5 mm2 (see

g. # 4).

b) A plastic terminal box xed with screws to the motor

stator, and equipped with screw terminals (see g. # 5).

The wiring connection to the terminals can be perfor-

med following the marking on the motor cables, descrip-

tion of terminals or the label on the terminal box lid.

The following cables are recommended to connect

fan motors:

H05VVH2 -F 2Ax0,75 – thermo-contact circuit

CYKY 3Cx1,5 – single-phase motor supply

CYKY 4Bx1,5 – three-phase motor supply

The fan can be started after its mounting into the

duct system for which it has been designed; respective-

ly fully throttled by closing either the intake or dischargeto avoid its overloading!

The fan is loaded by increasing the air ow, i.e.

by releasing the throttling.

After starting the fan with three-phase motor, the pr-

oper direction of the impeller rotation must be checked.

Figure 4 and 5 – Plastic terminal box

Figure 6 – Rubber plug location


control or regulating system (e.g. control unit, TRN con-

troller or STE relay) which is able to evaluate the failure,

and protect the motor against unwanted thermal effects.

The proper functioning of the controller must ensure

that after cooling down and the thermo-contact closing,

the motor cannot be spontaneously started. Beforerestarting the fan (failure unblocking), it is necessary to

check the duct system regulation, the electrical parame-

ters of the motor and the entire wiring.

If the fans are operated without connection to this

protection, our warranty for a damaged motor will be-

come void.

Operation, Maintenance and Service

The fan does not require special maintenance. During

operation, it is necessary to check the proper functio-

ning of the fan, its smooth running, to keep it and its

surroundings clean, and to load the fan only within the

range given by its output characteristics.

If a failure occurs, make sure that the power supply

is disconnected, and check the fan for foreign objects

inside, and free rotation. If the fan does not run after ithas been restarted, the following procedures must be

followed depending on the protection system used:

• If the fan is protected by STE or STD relays:

Turn the fan on/off using the buttons on the protecting

relay.

• If the fan is protected by a TRN controller:

Turn the fan on/off using the switch on the remote cont-

rols of the controller.

• If the fan is protected by the control unit:

It is necessary to turn the unit on again.

If the fan does not start:

Check the wiring, and measure the motor winding impe-dance. If the motor is damaged, contact your supplier.

Warning! When performing any maintenance or re-


the power supply!

Figure 7 - Terminal wiring diagram

fan single-phasemotor

TK

- motor thermo-contact terminals

U1, U2

- single-phase motor power supply

terminals 1f - 230V/50Hz

PE

- protective conductor terminal

TK

- motor thermo-contact terminals

U1, V1, W1

- three-phase motor power supply

terminals 3f - 230V/50Hz

PE

- protective conductor terminal

fan three-phasemotor

The wiring diagrams with front-end elements (protecti-

ve relays, controllers, control units) are included in theinstallation manual, respectively in the AeroCAD project

of their elements (see gure # 7).



RQ Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Example ARQ Fans with Output Control

and TRN Control

RQ

Example ARQ Fans without Output Control

and with STE Protecting Relay

The RQ fan connection in a simple venting system wit-

hout output control is shown in gure # 8.

This connection ensures:

Thermal protection of the fan using thermo-contactsand protecting relay, STE (single-phase) or STD (three-

-phase).

Manual switching on/off of the fan using buttons on

the STE(D) protecting relay

After pressing the button marked "I" on the STE(D) protecting relay,

the fan starts and the button will stay in the depressed position, sig-

nalling the fan's operation. The fan can be stopped by pressing the

button marked "0".

If the motor winding is overheated above +130 °C due to overloading,

the thermo-contacts in the motor winding will open. Upon the thermo-

-contacts opening, which are interconnected with the fan terminal box,

the STE(D) protecting relay circuit TK, TK will be disconnected. As a

reaction to this state, the STE(D) protecting relay will disconnect thepower supply to the overheated motor. After cooling down, the motor

is not automatically started. The failure must be conrmed (unbloc-

ked) by the operator by pressing the red "I" button.

STE (D)

230V / 50Hz(3 x 400 V / 50Hz)

2 3 0 V

2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

( 3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z )

Figure 8 - Fan connection


The RQ fan connection in a simple venting system with

one or more fans which must be controlled indepen-

dently using the TRN controller with ORe5 controller is

shown in gure # 9.

This connection of the speed controller ensures:

The possibility of fan output selection within the

stage range 1-5.

Thermal protection of the fan

Fan switching on/off manually by the ORe5 remotecontroller.

Fan switching on/off manually by any other switch

(like room thermostat, gas detector, pressostat, hyg-

rostat, etc.) on terminals PT1, PT2.

Upon selecting the required output stage using a selector on the

ORe5 controller, the fan will start at the corresponding speed. The

closed switch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals and the thermo-con-

tact circuit connected to TK, TK terminals are essential for the fan

operation. The switch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals can externally

stop the fan. If this possibility is not used, it will be necessary to inter-connect terminals PT1 and PT2. If the fan is overloaded, the thermo-

-contact circuit will be disconnected due to overheating of the motor

winding. As a reaction to this state, the controller will disconnect the

fan power supply, and the red control light on the ORe5 controller willsignal the failure. After cooling down, the motor is not automatically

started. To restart the fan, it is necessary rst to set the selector to the

"STOP" position, and thus conrm failure removal, and then to set the

required fan output. In this arrangement, the option "STOP" must not

be blocked.

RQ

3 x 400V, 50Hz (w01)

2 4 V = ( w 0 5 )

3 x 4 0 0 V ( w 0 2 )

230 V, 50Hz (w01)

2 4 V = ( w 0 3 )

2 4 V = ( w 0 5 )

2 4 V = ( w 0 3 )

2 3 0 V ( w 0 2 )

2 4 V = ( w 0 4 )

2 4 V = ( w 0 4 )

Thermostat (optional) Thermostat (optional)

TRN -DTRN -E

RQ

ORe5 ORe5



RQ Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Example CRQ Fans without Output Control

and with Control Unit

The RQ fan without output control connection in more

sophisticated venting systems using the control unit is

shown in gure # 10.

Among others, this connection ensures:

The motor protection (TK thermo-contact terminals

are connected to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the control

unit).

Manual or programmable switching on/off of the en-

tire device using a control unit.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protecting

and safety functions of fans as well as the entire system are ensured

by the control unit.


RQ RQ

24 V=

3 x 4 0 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

2 3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

3x 400V / 50 Hz

24 V=

Example DRQ Fans with TRN Controllers

and Control Unit

Connection of RQ fans equipped with an output control

with two TRN controllers and an independent internal

control for each controller is shown in gure # 11. The

internal controller is installed in the control unit during

production. Among others, this connection ensures:

Manual selection of the fan output within the stage

range 1-5, independently for the inlet and outlet (this

can be used to get the required overpressure or under-

pressure in the room).Thermal protection of the motor (connecting the TK,

TK thermo-contact terminals to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals

in the control unit).

Manual or programmable switching on/off of the enti-

re device using a control unit.

In this connection, all additional functions of the contro-

ller must always be blocked by interconnecting the PT2

and E48 terminals in the controller.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. Internal controls

are integrated into the control unit to control the controllers separately.

Other properties are inuenced by the setting options of connected

components (controllers, controls). All protecting and safety functions

of fans as well as the entire system are ensured by the control unit.


RQ RQ

3 x 4 0 0 V ( w

0 2 )

24 V= (w03)

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z ( w 0 1 ) 24 V= (w03)

2 4 V = ( w

0 4 )

2 4 V =

( w 0 4 )

2 3 0 V

( w 0 2 )

3x400V, 50Hz (w01)

TRNTRN

control

unit

control

unit



RQ Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



RO Fans

Motor

E - single-phase





Duct hinged radial fan

RO 40 - 20 / 22 - 2 E

Fan Applications

Fully controlled, low-pressure RO radial fans are in-

tended to be installed directly in square air ducts. They

can be used for air-conditioning, from simple venting

installations to more sophisticated air-handling systems.

Thanks to easy maintenance and cleaning, they are

especially used for kitchen hood exhausting. Ideally,

they can be used along with other components of the

Vento modular system, which ensure inter-compatibility

and balanced parameters.

Operating Conditions, PositionThese fans are designed for indoor and outdoor appli-

cations, and to transport air without solid, brous, sticky,

aggressive, respectively explosive impurities. For out-

door applications it is necessary to nish the fans with a

protective coating (except the rating plates). The trans-

ported air must be free of corrosive chemicals or chemi-cals aggressive to zinc, aluminium and/or plastics.

Acceptable temperature of transported air can range

from -15 °C to +40 °C (and with some types,

up to +70 °C, see table # 2).

The RO fans can work in any position, which enables

free access to the terminal box and motor.

We recommend adding a 1 to 1.5 m long piece of strai-

ght duct to the fan's outlet to reduce pressure losses in

an assembly.

Dimensional Range

RO fans are manufactured in a range of three sizes

according to the A x B dimensions of the connecting

outlet ange (300 x 150, 400 x 200, 500 x 250 mm).

Materials

The external casing and connecting anges of RO Fans

are made of galvanized steel sheets (Zn 275 g/m2).

Impeller blades are made of plastics while diffusers are

made of galvanized sheet steel, and motors are made

of aluminium alloys, copper and plastics. All materials

are carefully veried and checked so they ensure long

service life and reliability of the fans. Impellers along

with the motor are perfectly statically and dynamically

balanced.

Motors

Compact single-phase synchronous motors with an

external rotor and a resistance armature are used as

drives. The motors are situated inside the impeller, and


Figure 1 - Type designation key of RO fans

during operation are optimally cooled by the owing air.

The motor's high quality enclosed ball bearings with

permanent lubricant lling enable the fans to reach a

service life above 40,000 operating hours without main-

tenance. The motor electric protection degree is IP 54,

insulation class B. The motor windings are impregnatedto provide them with additional protection against mois-

ture.


Single-phase motors are equipped with a starting capa-

citor which is mounted on the fan casing. The wiring is

terminated in a terminal box of IP 54 protection degree.

For wiring diagrams, refer to Page # 60.

Motor Protection

As standard, permanent and automatic monitoring of

the internal motor temperature is used in all motors of RO fans. The limit temperature is monitored by thermal

contacts (TK-thermo-contacts) situated in the motor

winding. The thermo-contacts are miniature thermal tri-

pping elements which are connected in series with the

supply circuit, and thus automatically protect the motor

against overloading due to excessive temperature of

transported air, etc.

Speed Control

The output of all RO fans can be fully controlled by

changing the speed. The fan's speed is changed de-

pending on the voltage at the motor terminals. The fo-

llowing controllers can be used to control the fans:PE 2,5 for stepless control

TRN or TRRE2 for the ve-stage control

Accessories

RO fans are part of the wide range of Vento modular

venting and air-handling system components. Any air-

-handling set-up, from simple venting to sophisticated

comfortable air-conditioning, can be created by selecti-

ng suitable elements.


Type designation of RO duct fans in projects and ordersis dened by the key shown in gure # 1.

For example, type designation RO 40-20 / 22-2E speci-

es the type of fan, impeller and motor.



RO Fans


For important dimensions of RO fans, refer to gure # 2

and table # 1.

Basic parameters and nominal values of RO fans are

included in table # 2 .

Table 1 - RO Fan Dimensions

Table 2 - Basic parameters and nominal values

Vmax.

- maximum air ow rate at minimum permissible pressure loss (free inlet and outlet)

∆pt max.

- maximum total pressure of the fan is maximum sum of ∆ps

and pd

(∆ps

+ pd) max.

∆ps min.

- min. permissible static pressure (i.e. pressure loss of the connected duct)

n - fan speed measured at the highest efciency working point (5b), rounded to tens

U - nominal power supply voltage of the motor without control (all values in the table are related to this voltage)

Pmax.

- maximum electrical input of the motor at maximum loading

Imax.

- maximum phase current at voltage U and maximum allowed loading

tmax.

- maximum permissible transported air temperature

C - prescribed capacitor capacity with single-phase fans

control - prescribed fan output voltage controller

m - weight of the fan (±10%)

∗

The Vento RO radial duct fans

are designed to be installed induct lines or the assembly of

other Vento System air-handling

elements. The Vento RO fan de-

sign is perfectly functional.

Fan casing

Flange

Diffuser

Terminal box

Motor rotor

Impeller

Opening panel

* PE 2,5 stepless fan outputcontrollers are also recommended for RO fans

Fan Parameters

Figure 2 - RO Fan Dimensions

Figure 3 - Fan design

µ



RO Fans

RO 30-15/18-2E

RO 40-20/22-2E

Bod


Current

Speed

Static pressure

Total pressure

Air ow rate

Electric input

Voltage

Point


∆ p t –

t o t a l p r e s s u r e

( P a )



∆ p t –


( P a )


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

PointBodInlet Outlet Surrounding

Current

Speed

Static pressure

Total pressure

Air ow rate

Electric input

Voltage


Point

µ

µ



RO Fans

RO 40-20/25-2E

RO 50-25/25-2E

Bod


∆ p t –


( P a )

∆ p t –


( P a )



[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]


[dB (A)]

BodInlet Outlet Surrounding

Current

Speed

Static pressure

Total pressure

Air ow rate

Electric input

Voltage


Bod


Current

Speed

Static pressure

Total pressure

Air ow rate

Electric input

Voltage


Point

Point

µ

µ



RO Fans

Installation

RO fans (including other Vento elements and equip-

ment) are not intended, due to their concept, for direct

sale to end customers. Each installation must be perfor-

med in accordance with a professional project created

by a qualied air-handling designer who is responsible

for proper selection of the fan. The installation and co-

mmissioning may be performed only by an authorized

company licensed in accordance with generally valid

regulations.

The fan must be checked carefully before its installa-

tion, especially if it has been stored for a longer time. In

particular, it is necessary to check all parts and the ca-

ble insulation for damage, and whether the rotary parts

can rotate freely.

It is recommended to insert the DV elastic connecti-

ons in front of and behind the fan.

It is advisable to always place the KFD or VFK air l-

ters in front of the fan to protect the fan and duct again-

st dirtying and dust fouling.

If the fan is installed in such a way that persons or

objects can come into contact with the impeller, the

guard grid must be mounted.In cramped spaces, it is advisable to consider the

necessity to situate directly behind the fan's outlet the

duct adapting piece, attenuator, heat exchanger, hea-

ter, etc. Figure # 5 shows the fan's outlet design and

arrangement. It is obvious that from the entire cross-se-

(2 This recommendation applies for all duct fans

ction (e.g. 500 x 250) only about 1/2 of the entire outlet

cross-section is free. This means that the airow veloci-

ties close behind the fan can be as much as two times

higher than, for example in the inlet. Therefore, the

longer the distance of the attenuators (or other resistant

elements) from the outlet, the better (2. On the inlet sidethe DV elastic connection will be sufcient as a distance

piece in most cases.

The fan must be suspended by separate suspensi-

ons so that no loading can be transferred to the elastic

connections or connected duct. Anchoring to the ceiling with steel anchors and sus-

pension using threaded rods, perforated galvanized

strips or ancillary construction is recommended.

The RO fans can work in any position. When positi-

oned under the ceiling, it is advisable to situate the fan

with its service panel directed downwards to ease acce-

ss to the motor terminal box.

If transported air is oversaturated with moisture or if

the risk of intensive and permanent steam condensation

inside the fan exists (e.g. showers, kitchens, laundryplants), it is better to situate the opening panel upwards!



Figure 5 - Design and arrangement of the outlet

Dividing partition

Free outlet

Figure 6 - Anchoring to the ceiling

Figure 7 - Anchoring using threaded rods

DV elestic connection



RO Fans


the connecting ange face. To connect individual parts

of the Vento system, use galvanized screws and M8

nuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive connection of


least on one ange connection.To brace anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is

advisable to connect them in the middle with another

screw clamp which prevents ange bar gapping. After loosening the two wing screws, the hinged ope-

ning panel on which the motor and impeller are xed

can be easily opened.

The motor and impeller must be periodically checked

and cleaned. Especially if the fan is connected to the

outlet from a kitchen or an exhaust hood, and the grea-

sy dirt can be expected, the impeller and motor must be

regularly cleaned with warm water and detergent.

Wiring



The fans are equipped with an all-plastic terminal

box xed with screws to the fan service panel. The

terminal box is equipped with WAGO terminals; max.

cross-section of connecting conductors 1.5 mm2 (see

g. # 9).

The wiring connection to the terminals can be perfor-

med following the label on the terminal box lid.

CYKY 3Cx1,5 cable is recommended to connect the

fan motor to the power supply.


asured, and it must not exceed the maximum allowed

current Imax. stated on the rating plate. If the measu-

red values exceed the current value, it is necessary to

check whether the rotary parts can rotate freely.

The fans are equipped with thermo-contacts situa-

ted in the motor winding. If the motor gets too hot, the

thermo-contact will automatically disconnect the power

supply. After cooling down, the thermo-contact closes,

and connects the power supply. Activated thermal

protection mostly signals a failure. If this is the case, it

is necessary to check the duct system regulation, the

electrical parameters of the motor and the entire wiring.


The fan does not require special maintenance.

During operation, it is necessary to check proper func-tioning of the fan, its smooth running, to keep it and its

surroundings clean, and to load the fan only within the

range given by its output characteristics.

If a failure occurs, make sure that the power supply

is disconnected, and check the fan for foreign objects

inside, and free rotation, respectively whether the motor

has overheated.

If the fan does not start: Check the wiring, and me-

asure the motor winding impedance. If the motor is

damaged, contact your supplier or authorized service

centre.

Warning! When performing any maintenance or re-


the power supply!

Figure 8 - Hinged service panel

Opening panelImpeller

Motor

Figure 9 - Plastic terminal box

Terminal box

Capacitor


The wiring diagrams with front-end elements (protective

relays, controllers, control units) are included in the in-


Figure 10 - Terminal wiring diagram

U1, U2

– single-phase motor power supply terminals1f – 230V/50Hz

PE


RO fansingle-phase motor



RO Fans

Example ARO Fans without Output Control

An RO fan connection in a simple venting system wit-

hout output control is shown in gure # 11.


Full thermal protection of the fan via built-in thermo-

-contacts which are connected in series with the motor

winding. Fuse T1 protects only against short circuit.Manual switching on/off of the fan using a switch.

If the motor winding is overheated above +130 °C due to overloading,the thermo-contacts in the motor winding will open. Upon the thermo-

-contacts opening, the power supply will be automatically cut. After

cooling down, the fan is automatically started.

T1

1 x 230 V + N + PE

RO


Example B

An RO fan connection in a venting system with output

control using the PE controller is shown in gure # 12.


Full thermal protection of the fan via built-in thermo-

-contacts which are connected in series with the motor

winding. Fuse T1 protects only against short circuit.

The PE Controller ensures:

Stepless output control

Signalling of the fan's operationIt enables turning the fan on/off manually.

RO Fans with Output Control

using PE Controller Figure 12 - Fan connection

T1

1 x 230 V + N + PE

RO

PE



RO Fans

Obrázek 11b

Example CRO Fans without Output Control

with a control unit

An RO fan without output control connection in more

sophisticated venting systems using the control unit is

shown in gure # 13.


Automatic thermal protection of the fan via built-in

thermo-contacts, which are connected in series with the

motor winding.

The fan switching on/off by the control unit.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protection

and safety functions of the entire system are ensured by the control

unit.


1x 230 V + N + PE

Control unit

RO RO

1 x 2 3 0

V +

N

+

P E

1 x 2 3 0

V +

N

+

P E


Example DRO Fans with Output Control using

PE Controllers with a control unit

An RO fan connection with PE output controllers and a

control unit is shown in gure # 14.


The fan switching on/off by the control unit.

Stepless fan output control using the PE controller;

however, it does not provide the possibility to switch the

fan off.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protection

and safety functions of the entire system are ensured by the control

unit.

1x 230 V + N + PE

Control unit

RO RO

1 x 2 3 0

V +

N +

P E

1 x 2 3 0

V +

N +

P E

PE PE



RF Fans

58

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

minium, respectively grey cast iron. The motor‘s high

quality enclosed ball bearings with permanent lubricant

lling enable the fans to reach a service life of 20,000operating hours (three-phase motors), respectively

40,000 operating hours (single-phase motors) without

maintenance. Connection of the impeller to the three-phase motor shaft up to the RF 56 and RF 71 sizesis carried out using a xed hub while with the RF100size uses a Taper-Lock® bushing. Impellers along withmotors are dynamically balanced. After starting a fanwith three-phase motor, the correct direction of the im-

peller rotation must be checked, and it must follow thedirection of the arrow on the upper fan supporting plate(counter clockwise).

Motors

According to the type, roof fans can be equipped with

one of two types of power units: AC 1x230V/50Hz: Compact three-phase asynchronousfan motors with an external rotor and a resistance ar -mature. The motors are situated inside the impeller

(so-called motor impeller), and during operation are op-

timally cooled by the owing air. They feature low build-up current, and enable voltage control. For the motor

degree of protection, refer to Table #3 - Motor ThermalProtection, in the chapter „Motor Protection“. Single-

phase motors are equipped with a starting capacitor,

degree of protection IP 54, which is mounted next to theterminal box (for capacity values, see Table #3). AC 3x400V/230V 50Hz (Y/D): Flange-mounted motors

with a short-circuit armature. The terminal box is situa-ted on the motor‘s body. These motors are situated out

of the air ow, and thus they are protected against di-rect contact with the owing air. The motors are cooledby a system of internal channels. Degree of protectionis IP55. The motor thermal protection is ensured by athermo-contact which is brought out to the cable; for de-

tails, refer to the chapter „Motor Protection“. The motor insulation system complies with insulation class F with

temperature rise in class B. The motor insulation class

is determined by the motor manufacturer, and is statedon the rating plate of the motor.

Wiring

The wiring is terminated in a terminal box of IP 54 pro-

tection degree. Single-phase motors are equipped with

a starting capacitor which is mounted next to the termi-

nal box. For the wiring diagrams, refer to page 75.

Motor Protection

As standard, permanent monitoring of the internal motor temperature is used in all motors. The permissible limit

temperature is monitored by thermo-contacts situated

in the motor winding, which after being connected tothe protective contactor circuit protect the motor against

overheating due to phase failure, forced motor braking,current protection circuit breakdown or excessive tem-

perature of the transported air.


Fan Applications

A roof fan with vertical outlet is intended for air exhaustfrom a room with normal environment in accordancewith the chapter „Operating Conditions, Position“. When

selecting a fan for the required air ow and pressure,the following general rule is applied; fan motors with agreater number of poles reach the required parametersat lower RPM, which results in lower noise and longer service life. The standard dimensional and performan-

ce range of single-phase and three-phase RF fansenables designers to optimize all parameters for air owrates from 300 m3/h up to 14,000 m3/h. Fans equippedwith a suitable roof adaptor (optional) can be situatedon at as well as sloping roofs.


The device can be used in normal rooms (IEC 60364-5-

51, respectively ČSN 332000-5-51 ed.2, ČSN 332000-3) extended for outdoor areas and in areas exposed toweather effects with ambient temperature ranging from-30 °C to +40°C without additional measures.The fan may only be used to transport air without solid,brous, sticky, aggressive or explosive impurities. Thetransported air must be free of corrosive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to zinc, aluminium and plastics.Maximum permissible temperature of the transportedair must not exceed +40°C (three-phase fans), respec-

tively +60°C (single-phase fans). RF fans can only beoperated, transported or stored in the basic horizontalposition (inlet situated from below).

Dimensional Range

RF fans are manufactured in a range of four sizes ac-

cording to the dimensions of the base. Several fans, di-ffering mainly in the number of poles of the used motor,are available for each size. When planning the fan for the required air ow and pressure, the following generalrule is applied; fan motors with a greater number of po-

les reach the required parameters at lower RPM, whichresults in lower noise and longer service life.The standard dimensional and performance range of single-phase and three-phase RF fans enables desig-

ners to optimize all parameters for air ow rates from300 m3/h up to 14,000 m3/h.

Materials

The external casing of RF fans is made of sheet alu-

minium, which provides very good resistance against

corrosion in industrial and coastal areas. Basic support

parts of the largest fan housing size RF 100/.. are madeof sheet steel protected by backed powder coating.Removable outlet pockets are tted with elements ena-

bling quick water drainage and with gravity dampersprotecting the fan‘s internal area against direct moisture

penetration. A ne perforated protecting screen pre-vents dirt and foreign objects entering the fan impeller area. The fan impellers up to fan size RF100/63 aremade of plastic; the RF100/71-6D fan impeller is madeof aluminium. The motor armatures are made of alu-



RF Fans

59

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Thermal protection by means of thermo-contacts iscomprehensive and reliable providing they are correctly

connected. This protection is essential especially for speed controlled and frequently started motors and mo-

tors highly thermally loaded by hot transported air.

Fan motors with brought-out TK thermo-contactscannot be protected by conventional overcurrent

protection elements!

Using thermal protection is the most important con-

dition for warranty validity.

The fan motors are equipped with thermo-contacts intwo versions:

Serial Thermo-Contact (self-acting)

The motor thermo-contact connected in series to the

motor winding will disconnect the power supply if the

winding temperature exceeds +130°C. After coolingdown, the thermo-contact closes, and the fan will start. All RF 40/xx and RF 56/31-4E fans are equipped withserial thermo-contacts. Beware of possible automaticfan start when servicing the fan! The fan must be dis-

connected from the power supply when working on it(outlet „pockets“ removed)! Application of this operational behaviour (non-signalledshutdown) must be evaluated within the scope of theair-handling device project.

Brought-Out Thermo-Contact (control)

Fans equipped with a thermo-contact brought out into

the terminal box (TK- TK terminal) must be connected

to the recommended protective device. When the tem-

perature exceeds critical values, the thermo-contact will

disconnect the control circuit of the protective device,which will further disconnect the motor power supply.The motor restart must be conditioned by the operator‘s

intervention, check and removal of the protectiveshutdown causes. Repeated restart of the motor withoutremoving the cause of motor overheating results inshorter service life of the product, or can damage themotor.

All fans, except the RF 40/.. and RF 56/31-4E lines, are

equipped with brought-out thermo-contacts.

Maximum thermo-contact permanent loading is 1.2

A at 250V / 50V (cos φ 0.6),

(respectively 2 A at cos ϕ 1,0).

Fan motors with brought-out thermo-contacts

cannot be protected by conventional over-current

protection! Only protection using thermo-contacts

is comprehensive because it also covers high am-

bient/air temperature.

Proper use of thermal protection is the most impor-

tant condition for warranty validity.


Single-Phase Fan Output Control

Stepless Voltage Control

Stepless thyristor fan output control ranging from 0%to 100%.

This is very suitable for the smallest (RF 40/... a RF56/31-4E) fans with a serial thermo-contact

Five-Stage Voltage Control

TRN–E: A single-phase ve-stage transformer con-

troller equipped with integrated fan motor protection. Itis operated using the ORe5 remote controller; therefore,it can be situated out of the operator‘s reach.TRRE: A simplied single-phase transformer control-ler motor protection without motor temperature protec-

tion; therefore, it must always be used in connection

with control units or STE protecting relays. Outputstages are selected by the rotary selector situated on

the controller‘s front panel, and therefore, they must bewithin the operator‘s reach.

Application: RF 56/35-4E and RF 56/40-4E fans,respectively also for RF 40/... a RF 56/31-4E fans (if equipped with TRN, the protection must be disabled).

Table 1 – Voltage and the controller‘s stage correlation

For detailed information, refer to the controllers‘ docu-

mentation

Three-Phase Fan Output Control

As standard, three-phase fans are equipped withIEC asynchronous motors with a short-circuit armature.The motor speed can be controlled by changing the

frequency using a frequency inverter. It is advisableto connect the frequency inverter to the fan using a

shielded cable, and make it as short as possible in ac-cordance with the frequency inverter documentation.Power and control cables must be led separately.

Warning:

If fans with frequency inverters 1x230V/3x230V, RE-

MAK standard up to output of 1.5kW, are used, it is

necessary to reconnect the motors for AC 3x230V

D and verify, respectively adjust settings of motor

nominal values in the frequency inverter.

The frequency inverter ensures over-current pro-

tection of the motor by disconnecting the power su-

pply. Therefore, failure removal must be conrmed

on the frequency converter to enable fan restart.

Curve characteristic – controller‘s stageMotor type

Single-phase



RF Fans

60

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


Motor

E - single-phase

D - three-phase

Number of motor poles

2, 4, 6

Impeller diameter (cm)Base dimensions (cm)

RF model-range roof fans

Figure 1 – Fan type designation

RF 56 / 35 - 4 E

Service Data

A table showing the most important values is situated next to each fan‘s characteristics in the „Data Section“ of thecatalogue. The meaning of individual lines is explained in the following table #2. These values are also listed oneach fan‘s rating plate.

Table 2 – Fan designation

RF 56/31-4E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 138

I max [ A ] 0,61

n [ min-1

] 1230

C [ μF ] 4

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 1837

Δpt max. [ Pa ] 283

Δps min. [ Pa ] 0m [ kg ] 22

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor

Max. working temperature

Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure

Min. static pressure (5c)Weight


Protecting relay


The type designation of RF roof fans in projects is de-

ned by the key shown in gure # 2. For example, typedesignation RF 56/35-4D species the type of fan, im-

peller and motor.

Accessories

RF fans are part of the wide range of Vento modular venting and air-handling system components. Any air-

handling assembly, from simple venting to sophisticatedcomfortable air-conditioning, can be created by sele-

cting suitable elements; however, RF fans can only beused for air exhausting. To make the installation easy,special accessories can be delivered:

SNK roof adaptor - short

NDH roof adaptor with an attenuator - long

VS low-pressure damper

STE and STD protecting relays

Electronic PE controller for single-phase fans

TRN ve-stage controllers and ORe 5 controller Frequency inverter for three-phase motors

Table 3 – Overview of frequency inverters

Frequency inverter Power supply/output Recommended for:

RFFMI 0,37 kW 1x230V/3x230V RF56/31-4D, RF56/35-4D, RF71/50-6D

RFFMI 0,75 kW 1x230V/3x230V RF56/40-4D, RF71/45-4D, RF100/56-6D

RFFMI 1,5 kW 1x230V/3x230V RF71/50-4D, RF100/63-6D

RFFMI 2,2 kW 3x400V/3x400V RF100/56-4D, RF100/71-6D

Fan type designation

Nominal voltage values

Maximum motor input

Maximum current at nominal voltage

Mean speed rounded to tens, measured at point 5b

Capacitor capacity, single-phase fans

Maximum permissible temperature of the transported air

Maximum air ow rate at working point 5c

Maximum total pressure between points 5a and 5c

Minimum static pressure at working point 5cTotal fan weight

Recommended fan output controller

Recommended protecting relay



RF Fans

61

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

r were calculated and transferred to Graph 2. This canbe used for simple determination of the sound level (A-scale sound pressure level at distance r from the fan).

Sound Level in Ventilated Room

The noise radiated by the fan is transferred through theair ducting to the ventilated room. On the one hand, the

noise is attenuated by the duct, attenuators, and other

air-handling elements; on the other hand, it is increased

by the inherent noise of some components, especiallythe inherent noise of ventilation grills. To determine thesound level in the ventilated room, rst it is necessaryto determine the total sound power level radiated to the

ventilated room. As the sound transfer and attenuationdepend on the frequency, the sound power level mustbe calculated for each octave band separately. Attenua-

tion of attenuators and all other parts of the duct lineleading to the ventilated room in which the noise level

is being determined is subtracted from the sound power values:

LWokt

(i+1)

= LWokt(i)

- Dokt(i)

(3)

LWokt (i+1)

is the sound power level at the particular octave

behind the „i-th“ element of the duct line. Dokt(i) is thevalue of attenuation at the particular octave behind the„i-th“ element of the duct line.Inherent noise of individual components of the duct linedepends mainly on the air ow velocity. However, thenoise of many components is lower than the noise radi-

Noise Parameters

In this catalogue you can nd values of noise levelsradiated to the inlet and surroundings (i.e. also outlet),

the total sound power level LWA

[dB (A)], i.e. the total

level of radiated A-scale sound power is always pro-vided. Further, value LWAokt

, i.e. sound power level, for octave bands from 125 Hz to 8 kHz is also provided.Knowledge of the octave levels is essential to assessthe noisiness of the air-handling unit with a given fan.

Measuring Method Used

Noise parameters of RF fans are measured in Remak‘sacoustic testing laboratory. The measurements are

performed in accordance with the ČSN ISO 3743Standard, which establishes the technical method of the sound power level determination in a special rever-

berant chamber. A measuring line of aerodynamic para-

meters is used to set the fan to the required workingpoint when measuring the noise. For a recapitulation of technical acoustic terms, an explanation of measuringmethodology and outline of noise attenuation, refer tothe catalogue sections „Duct Radial Fans: or „RP FansCatalogue“.

Noise Level Calculation

The result of the calculation is sound level LpA

at a place

within the personnel’s reach or other places where the

sound level limit must be observed. If it concerns a roof fan, then sound level L

pAin the selected outdoor area

in its surroundings and sound level LpA

in the ventilated

room are relevant. These tasks are quite different;therefore, the general calculation procedures for bothcases are outlined below.

Outdoor Sound Level

When calculating the sound level at a selected distance

within the roof fan‘s surroundings, we can consider thevalues of the reected sound waves as insignicant;therefore, it is possible to use an equation for soundpropagation in free space. For this case, the followingrelationship is applicable :

Lp(A)

= LW(A)

+ 10 log [Q / (4π r 2)] (1)

LP(A) sound level [dB]L

W(A)sound power level (A)[dB]

Q Directional coefcient for the given direction (1–8) [-]r Distance (source – person) [m]The directional coefcient Q species the inuence of noise propagation limiting surfaces, and is a function of the space angle υ of the fan‘s noise radiation. It can becalculated using the following relationship

Q = 4π /υ (2)

If the space angle of the fan‘s noise is 180°, which isapplicable to most installations of RF fans, then the

value of the directional coefcient

Q = 2.

Using equation (1), the values of sound level Lp(A)

for dif -ferent sound power levels L

W(A)and selected distances


ated by the fan so it can be ignored. However, the inhe -

rent noise level of the „i-th“ component must be com-

pared to value Lwokt(i+1)

, i.e. the fan sound power levelreduced by the attenuation of preceding components.

This especially applies for ventilation grills, where thefan noise can be attenuated to such an extent that theinherent noise of the ventilation grill may be higher,especially at high air ow velocity.

Graph 2 – LWA to LPA conversion at distance r

N o

i s e

l e v e

l L P A [ d B ( A ) ]

Noise power level LWA [dB(A)]

distance r [m]



RF Fans

62

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Using general equation (2), which is valid for total sou-

nd pressure in a closed room, the octave sound pressu-

re level Lpokt

can be calculated from the values of soundpower L

woktradiated into the room.

LP = LW + 10 log [ Q / (4π r 2) + 4.(1 - αm) / ( S.αm)] (4)

LP

sound pressure level [dB]

LW

sound power level [dB]

Q Directional coefcient for the given direction (1–8) [-]r Distance (source – person) [m]α

mmean coefcient of sound absorption capacity [-]

S room enclosing area [m2]

Then, the total sound pressure level in the room can

calculated using the following relationship

LPA= 10.log ∑100,1(Lpokt + KAokt)

(5)

For the values of correction factor K Aokt

for particular octave bands, refer to table #4.If the calculated sound level in the checked place is notsatisfactory, it is necessary to take additional anti-noisemeasures, e.g. complete the air-handling assembly with

an additional attenuator.



For the most important data and dimensions of RF fans,refer to gure #3 and table #5.

Table 5 – Basic dimensional Range

Figure 2 – Basic dimensions of the fan

Designa-

tion

Base di-

mensions

A [mm]

Max. width

B [mm]

Height

C [mm]

RF 40/ .. 408 560 400

RF 56/ .. 568 780 590

RF 71/ .. 718 960 690

RF 100/ .. 1008 1360 900

For operating fan parameters and the allocation of out-put controllers, refer to table # 6.

Legend:

Vmax.

.... Maximum air ow rate

n .... Fan speed measured at the highest efciency working

point (5b), rounded to tens

U .... Nominal power supply voltage of the motor without control(all values in the table are related to this voltage)

Pmax.

.... Maximum power input of the motor

Imax.

.... Maximum phase current at voltage U

(this value must be checked)

tmax.

.... Maximum permissible transported air temperature

at air ow Vmax.

C .... Capacitor capacity of single-phase fans

regul. .... Recommended fan output controller

FM .... Recommended frequency inverter

m .... Weight of the fan (±10%)

Table 4 – A-weighting lter correction values

Octave band mean frequency (Hz)

A - w e

i g h t i n g

f l t e r c o r r e c

t i o n

A-weighting lter correction curve

Octave band

mean frequency

A-weighting lter correction



RF Fans

63

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Fan Parameters

Table 6 – Basic parameters and nominal values of RF fans

Power

unit (*)

Vmax

pmax

Pmax

Unom

Number of motor

poles

nnom

tmax

Motor

degree

of pro-

tection

Sound

power to

the inlet

LWA

Sound

power to

the sur-

roundings

LWA

Weight

Power

unit

weight

m3/h Pa W V min-1 °C IP dB(A)

dB(A)

kg kg

Single-phase motors

RF 40/19-2E MOK 550 310 60 230 2 2500 60 IP44 67 71 11,5 3,8

RF 40/22-2E MOK 950 370 100 230 2 2560 60 IP44 70 74 12,0 4,2

RF 40/25-2E MOK 1 350 540 200 230 2 2420 60 IP44 73 76 12,5 5,0

RF 40/28-4E MOK 1 250 220 110 230 4 1360 60 IP44 62 68 12,5 4,7

RF 56/31-4E MOK 1 800 280 140 230 4 1240 60 IP44 70 70 22 7,7

RF 56/35-4E MOK 2 500 330 310 230 4 1360 60 IP54 71 72 25 10,5

RF 56/40-4E MOK 3 500 420 490 230 4 1350 60 IP54 72 74 27 12,0

Three-phase motors

RF 56/31-4D OK+M 2 000 320 120 400 4 1360 40 IP55 68 71 25 10,5

RF 56/35-4D OK+M 2 600 330 250 400 4 1380 40 IP55 71 74 26 11,5

RF 56/40-4D OK+M 4 000 470 550 400 4 1400 40 IP55 74 77 30 15

RF 71/45-4D OK+M 5 700 500 750 400 4 1400 40 IP55 80 80 40 21

RF 71/50-4D OK+M 7 400 750 1100 400 4 1400 40 IP55 81 84 43 23

RF 10/56-4D OK+M 13 000 900 2200 400 4 1420 40 IP55 78 83 125 50

RF 71/50-6D OK+M 5 200 310 370 400 6 900 40 IP55 72 72 40 20

RF 100/56-6D OK+M 8 200 380 550 400 6 900 40 IP55 66 66 115 41

RF 100/63-6D OK+M 11 500 500 1100 400 6 910 40 IP55 74 80 117 45

RF 100/71-6D OK+M 14 000 600 2200 400 6 940 40 IP55 84 87 135 60

(*) Note: MOK …Compact motors with an external rotor situated in the air ow, OK+M …IEC asynchronous motor situated outside the air ow, impeller on the shaft

Table 7 – Connection, protection and control

Connection of the motor without

controlStart-

ing

current

(I A/IN)

Thermo-con-

tact motor

protection

(TK)

Capaci-

tor

(µF)

Operation

without

control

Operation with control

Connection of themotor with control

**)

Frequency

inverter

Voltagesystem

(*)

Cur-

rent

(A)

Voltagesystem

(*)

Current

(A)

Power

supply

(V)

Max.

input

current

(A)

Single-phase motors

RF 40/19-2E 1x230V 0,24 2,0 Serial TK 2 Switch TRN 2E, TRRE 2, PE-2,5 1x230V 0,24 – –

RF 40/22-2E 1x230V 0,4 1,8 Serial TK 2,5 Switch TRN 2E, TRRE 2, PE-2,5 1x230V 0,4 – –




RF 56/35-4E 1x230V 1,7 2,5Brought Out

TK6 STE TRN 2E, TRRE 2+STE, PE-5+STE 1x230V 1,7 – –

RF 56/40-4E 1x230V 1,8 2,3

Brought Out

TK 10 STE TRN 2E, TRRE 2+STE, PE-5+STE 1x230V 1,8 – –Three-phase motors

RF 56/31-4D Y 3x400V 0,4 4,4Brought out

TK –

STD

(Y 3x400V)FM 0,37kW Δ 3x230V 0,8

1x230V

6.1


TK –

STD

(Y 3x400V)FM 0,37kW Δ 3x230V 1,3

1x230V

6.1


TK –

STD

(Y 3x400V)FM 0,75kW Δ 3x230V 2,6

1x230V

11.6


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 0,75kW Δ 3x230V 3,31x

230V11.6


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 1,5kW Δ 3x230V 4,81x

230V18.7


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 0,37kW Δ 3x230V 2,21x

230V6.1


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 2,2kW Y 3x400V 5,03x

400V8.5

RF 100/56-6D Y 3x400V 1,7 4,7 Brought outTK

– STD (Y3x400V)

FM 0,75kW Δ 3x230V 2,9 1x230V

11.6


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 1,5kW Δ 3x230V 5,31x

230V18.7


TK –

STD (Y3x400V)

FM 2,2kW Y 3x400V 5,53x

400V8.5

(*) Voltage system: 1x230V+N+PE/50Hz, 3x230V +PE/50Hz, 3x400V+PE/50Hz.(**) Connection of the motor to the control delivered as standard accessory.



RF Fans

64

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000

Data Section

All RF fans arranged in the rst column according tototal pressure and according to maximum air ow inthe second column are listed in table #8. However, in

most cases the air ow rate–pressure interrelationshipis more important than just the maxima of individualvalues.

Graph #3 enables quick selection of a suitable fan andcomparison of all RF fans. Only the highest characteris-

tics of each fan at nominal supply voltage, i.e. withoutor with a controller set to the fth stage, are included inthis graph.

The following Data Section contains all important infor -mation and measured data of RF fans.

∆ p t - t o t a l p r e s

s u r e [ P a ]

RF 56/31-4E

R F 1 0 0 / 7 1 - 6 D

R F 1 0 0 / 6 3

- 6 D

RF 56/31-4E

RF 40/25-2E

RF 56/31-4D

R F 1 0

0 / 5 0 - 6 D

R F 1 0 0 / 5 6 - 4 D

RF 40/28-4E

V - Air ow rate [m3/h]

RF 40/22-2E

RF 40/19-2E

Fan Parameters

Graph 2 – Quick RF fan section

Table 8 – Fan overview

According to max. pressure According to max. air ow

Fan type

Total

pressure

pt max (Pa)

Fan type

Max.

air owV (m3/h)

RF 40/28-4E 220 RF 40/19-2E 550RF 56/31-4E 280 RF 40/22-2E 950

RF 40/19-2E 310 RF 40/28-4E 1 250

RF 71/50-6D 310 RF 40/25-2E 1 350

RF 56/31-4D 320 RF 56/31-4E 1 800

RF 56/35-4E 330 RF 56/31-4D 2 000

RF 56/35-4D 330 RF 56/35-4E 2 500

RF 40/22-2E 370 RF 56/35-4D 2 600

RF 100/56-6D 380 RF 56/40-4E 3 500

RF 56/40-4E 420 RF 56/40-4D 4 000

RF 56/40-4D 470 RF 71/50-6D 5 200

RF 71/45-4D 500 RF 71/45-4D 5 700RF 100/63-6D 500 RF 71/50-4D 7 400

RF 40/25-2E 540 RF 100/56-6D 8 200

RF 100/71-6D 600 RF 100/63-6D 11 500

RF 71/50-4D 750 RF 100/56-4D 13 000

RF 100/56-4D 900 RF 100/71-6D 14 000

R F 1 0

0 / 5 6 - 6 D

R F 7 1 / 5

0 - 4 D

R F 1 0 0

/ 5 0 - 6 D

R F 7 1 / 5 0

- 6 D

R F 5 6 / 4 0

- 4 E

R F 5

6 / 3 5 - 4 D

RF 71/45-4E



RF Fans

V – air ow rate (m3/h)

∆ p t

– t o t a l p r e s s u r e

( P a

)

∆ p t


( P a

)




Bod


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0 200 400 600 800 1000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 70 71 74 74

125 Hz 48 47 50 48

250 Hz 61 60 63 64500 Hz 61 61 68 67

1000 Hz 65 65 68 68

2000 Hz 63 64 67 69

4000 Hz 59 61 63 63

8000 Hz 64 65 63 64

RF 40/22-2EY 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 102

I max [ A ] 0,42

n [ min-1

] 2450

C [ μF ] 2,5

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 941


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 12

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c 4a 4b 4c 3a 3b 3c 2a 2b 2c 1a 1b 1c

U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 0,41 0,42 0,36 0,41 0,42 0,36 0,40 0,40 0,37 0,37 0,37 0,35 0,31 0,31 0,31

P [ W ] 98 102 86 79 81 72 68 69 60 49 49 47 35 35 34

n [ min-1

] 2478 2445 2588 2113 2085 2317 1880 1903 2098 1442 1509 1640 1100 1100 1145

V [ m3/h ] 0 572 941 0 487 841 0 491 745 0 413 577 0 166 377

Δps [ Pa ] 371 179 0 331 127 0 302 86 0 249 44 0 157 54 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 371 181 5 331 129 4 302 87 3 249 45 2 157 54 1

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

5a 4a 3a

2a

1a

1c 2c

3c

4c 5c

5b

4b

3b

2b1b

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

0 100 200 300 400 500 600

_ _ . . :

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 67 67 71 71

125 Hz 48 47 47 46

250 Hz 55 55 61 62

500 Hz 57 57 65 64

1000 Hz 61 61 66 66

2000 Hz 62 62 66 66

4000 Hz 58 58 62 62

8000 Hz 56 57 58 57

RF 40/19-2E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 59

I max [ A ] 0,24

n [ min-1

] 2480

C [ μF ] 2

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 559

Δpt max. [ Pa ] 314Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 12

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressureMin. static pressure (5c)

Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 0,24 0,24 0,22 0,23 0,23 0,21 0,22 0,22 0,20 0,21 0,20 0,20 0,17 0,18 0,17

P [ W ] 58 59 54 45 44 41 38 37 34 28 28 29 18 17 21

n [ min-1

] 2480 2483 2355 2190 2200 2319 1989 1999 2140 1604 1651 1738 1199 1231 1324

V [ m3/h ] 0 306 559 0 263 496 0 256 460 0 261 370 0 207 288

Δps [ Pa ] 314 161 0 278 133 0 258 100 0 232 46 0 172 27 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 314 161 2 278 133 1 258 100 1 232 47 1 172 27 0

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RF 40/22-2E

RF 40/19-2E5a 4a 3a 2a

1a5b

4b

3b

2b

1b

1c 2c

3c

4c 5c



RF Fans

∆ p t


( P a

)



[dB(A)]


∆ p t


( P a

)



Bod

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

50

100

150

200

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 62 63 68 68

125 Hz 56 57 61 53

250 Hz 53 53 60 59

500 Hz 56 55 63 63

1000 Hz 56 57 62 63

2000 Hz 52 51 57 59

4000 Hz 51 56 56 588000 Hz 44 45 44 44

RF 40/28-4EY 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 112

I max [ A ] 0,51

n [ min-1

] 1340

C [ μF ] 4

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 1270


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 13

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 0,48 0,51 0,50 0,36 0,43 0,40 0,35 0,43 0,40 0,36 0,39 0,42 0,37 0,37 0,40

P [ W ] 98 112 104 67 80 73 59 72 66 50 54 57 40 40 43

n [ min-1

] 1380 1341 1358 1324 1250 1290 1286 1188 1231 1156 1106 1042 897 897 728

V [ m3/h ] 0 712 1270 0 707 1203 0 609 1147 0 296 955 0 187 654

Δps [ Pa ] 218 122 0 198 99 0 188 97 0 169 104 0 161 73 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 218 125 9 198 102 8 188 99 7 169 104 5 161 73 2

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

5a 4a 3a 2a 1a

1c 2c

3c

4c

5c

5b

4b

3b

2b

1b

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 73 75 76 79

125 Hz 56 57 51 51

250 Hz 63 62 66 70

500 Hz 67 67 70 731000 Hz 70 72 71 73

2000 Hz 64 65 68 72

4000 Hz 59 60 64 66

8000 Hz 63 65 62 67

RF 40/25-2E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 206

I max [ A ] 0,87

n [ min-1

] 2430

C [ μF ] 6

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 1393


m [ kg ] 13

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 0,83 0,87 0,71 0,89 0,94 0,78 0,89 0,87 0,80 0,81 0,82 0,79 0,66 0,66 0,66

P [ W ] 199 206 169 166 174 147 147 143 133 109 110 108 72 72 72

n [ min-1

] 2471 2426 2570 2038 1943 2260 1730 1805 1992 1196 1122 1403 867 891 895

V [ m3/h ] 0 903 1393 0 513 1217 0 761 1072 0 368 747 0 351 469

Δps [ Pa ] 541 221 0 519 204 0 452 90 0 219 58 0 156 27 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 541 225 11 519 205 8 452 93 6 219 59 3 156 27 1

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

5a 4a 3a

2a

1a

1c 2c

3c

4c 5c

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RF 40/28-4E

RF 40/25-2E

5b4b

3b

2b 1b



RF Fans


∆ p t


( P a

)

∆ p t


( P a

)




Bod


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 68 69 71 72

125 Hz 51 50 49 52

250 Hz 60 62 60 64

500 Hz 62 62 66 67

1000 Hz 60 59 65 65

2000 Hz 57 57 62 62

4000 Hz 62 64 62 658000 Hz 56 61 53 60

RF 56/31-4DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 177

I max [ A ] 0,36

n [ min-1

] 1390

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 2044


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 25

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 0,34 0,36 0,33

P [ W ] 159 177 135

n [ min-1

] 1404 1386 1415

V [ m3/h ] 0 1241 2044

Δps [ Pa ] 318 164 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 318 166 5

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 56/31-4D

FM 0,37 kW

5a

5b

5c

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 70 73 70 74

125 Hz 57 59 56 58

250 Hz 63 64 64 66

500 Hz 63 65 64 671000 Hz 62 63 64 67

2000 Hz 59 60 61 64

4000 Hz 64 70 62 68

8000 Hz 46 52 44 50

RF 56/31-4E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 138

I max [ A ] 0,61

n [ min-1

] 1230

C [ μF ] 4

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 1837


m [ kg ] 22

typ TRN 2E

typ –

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 0,54 0,61 0,54 0,46 0,56 0,47 0,47 0,51 0,48 0,47 0,50 0,49 0,41 0,42 0,42

P [ W ] 116 138 119 85 105 90 77 84 81 60 66 65 42 45 44

n [ min-1

] 1315 1234 1305 1214 1083 1200 1112 1044 1097 850 704 762 630 514 536

V [ m3/h ] 0 1215 1837 0 956 1671 0 443 1518 0 505 935 0 362 604

Δps [ Pa ] 283 107 0 267 94 0 243 126 0 139 43 0 109 23 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 283 108 4 267 95 3 243 126 3 139 44 1 109 23 0

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 56/31-4E5a 4a 3a

1a2a

1c 2c

3c

4c

5c

5b4b

3b

2b

1b

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



RF Fans

∆ p t


( P a

)



[dB(A)]


∆ p t


( P a

)



Bod

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

100

200

300

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 71 72 72 74

125 Hz 54 55 55 56

250 Hz 64 65 65 66

500 Hz 65 65 67 681000 Hz 64 63 67 69

2000 Hz 63 61 64 66

4000 Hz 60 63 58 65

8000 Hz 59 65 55 64

RF 56/35-4E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 280

I max [ A ] *1,66

n [ min-1

] 1370

C [ μF ] 6

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 2547


m [ kg ] 25

typ TRN 2E

typ STE

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 1,16 1,36 1,19 1,00 1,40 1,06 1,04 *1.53 1,11 1,33 *1.66 1,37 1,40 1,42 1,40

P [ W ] 214 280 225 173 237 182 160 229 171 160 185 162 121 123 121

n [ min-1

] 1405 1368 1399 1362 1278 1350 1326 1180 1308 1123 836 1100 614 564 624

V [ m3/h ] 0 1516 2547 0 1463 2441 0 1482 2401 0 1041 2142 0 348 1038

Δps [ Pa ] 336 213 0 329 179 0 320 134 0 306 61 0 109 39 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 336 216 7 329 181 7 320 136 6 306 62 5 109 39 1

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 56/35-4E5a 4a 3a 2a

1a

1c2c

3c

4c

5c

5b

4b

3b

2b

1b

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 71 71 74 75

125 Hz 56 59 60 59

250 Hz 64 65 65 65

500 Hz 66 66 70 70

1000 Hz 65 63 69 69

2000 Hz 63 61 65 66

4000 Hz 59 63 58 65

8000 Hz 56 61 50 59

RF 56/35-4DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 288

I max [ A ] 0,66

n [ min-1

] 1410

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 2681


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 26

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 0,62 0,66 0,62

P [ W ] 212 288 223

n [ min-1

] 1436 1414 1433

V [ m3/h ] 0 1507 2681

Δps [ Pa ] 331 227 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 331 229 8

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 56/35-4D

FM 0,37 kW

5a

5b

5c

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .



RF Fans


∆ p t


( P a

)

∆ p t


( P a

)




Bod


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

100

200

300

400

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 72 74 74 77

125 Hz 58 59 60 65

250 Hz 66 67 65 69

500 Hz 65 68 69 711000 Hz 65 65 69 70

2000 Hz 64 63 66 68

4000 Hz 60 64 61 65

8000 Hz 63 67 59 67

RF 56/40-4E

Y 230V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 415

I max [ A ] 1,83

n [ min-1

] 1290

C [ μF ] 10

t max [ °C ] 60

Vmax [ m3/h ] 3458


m [ kg ] 27

typ TRN 2E

typ STE

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay


U [ V ] 230 180 160 130 105

I [ A ] 1,41 1,83 1,61 1,36 1,89 1,65 1,41 1,92 1,70 1,47 1,87 1,73 1,59 1,70 1,65

P [ W ] 307 415 358 250 343 300 229 307 275 195 240 224 163 172 169

n [ min-1

] 1361 1289 1324 1292 1164 1226 1239 1068 1149 1116 891 983 788 682 734

V [ m3/h ] 0 1763 3458 0 1670 3248 0 1477 3003 0 1135 2565 0 1281 1852

Δps [ Pa ] 425 268 0 404 209 0 388 180 0 368 127 0 248 47 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 425 272 13 404 212 12 388 183 10 368 129 7 248 48 4

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 74 75 77 79

125 Hz 61 60 64 61

250 Hz 64 68 68 71500 Hz 69 70 72 73

1000 Hz 67 67 71 73

2000 Hz 67 64 69 70

4000 Hz 62 64 63 68

8000 Hz 63 68 62 70

RF 56/40-4DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 592

I max [ A ] 1,27

n [ min-1

] 1420

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 4047


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 30

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 1,23 1,27 1,17

P [ W ] 553 592 478

n [ min-1

] 1423 1418 1434

V [ m3/h ] 0 2591 4047

Δps [ Pa ] 466 275 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 466 282 18

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 56/40-4E

RF 56/40-4D

FM 0,75 kW

5a

5b

5c

5a 4a 3a 2a

1a

1c2c

3c

4c

5c

5b

4b

3b

2b

1b

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



RF Fans

∆ p t


( P a

)



[dB(A)]


∆ p t


( P a

)



Bod

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

100

200

300

400

500

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 80 82 80 84

125 Hz 67 67 64 66

250 Hz 72 75 72 76

500 Hz 74 77 75 791000 Hz 74 74 75 78

2000 Hz 73 72 71 74

4000 Hz 68 69 67 72

8000 Hz 68 75 63 71

RF 71/45-4D

Y 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 924

I max [ A ] 1,87

n [ min-1

] 1410

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 5691


m [ kg ] 40

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 1,58 1,87 1,67

P [ W ] 606 924 711

n [ min-1

] 1434 1405 1425

V [ m3/h ] 0 3233 5691

Δps [ Pa ] 491 380 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 491 385 15

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 81 82 84 86

125 Hz 66 70 69 71

250 Hz 76 77 76 79

500 Hz 75 76 79 81

1000 Hz 75 74 79 81

2000 Hz 72 71 76 78

4000 Hz 68 70 72 768000 Hz 64 69 64 69

RF 71/50-4DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 1399

I max [ A ] 2,73

n [ min-1

] 1390

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 7431


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 43

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 2,25 2,73 2,57

P [ W ] 889 1399 1244

n [ min-1

] 1427 1387 1400

V [ m3/h ] 0 4454 7431

Δps [ Pa ] 754 426 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 754 435 26

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 71/45-4D

RF 71/50-4D

FM 1,5 kW

FM 0,75 kW

5a

5b

5c

5a

5b

5c

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .



RF Fans


∆ p t


( P a

)

∆ p t


( P a

)




Bod


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

200

400

600

800

1000

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 78 84 83 89

125 Hz 69 68 72 76

250 Hz 72 79 72 79

500 Hz 72 77 78 83

1000 Hz 71 76 77 82

2000 Hz 70 76 74 81

4000 Hz 68 77 72 81

8000 Hz 63 72 65 72

RF 100/56-4DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 2568

I max [ A ] 4,80

n [ min-1

] 1440

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 12956


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 125

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 3,60 4,80 4,00

P [ W ] 1526 2568 1845

n [ min-1

] 1461 1435 1459

V [ m3/h ] 0 8480 12956

Δps [ Pa ] 945 550 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 945 591 96

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 100/56-4D

FM 2,2 kW

5a

5b

5c

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 72 75 72 75

125 Hz 62 57 55 64

250 Hz 65 63 64 66

500 Hz 65 66 66 691000 Hz 61 69 67 68

2000 Hz 62 70 64 67

4000 Hz 66 65 58 67

8000 Hz 55 56 49 56

RF 71/50-6D

Y 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 475

I max [ A ] 1,15

n [ min-1

] 930

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 5125


m [ kg ] 40

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 1,05 1,15 1,08

P [ W ] 323 475 399

n [ min-1

] 953 929 941

V [ m3/h ] 0 2823 5125

Δps [ Pa ] 313 201 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 313 210 19

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 71/50-6D

FM 0,37 kW

5a

5b

5c

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



RF Fans

∆ p t


( P a

)



[dB(A)]


∆ p t


( P a

)



Bod

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 1200

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 74 78 80 82

125 Hz 60 63 64 67

250 Hz 64 72 66 72

500 Hz 72 71 78 77

1000 Hz 66 69 71 74

2000 Hz 64 71 69 75

4000 Hz 58 64 63 70

8000 Hz 61 71 61 70

RF 100/63-6DY 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 1400

I max [ A ] 3,10

n [ min-1

] 930

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 11469


Δps min. [ Pa ] 0

m [ kg ] 117

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate

Max. total pressure


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 2,60 3,10 2,80

P [ W ] 831 1400 1081

n [ min-1

] 964 932 952

V [ m3/h ] 0 7643 11469

Δps [ Pa ] 525 279 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 525 290 46

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 100/63-6D

FM 1,5 kW

5a

5b

5c

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000

_ _ . . :

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 66 74 66 74

125 Hz 52 59 52 59

250 Hz 57 67 57 67

500 Hz 64 66 64 66

1000 Hz 55 64 55 64

2000 Hz 54 66 54 66

4000 Hz 53 62 53 62

8000 Hz 35 69 35 69

RF 100/56-6D

Y 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 781

I max [ A ] 1,70

n [ min-1

] 910

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 8387


m [ kg ] 115

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 1,40 1,70 1,50

P [ W ] 524 778 585

n [ min-1

] 947 911 942

V [ m3/h ] 0 5830 8387

Δps [ Pa ] 398 201 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 398 221 40

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 100/56-6D

FM 0,75 kW

5a

5b

5c

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .



RF Fans


∆ p t


( P a

)

∆ p t


( P a

)




Bod


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet


[dB(A)]

Point


[dB(A)]

Inlet Outlet

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000

_ _ . . :

5b 5c 5b 5c

LWA 83 87 87 90

125 Hz 67 70 70 72

250 Hz 72 76 75 78

500 Hz 78 77 83 82

1000 Hz 75 78 80 81

2000 Hz 75 83 80 87

4000 Hz 75 77 78 78

8000 Hz 67 79 71 77

RF 100/71-6D

Y 3 x 400V 50Hz

Pmax [ W ] 2239

I max [ A ] 4,50

n [ min-1

] 950

C [ μF ] –

t max [ °C ] 40

Vmax [ m3/h ] 14112


m [ kg ] 135

typ VLT Micro

typ STD

Power supply

Max. electric input

Max. current (5c)

Mean speed

Capacitor


Max. air ow rate


Weight


Protecting relay

5a 5b 5c

U [ V ] 400

I [ A ] 3,40 4,50 4,10

P [ W ] 1273 2212 1910

n [ min-1

] 977 953 960

V [ m3/h ] 0 7643 14112

Δps [ Pa ] 602 453 0

Δpt [ Pa ] 602 462 17

Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

RF 100/71-6D

FM 2,2 kW

5a

5b

5c

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Installation

RF fans (including other Vento system elements andequipment) are not intended, due to their concept, for direct sale to end customers. Each installation must be

performed in accordance with a professional project cre-

ated by a qualied air-handling designer who is respon-

sible for proper selection of the fan. Installation andcommissioning may only be performed by an authorizedcompany licensed in accordance with generally valid

regulations.The fan must be checked carefully before installati-on, especially if it has been stored for a longer period.In particular, it is necessary to check all parts and cableinsulation for damage, and whether the rotary parts canrotate freely.RF fans can only work in the horizontal position(i.e. the impeller rotation axis is in the vertical position).

They can only be transported in the horizontal position.It is recommended to install the fan on a roof adaptor. Aself-acting pressure damper connected to the fan intakeprevents air backdraught.

After installation, the RF fans and roof adaptorsmanufactured in the standard version need to be nis-

hed with a protective coating matching the building‘s

colour (according to the architect‘s choice).


Wiring

The wiring can only be performed by a qualied wor -ker licensed in accordance with valid regulations.

Terminal box:a) With single-phase motors, the wiring is terminated in

the terminal box, degree of protection IP 54. Wago ter -minals are used for single-phase motors (gure #9).b) The three-phase motor terminal box is situated on

the motor body. Connection is made using screw termi-nals.

All terminal boxes are equipped with plastic bushings.

Before connection, check the power supply parame-

ters for compliance with the data on the rating plate.

Manually turning the impeller, check it for free rotati-on. Also check it for play.

Connect the power supply and thermal protection

cables to the terminal box (verify whether the installedfan is equipped with a brought-out thermo-contact or not, refer to the chapter „Motor Protection“). The wiringconnection to the terminals can be performed following

the marking on the motor cables, the label on the termi-nal box lid or the description of terminals. When doingso, follow the wiring diagram (see gure #5).

Observe the motor wiring diagrams (see gure # 5)

Check whether the motor is controlled by a frequen-

cy converter. The type of frequency inverter connectionto the motor, 3x400V –Y or 3x230V- Δ, is included in



RF Fans

74

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

single-phase motor

of the fan

TK - Terminals of the motor thermo-contacts

U1, U2 - single-phase motor

terminals (1f - 230V/50Hz)PE - Protective conductor terminal

TK - Terminals of the motor thermo-contacts

U1, V1, W1 - Three-phase motor power

supply terminals (3f-400 V/50 Hz)PE - Protective conductor terminal

single-phase motor

of the fanthree-phase motor

of the fan


Figure 3 – RF fan wiring diagram


The fan operator must be acquainted with the FanOperating Instructions.

The fan is controlled depending on the type of

installed motor and the type of fan control. Fans equip-ped with multiple-stage speed control are switched on/off and controlled using the control panel of the ORe5,PE2,5 or PE5 controllers (depending on the fan type),or from the control panel of the TRR and/or STE(D)controller, respectively the OSX control panel. The sing-

le-stage fan is controlled in the ON/OFF mode using theprotecting relay.

If the roof fan is operated in association with a parentcontrol unit, the fan is controlled from the control panelof the control unit.

Maintenance may only be performed by a qualied

person acquainted with these Operating Instructions,and he/she must observe all applicable safety measu-

res and valid regulations.

The fan does not require special maintenance. Aregular check must be performed at least once a year,as part of the summer service inspection. If the devi-ce is operated in tough conditions, perform regular inspections twice a year, usually before and after thewinter season.

During operation, it is necessary to check proper functioning of the fan, its smooth running, and to keep itand its surroundings clean.

The device can only be operated by qualied staff.Basic service access is ensured through the upper

cover. To make it easy to access the terminal box or theimpeller when performing maintenance (including clea-

ning the dampers area of dirt – leaves, twigs, etc.), or toperform repairs, it is possible to remove the side outletpockets.

The service switch (delivered as an optional acces-

sory) situated on the device serves to disconnect the

fan from the power supply, preventing unintentionalstart-up of the fan when performing maintenance. Thisswitch does not substitute the main or emergency swit-

ches.Warning: When performing any maintenance or

repairs, the device must always be disconnected

from the power supply!

table #6, 62. Three-phase motors are always conne-

cted for 3x400V - Y voltage in the factory; if the fan iscontrolled using a 3x230V - Δ frequency inverter (mo-

tor outputs up to 1.5 kW) it is necessary to reconnectthe terminal box on the motor for delta connection! RF71/50-4D and RF 10/71-6D line fans are always conne-

cted for 3x400V –Y connection.

The wiring cables are led into the terminal box th-

rough the tube which is routed through the fan and roof adaptor interior into the ventilated room. The power

supply cable and thermal protection cable must be led

separately.

The cable must be rmly xed, and it must not loadthe connection in the terminal box with its weight.

When dimensioning the conductors, it is necessary

to take into account the current loading by the device as

well as the length of the conductor. The following cablesare recommended to connect fan motors:HO5VVH2 - F 2Ax0.75 – circuitCYKY 3Cx … – single-phase motor supplyCYKY 4Bx … – three-phase motor supply,

without control (ON/OFF)CYKFY 4Bx …/ CMFM 4Bx … – shielded, three-phase motor

power supply, frequencyconverter control

If the fan is controlled using electronic compo-

nents (e.g. PE controllers or a frequency inverter), itis necessary to eliminate electromagnetic interference(EMC). To connect the fan to the frequency inverter, usethe specied shielded cable.

The fan wiring diagrams with front-end elements

(protective relays, controllers, control units) are

included in the Installation Instructions, respective-

ly in the AeroCAD project of the front-end elements.

Figure 4 – Y/Δ connection in the three-phase motor terminal box

*) Applies for frequency converter, see Table #2 (the frequency converter delivered as a standard accessory), see Table. 3, page 60.

FM(frequency inverter) 3x 400V/50Hz + PE3x 230V/50Hz + PE *)

RF 100/56-4DRF 100/71-6D

RF 56/31-4DRF 56/35-4DRF 56/40-4DRF 71/45-4DRF 71/50-4DRF 71/50-6DRF 100/56-6DRF 100/63-6D



RF Fans

75

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

It is same as the previous example plus electronic con-

troller inserted into the power supply. The PE controller

enables the fan to be switched off.This connection ensures:Internal or standard thermal protection

of the fanManual switching on/off of the fan using the PE cont-roller or STE(D) protecting relay.

The number behind the PE controller indicates the value

of max. permissible current load, which must be lower than the value of the fan motor current.

RF Fans with Single-Phase Motor and Output

Control using PE Controllers

Example B

Figure 6 – Fan connection

RF Fans without Output Control

Example A

Application of the RF fan in a simple air-handlingassembly (separately) without output control, operation

ON/OFFThis connection ensures:Internal or standard thermal protection of thefanManual switching on/off of the fan using the switchor STE(D) protecting relay.


2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

( 3 x

4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

)

STE(D)

230V / 50Hz

2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

2 3 0 V

RF 40/19-2ERF 40/22-2E

RF 40/25-2ERF 40/28-4ERF 56/31-4E

RF 56/31-4DRF 56/35-4E

RF 56/35-4DRF 56/40-4ERF 56/40-4DRF 71/xxRF 100/xx

2

3 0 V / 5 0 H z

STE

230V / 50Hz

2 3

0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz

2 3

0 V

RF 40/19-2ERF 40/22-2ERF 40/25-2ERF 40/28-4ERF 56/31-4E

RF 56/35-4ERF 56/40-4E

PE5

PE2.5



RF Fans

76

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Example CRF Fans with Single-Phase Motor

and Output Controller

An RF fan connection in more sophisticated ventingsystems using the control unit is shown in gure # 7.This connection ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within the sta-

ge range 1–5.Internal or standard thermal protection

Fan switching on/off manually by the ORe5 remotecontroller.

Fan switching on/off externally by any other switch(such as room thermostat, gas detector, hygrostat, etc.)

on terminals PT1, PT2 (for more information, refer tothe separate TRN controller operating instructions).

When controlled by the ORe5 controller along with an external switch,the operation signalling on the ORe5 controller may not correspondto the actual status of the fan. The fan operation, respectively cor -

responding speed stage indicator will always come on upon the fanoperation request. The fan operation is conditioned by this optionand the simultaneously switched external switch. If the function of the external switch is not used, it will be necessary to interconnect

terminals PT1 and PT2. If the fan is overloaded, the fan circuit will bedisconnected due to overheating of the motor winding, and the failurewill be signalled by the red indicator on the ORe5 controller. After cooling down, the motor is not automatically restarted. To restart the

fan, it is rst necessary to set the „STOP“ position using the selectingbutton, and thus conrm failure removal, and then to set the requiredfan output. In this arrangement, the option „STOP“ on ORe5 cont-roller must not be blocked. The TRN and ORe5 controllers can bereplaced by the TRR controller with a front-end STE controller. TRRcontrollers are equipped with motor protection.


RF fans with a three-phase motor

and a frequency inverter

Example D

An assembly of the RF fan with TRN controller and con-

trol unit is shown in gure # 9. An internal controller isinstalled in the control unit during production.

This connection ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within the sta-

ge range 1–5.Over-current protection of the fanFan switching on/off manually by the ORe5 remote

controller.Fan switching on/off externally by any other switch(such as room thermostat, gas detector, hygrostat, etc.).

Single-phase frequency converter with the 3x230V/50Hz output. Three-phase frequency converter with the 3x400V/50Hz output

When controlled by the ORe5 controller along with an external switch,the operation signalling on the ORe5 controller may not correspondto the actual status of the fan. The fan operation, respectively cor -responding speed stage indicator will always come on upon the fanoperation request. The fan operation is conditioned by this option andthe simultaneously switched external switch.

If the fan is overloaded, the frequency converter will disconnect thefan supply circuit due to change in the current uptake, and the failurewill be signalled on the frequency converter. The failure will also besignalled by the red indicator on the ORe5 controller. After coolingdown, the motor is not automatically started. The failure removal mustbe conrmed on the frequency converter to enable fan restart.


TRN

ORe5 Thermostat (optional)

2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz

2 4 V =

RF 40/19-2ERF 40/22-2E

RF 40/25-2ERF 40/28-4ERF 56/31-4E

RF 56/35-4ERF 56/40-4E

FM

ORe5


∆ 2

3 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz

FM

ORe5


Y 3 x

4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

3x 400V / 50Hz

RF 56/31-4DRF 56/35-4DRF 56/40-4DRF 71/45-4DRF 71/50-4DRF 71/50-6DRF 100/56-6DRF 100/63-6D

RF 100/56-4DRF 100/71-6D



RF Fans

77

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Example E

RF Fan without Output Control

and with Control Unit

Application of the RF fan as an exhaust fan in a sophis-

ticated air-handling assembly. The inlet branch is not

displayed.This connection ensures:Full thermal protection of the fanFan switching on/off manually/automatically by thecontrol unit (or its external switch) in conjunction withthe inlet fan.

The air-handling assembly can be started by the control unit, manual-

ly or automatically following the program.The protection of motors equipped with TK contacts must always beensured by the control unit while TK, TK thermo-contact terminals are

connected to terminals in the control unit.

Fans of smaller size are protected against overloading by thermo-contacts connected in series with the power supply. If the motor overheats, the thermo-contacts automatically disconnect the power

supply circuit of the motor winding. After cooling down, the contactswill close and the fan starts up automatically.


Example FRF Fan with Single-Phase Motor,

Output Controller and Control Unit



displayed.

This connection ensures:Manual selection of the fan output within the stagerange 1–5.Thermal protection of the fan (by connecting theTK thermo-contact terminals to terminals in the control

unit).

Fan switching on/off manually or automatically, andswitching on of the entire assembly by the control unit(or its external switch) in conjunction with the inlet fan.

In this connection, all additional functions of the control-ler must always be blocked by interconnecting the PT2and E48 terminals in the controller.

2 4 V =

control

unit

2

3 0 V / 5 0 H z

( 3 x

4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

)

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

2 4 V =

control

unit

2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

TRN

230V / 50Hz

24V=




RF Fans

78

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

TREe(De)

230V / 50Hz

TRN

OSX

control

box

Temperature gauge

(signal source 0-10V)

0V – 10V =

24 V =

230 V, 50 Hz

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 3

0 V

, 5 0 H z

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

230 V, 50 Hz(3 x 400 V, 50Hz)

Example G

RF Fan with Three-Phase Motor,

Output Controller and Control Unit



displayed.This connection ensures:Manual selection of the fan output within the stagerange 1–5.Thermal protection of the fan (by connecting theTK thermo-contact terminals to terminals in the control

unit).

Fan switching on/off manually or automatically, andswitching on of the entire assembly by the control unit. All protection and safety functions of the fans as well asthe entire system are ensured by the control unit.


Example HRF Fan with Automatic Output Control, TRN

Controller and OSX Control Unit

An assembly of RF fans with TRN controllers and acommon OSX unit is shown in gure # 10.This connection ensures: Automatic switching on/off of the fan at the selectedvalue of input control voltage (only some OSX types).Manual switching on/off of the fan from the OSX unit.Fan switching on/off by the „external switching“ func-

tion (not included in the gure). Automatic selection of the fan output stage 1 – -5depending on a physical quantity which is read by the

sensor equipped with a unied analogue output (signalsource of 0–10V).Manual start-up of the system at the preset outputstage via the „MANUAL“ button. The factory default set-ting of the OSX controller enables start of the assemblyat full output using the „MANUAL“ button.Thermal protection of the fans (ensured by the TKcontacts and controllers)

The OSX unit evaluates signal coming from a converter (signal sour -ce), and automatically switches stages 0--5 of the controller. Thermalor pressure converter(s), converters for the measurement of relativeor absolute humidity, concentration of gases or vapours, sensors of air quality and many other converters of different physical quantitieswhich provide output signal 0-10V can be used as sources of thecontrol signal. For detailed information on the OSX unit, refer to theapplicable documentation.


3 x 2

3 0 V

, 5 0 H z

( 3 x 4

0 0 V

, 5 0 H z

)

2 4 V =

control

unit

2 3 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

∆ 3x230V / 50Hz

24V=

RF 56/31-4DRF 56/35-4DRF 56/40-4D

RF 71/45-4DRF 71/50-4DRF 71/50-6DRF 100/56-6DRF 100/63-6D

RF 100/56-4DRF 100/71-6D

3 x

4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

Y 3x400V / 50Hz

24V=

FM FM



RF Fans

79

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

NK and NDH Roof Adaptors

NK (see gure # 13) and NDH (see gure # 14) univer -sal roof adaptors serve to t RF fans on the roof, andthey can also be used to connect square air ducting.

The adaptors are terminated in a 150 mm wide base

shoe (base plate) to t and install them on the roof. Theadaptors must be rmly anchored to the roof structure.Four M8 threads, spacing E x E, situated on the bottomside of the base, enable the square air duct ange tobe connected. The adaptors are made of galvanizedsheet steel, and sealed with waterproof sealing. Inner anti-condensate insulation is made of 20 mm thick,ame-retardant polyethylene foam plate which is gluedand mechanically secured by pins. Four M8 threads,spacing A x A, situated on the top side of the adaptor,enable the RF fan to be mounted.

Accessories

Room for VSdamper

Figure 13 – Dimensions of NK roof adaptors

Figure 14 – Dimensions of NDH roof adaptors

Table 9 – Dimensions/weights of roof adaptorsType/Size A (RS) A2 (RF) B C D E F G m (kg)

NK 40 330 360 390 710 370 9,5

NDH 40 330 360 390 710 104 71 750 370 20

NK 56 450 520 550 870 530 12,5

NDH 56 450 520 550 870 104 66 750 530 29

NK 71 670 700 1020 680 15

NDH 71 670 700 1020 104 61 800 680 41

NK 100 960 990 1310 970 22

NDH 100 960 990 1310 104 86 900 970 69

Room for VSdamper

Both types of adaptors in their upper part provide enou-

gh room for the VS back-ow damper. The NDH roof adaptor is equipped with an additional attenuator.

For pressure losses of NDH roof adaptors, refer to

page 80. For attenuation capacity in octave bands Dokt of NDH roof adaptors and inherent noise L

WA okt, refer to

page 81.



RF Fans

80

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

∆ p - A i r p r e s s u r e l o

s s [ P a ]

v - Air ow velocity between splitters [m/s]

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all NDH roof adaptors. For the selected air ow rate , the air

ow velocity between the splitters of the NDH roof adaptor can be read in the lower graph, and then

the corresponding air pressure loss of the NDH roof adaptor at the known velocity can be determined in

the upper part.

Example: At an air ow rate of 4,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow between the splitters of the NDH 60

roof adaptor will be 7.7 m/s. The air pressure loss for the above-mentioned air ow rate will be 52 Pa.

45001

52

5

3

V -

A i r o w

r a t e [ m 3 / h ]

7,7

2

4

N D H 1 0 0

N D H 7 1

N D H 5 6

N D H 40

Accessories

Air pressure losses of all NDH roof adaptors



RF Fans

81

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

0

0

0

0

5

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

15

15

15

15

20

20

20

20

25

25

25

25

30

30

30

30

35

35

35

35

40

40

40

40

125 Hz

125 Hz

125 Hz

125 Hz

250 Hz

250 Hz

250 Hz

250 Hz

500 Hz

500 Hz

500 Hz

500 Hz

1 kHz

1 kHz

1 kHz

1 kHz

2 kHz

2 kHz

2 kHz

2 kHz

4 kHz

4 kHz

4 kHz

4 kHz

8 kHz

8 kHz

8 kHz

8 kHz

63 Hz

63 Hz

63 Hz

63 Hz

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

NDH 40

NDH 56

NDH 71

Frequency Air ow rate (m3/h)

A t t e n u a t i o n D

o k t

[ d B ]

I n h e r e n

t n o

i s e

L w

o k t

[ d B ]

NDH 100



o k t

[ d B ]

I n h e r e n

t n o

i s e

L w

o k t

[ d B ]

Attenuation



o k t

[ d B ]

I n h e r e n

t n o

i s e

L w o

k t

[ d B ]

Inherent noise



o k t

[ d B ]

I n h e r e n

t n o

i s e

L w

o k t

[ d B ]

Attenuation and Inherent Noise of NDH Roof Adaptors

Attenuation

Attenuation

Attenuation

Inherent noise

Inherent noise

Inherent noise

Accessories



RF Fans

82

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Figure 16

DK Elastic Connections

The DK round elastic connection serves to eliminate

the transfer of vibrations to the connected air ducting. If the NDH roof adaptor is not installed, it can be used toconnect the round duct to the roof fan. The DK elasticconnection can be connected to the roof fan‘s base pla-

te using the prepared threads. It is made of an elasticsleeve resistant to temperatures up to +70 °C. At bothends, it is terminated in anges made of galvanizedsteel sheets. The anges are conductively intercon-

nected by a copper girdle.

Figure 15

Table 10 – Dimensions of dampers in mm Table 11 – Dimensions of elastic connections in mmRF / Size VS D D1 D2 d N L

RF 40/19-2EVS 180 180 215 240 10 8 150

RF 40/22-2E

RF 40/25-2E

VS 250 250 285 310 10 8 150RF 40/28-4E

RF 56/31-4D

RF 56/31-4E

RF 56/35-4DVS 315 315 350 375 10 12 150

RF 56/35-4E

RF 56/40-4DVS 355 355 390 415 10 12 150

RF 56/40-4E

RF 71/45-4D

VS 400 400 445 480 12 12 185RF 71/50-4D

RF 71/50-6D

RF 100/56-4D

VS 630 630 680 720 12 16 300RF 100/56-6D

RF 100/63-6D

RF 100/71-6D

RF / Size DK D D1 D2 d N

RF 40/19-2EDK 180 180 215 240 10 8

RF 40/22-2E

RF 40/25-2E

DK 250 250 285 310 10 8RF 40/28-4E

RF 56/31-4D

RF 56/31-4E

RF 56/35-4DDK 315 315 350 375 10 12

RF 56/35-4E

RF 56/40-4DDK 355 355 390 415 10 12

RF 56/40-4E

RF 71/45-4D

DK 400 400 445 480 12 12RF 71/50-4D

RF 71/50-6D

RF 100/56-4D

DK 630 630 680 720 12 16RF 100/56-6D

RF 100/63-6D

RF 100/71-6D

Accessories

VS low-pressure dampers

The VS low-pressure back-ow damper is designed toblock back-airow into the ventilated room. Upon star -ting the fan, the damper is automatically opened by thenegative pressure. Light damper aps are made of thinaluminium sheets. The low-pressure damper is equip-

ped with a single ange made of galvanized steel sheet.It can be installed directly on the base plate of the fanusing screws threaded into the prepared threads in

the base plate. VS low-pressure dampers are intendedfor NK and NDH roof adaptors. For the pressure losscharacteristics of VS low-pressure dampers, refer to thenext page.



RF Fans

83

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

∆ p - A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P a ]

v - Air ow velocity in the damper‘s cross-section VS [m/s]

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all VS dampers.

For the selected air ow rate, the air ow velocity in the free

damper‘s cross-section can be read in the lower graph, and

then the corresponding VS damper‘s air pressure loss at the

known velocity can be determined in the upper part.

Example: At an air ow rate of 5,000 m3/h, the velocity of the air

ow in the damper will be 11.1 m/s. The air pressure loss of the

VS 400 damper for the above-mentioned air ow rate will be

22 Pa.

50001

22,25

11,1

2

3

4

V -

A i r o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / h ]

V S 5 6 0

V S 4 0 0

V S 3 15

V S 250

V S 180

Air Pressure Loss of VS Low-Pressure Dampers

V S 6 3 0

Accessories



RF Fans

84

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

After installation, the roof adaptors need to be -

nished in a protective coating matching the building‘s

colour according to the architect‘s choice.

It is advisable to seal all screw joints on the fan withsilicone cement.

Roof adaptors for applications on sloping roofs canbe delivered with their platforms modied to the roof slope. The roof sloping angle must be specied in your order (see g. # 18).

Figure 17 – Roof adaptor on a at roof Figure 19 – Connection of the air-handling duct

Figure 18 – Roof adaptor on a sloping roof

30°

Accessories

Fan Accessories Installation

SNK or NDH roof adaptors make the installation of RF fans signicantly easier and faster. The roof adap-

tors can be used on almost any type of roof.The opening in the roof construction must not belarger than the adaptor platform and should be of a pre-

cise square shape. The adaptor platform must be drilledand screwed to the roof construction.The contact surfaces of the roof adaptor base androof construction must be thoroughly sealed with sea-

ling cement.

The wiring cable can be led through the roof adaptor and through the RF fan supporting stud into the terminalbox (see gure # 4).Roof hydro-insulation must always be applied on theroof adaptor up to a height of 30 cm above the roof. Theend of the roof hydro-insulation must be completed with

ashing to prevent water penetration (see g. # 18).Standard roof adaptors (without slope) can alsobe connected to the air-handling ducting. The details

of the connection are shown in gure #17. Four M8riveted nuts are situated in the adaptor‘s base plate.

The dimensions of the nut pitches are shown in the gu-

re in the introduction part.

Roof adaptor thermal insulation

Flashing

Roof hydro-insulation

Roof boarding

Roof battens

Beam

Tinsmith edging

Roof hydro-insulation

Wooden chock

Supporting balks

Ventilation air space

Concrete ceiling Adaptor base

Flooring boards

Thermal

insulation

Connected duct

M8 x 20 screw

Fan-washer

Roof adaptor

Before installation, paste the self-sticking sealingbetween the bottom side of the fan base and upper plate of the roof adaptor. To install the base, use gal-vanized M8 screws and nuts. It is necessary to ensureconductive connection of the ange using fan washersplaced on both sides at least on one ange screw con-

nection, or use Cu conductor wiring



RF Fans

85

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Accessories

Figure 20 – Fan base installation

RF Roof FanFan base

Self-acting VS low-pressure damper Thermally-insulated NDH roof adaptor Attenuator in the NDH roof adaptor Flashing

Roof hydro-insulationRoof beams and boards (respectively concrete)Roof adaptor base



RPH fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

have lower air velocities in the cross-section, where-

by lower pressure losses in the duct and accessories

are attained, although at the cost of making a greater

investment. The standard manufacturing sizes and

outputs of the single-phase and three-phase RPH fans

enable project designers to optimally set all parametersfor airow up to 9,200 m3/h.

Materials

The outer casing of RPH fans and connecting anges

are made of galvanized, zinc-coated metal sheet

(Zn 275 g/m2).

The rotor blades and diffusers are made of zinc-coated

steel sheet and the electric motors are of aluminium

alloys, copper and plastic. The noise insulation is made

of non-combustible, rot-resistant, waterproof mineral

wool. All materials are carefully inspected and checked,

and they guarantee the long service life and reliability of

the fans.

Rotors

The rotational direction of the rotors must be controlled

on three-phase fans after connection. A synthetic rubber

seal closes the service aperture on the motor cup. The

rotors of RPH fans always rotate to the left in a counter-

-clockwise direction (as seen from the service aperture

on the cup). Rotors and motor are perfectly balanced

both statically and dynamically.

Electric motors

Asynchronous, single-phase and three-phase, compactmotors provide the drive with an external rotor and re-

sistive armature. The electric motors are placed inside

the rotor and are optimally cooled by owing air during

operation. The high-quality, encased ball bearings with

their long-lasting lubrication lling give the fans a servi-

ce life of more than 40,000 hours of operation without

maintenance. The protection for the individual motors is

mainly IP 54, and for RPH 40-20 and RPH 50-25, it is IP

44 with the insulation class F. The coils have an additi-

onal protection against moisture by impregnation. The

motors use very little current when they begin to run.

Electrical installationThe single-phase electric motors are equipped with a

cast starting capacitor that is afxed underneath the co-

ver. The electrical installation ends with a terminal box

that has IP 40 protection. The connection diagrams are

shown in the separate chapter "Electrical installation"

on page 21.

Attention: The three-phase motors must always be

connected according to the data in the technical para-

meters, or according to the data on the motor plate.

Protection of the electric motor

As standard equipment on all motors, there is perma-nent monitoring of the motor's internal temperature.

The permissible limiting temperature is registered by

thermo contacts that are located in the coils of the elect-

ric motor.

Use of fans

Fully controllable, low-pressure, radial noise-insulated,

RPH duct fans can be used universally, from simple

ventilation units to complex air-conditioning devices

for comprehensive air handling. By noise insulation is

meant the reduction of the acoustic output level in thedirection of "the surroundings". In order to reduce the

acoustic output level in the direction of "intake" and "ex-

haust", it is necessary to supplement the fan with noise-

-insulated attenuators.

It is always ideal to connect them with further elements

of the Vento construction system that guarantee mutual

compatibility and balance of the parameters.

Operating conditions, position

The fans are intended for inside use in an environment

free of moisture condensate (normal inuence class)

to transport air that is void of solid, brous, adhesive,aggressive or explosive admixtures. The air must not

contain chemical agents that cause corrosion or disinti-

gration of zinc and aluminium. The minimum temperatu-

re of the transported air is -30 °C. The nominal limiting

values, including the maximum temperatures of the

transported air, are listed in table 3. RPH fans can ope-

rate only in a horizontal position. When located under

the ceiling, it is suitable to mount the fan with the mo-

tor's cup pointing downward in order to facilitate access

to the terminal box and the motor.

For intake and exhaust, RPH fans must always be equi-

pped with noise-insulated dilatation inserts and noise-

-insulated attenuators, or a noise-insulated duct. The

hanging of the RPH fan must always be done by using

hangings that suppress noise and vibration (for exam-

ple, "silent blocks"). In order to attain lower pressure lo-

sses in the system, we recommend designing a straight

duct with a length of 1–1.5 m for the fan's exhaust.

Sizes

RPH fans are manu-

factured in nine sizes

according to the AxB

dimension of the conne-

cting ange. For everysize, there are several

fans at your disposal

that differ particularly in

the number of poles of

the electric motor used.

When selecting a fan for

the required airow and

pressure, the general

rule applies that larger

fans with a greater num-

ber of poles attain the

required parameters atlower revolutions, which

causes less noise and

provides longer service

life. Fans with a greater

number of poles also

A x B [mm]

40-20

900-500

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

800-500

700-400

600-350

600-300

500-300

500-250

400-200


1000-500100-50

Picture 1 – fan sizes



RPH fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

The thermo contacts are miniature switching elements

dependent on temperature that are connected to the

control circuit of the protective contactor. They protect

the motor against overheating (damaging), loss of one

phase of the net, hard braking of the motor, interruption

of the current circuit of protection and excessive tempe-rature of the transported air.

When they are properly connected, thermal protection

by means of thermo contacts is comprehensive, reliable

and indispensable, particularly on motors that have re-

volution control and on motors that are frequently star-

ted up or under the thermal load of the transported air.

For these reasons, it is not possible to protect the elect-

ric motors of the fans using conventional protection

dependent on current by means of over-tension, motor-

-safeguarding elements!

The maximum load capacity of the thermo contacts is

2A / 250V / 50 Hz /cos ϕ 0.6/

Control of fan output

The output of all RPH fans can be fully controlled by

changing the revolutions. Altering the voltage on the

terminals of the electric motor can change the revoluti-

ons. The electric motors of RPH fans can be operated

in a range of approximately 25 % to 110 % of the nomi -

nal voltage. Several means of control can generally be

used on the fans. Voltage regulation is, however, the

most suitable manner of control for RPH fans.

The corresponding voltage controllers are listed in the

tables of fan parameters for each of them.

required in dependence on the load of the ventilated

room. Stepless control can be provided by means of

frequency converters, which can be delivered as per

requirement.

Accessories

RPH fans form part of a broad assortment of the ele-

ments of the Vento ventilating and air-conditioning con-

struction system. By choosing the suitable elements,

you can put together an air-handling device for simple

ventilation or for comfortable and comprehensive air

conditioning as you like. The universal RPH duct fans

can be used with a whole range of elements and acce-

ssories.

KFD bag lters and KF3, KF5 and KF7 Z-line lters

VFK bag lters and VF3 bag lters

DV elastic connectionsLKR, LKS, LKSX, LKSF control and closing dampers

PK backdraught shutters

PZ louvers

TKU attenuators

VO water heaters

SUMX mixing sets

EO, EOS and EOSX electric heaters

CHF direct coolers

CHV water coolers

HRV plate heat exchangersSKX mixing sections for circulation air

NS control units and feelers

TRN controllers and their drivers

and TRRE and TRRD controllers

STE and STD protection relays

Five-step voltage control (transformer)

Voltage control of singe-phase and three-phase RPH

fans is technically and operationally the most favorable.

There is no disturbing, humming, whistling or vibrating

of the motor.RPH fans can be controlled steplessly when the voltage

change occurs gradually. In practice, controllers are

more frequently used that have a voltage change in ste-

ps. Fan output can be controlled in ve steps by TRN

voltage controllers. One step amounts to about 20 %,

to which corresponds table 1, which shows the recipro-

cal relation of the outlet voltage and the controller step

set for single-phase and three-phase electric motors.

Stepless electronic control

We offer stepless electronic voltage control of output

only on single-phase fans. A disadvantage of electronic

control by PE 2.5 and PE 5 controllers is the greater

heating-up of the motors. Sometimes it can also be a

disadvantage that the project designer, when determi-

ning the operation modes, does not have the possibi-

lity of exactly dening for the operator the output step


Table 1 – relation between voltage and control steps

Map curve – step of controller Type of motor

1 – phase

3 – phase



RPH fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Electric motor

E – single-phase

D – three-phase

Number of electric motor poles

4 – four-pole

6 – six-pole8 – eight-pole

Diameter of rotor (cm)

Connecting size B of ange (cm)

Connecting size A of ange (cm)

Radial, noise-insulated, duct fan

RPH 60 - 30 / 28 - 4 D

Casing of fan

Flange

Rotor

Diffuser


The designation, RPH 60-30/28-4D for example, speci-

es the fan type, rotor and electric motor.

Type designation

Illustration 2 denes the key to the type designation of

RPH duct fans when designing and ordering.

Illustration 2 – type key to designating RP fans

Illustration 3 – construction of RPH fan

Vento RPH duct fans are designed for installing in a

duct line or in a system of further air-conditioning ele-

ments of the Vento system. The RPH Vento fan has a

perfectly functional construction.

Bushings for the electrical

installation

Cover

(access to the wiring

and to the motor)

The most frequently used designations for elements of

the individual components and fan construction groups

are dened in the illustration (illustration 3).



RPH fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Dimensions, weights and outputs

Illustration 4 and table 2 contain important dimensions

for fans of the RP type.

Obrázek 4

∆ ∆

Fan parameters

Illustration 4 – dimensional illustration of fan

Table 2 – fan dimensions

Table 3 – basic parameters and nominal values for the fans

Vmax.

- maximal air-ow at minimal allowed pressure loss

∆pt max.

- maximal total pressure of fan is maximum of sum ∆ps

and pd

(∆ps

+ pd)

max.

∆ps min.

- minimal allowed static pressure (pressure loss of connected ductwork) tells the lowest value the fan must be throttled to

(at nominal voltage in point 5c), so that the fan wasn´t being overloaded and therefore the thermocontacts didn´t disconnect

and the protection wasn´t activated

n - fan speed measured in operating point with highest efciency (5b), rounded to the tenth

U - nominal supply voltage of motor without control (all values in the table refer to this voltage)

Pmax.

- maximal input of electromotor at highest load, that´s at air-ow Vmax.

Imax.

- maximal phase current at voltage U and highest allowed load, that´s at air-ow Vmax.

in point 5c (after connection,

it´s necessary to check this value and measured current write to the certicate of warranty)

tmax.

- highest allowed temperature of transported air at air-ow Vmax

.

C - specied condensor capacity of single-phase fans

controller - specied voltage controller for fan control

m - mass of fan

RPH 100-50/45-..

µ

µ



RPH fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Fan parameters

Table 4 – fans according to pressure and output

Graph 1

Data part

Table 4 provides an over-view of all RPH fans orderedaccording to maximum total pressure and maximumairow. In the majority of cases, however, the reciprocalrelation airow - pressure is more important than mere-

ly the maximums of the individual quantities. Graph 1serves to quickly choose a suitable fan and to compareone RPH fan with another. Only the highest characteri-stics of each fan are noted in it when the fan is fed withthe nominal voltage, i.e. without a controller or with acontroller set at the fth step. All important informationand appropriate data regarding RPH fans are containedin the data part of the catalog.The noise parameters "levels of acoustic output into theintake" and "levels of acoustic output into the exhaust"are measured according to the Czech norm ISO 3743-2. The noise parameters "levels of acoustic output intothe surroundings" are calculated from the values for

acoustic output measured according to EN ISO 11546-1. The output characteristics of the fans are measuredaccording to the norms DIN 24 163 and AMCA Standard210-74.

Fan

type

Total pressure

∆Pt max

(Pa)

Fan

type

Max. airow

V (m3/h)

ACCORDING TO MAXIMUM PRESSURE ACCORDING TO MAXIMUM AIRFLOW


CHARACTERISTICS OF RPH FANS

FOR QUICK SELECTION

V - airow (m3/h)



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

∆ p t – t o t a l p r e s u r e ( P a )


V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]

Sound power levels LWAokt

[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 40-20/20-4D

RPH 40-20/20-4E

1) Value calculated according to the methodology see Fan Parameters - Data part page 90

µ

µ

40



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 50-25/22-6D

RPH 50-25/22-4D

µ

µ




RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 50-25/22-4E

RPH 50-30/25-6D

Point


µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 50-30/25-4D

RPH 50-30/25-4E


µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 60-30/28-6D

RP 60-30/28-4D


µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 60-30/28-4E

RPH 60-35/31-6D


ForbiddenArea

µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Restrictedarea

RPH 60-35/31-4D

RPH 70-40/35-8D


ForbiddenArea

µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 70-40/35-6D

RPH 70-40/35-4D


µ

µ

Forbidden

Area

ForbiddenArea



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 80-50/40-8D

RPH 80-50/40-6D


µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 80-50/40-4D

RPH 90-50/45-4D


µ

µ

ForbiddenArea

ForbiddenArea



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 90-50/45-6D

RP 90-50/45-8D


µ

µ

ForbiddenArea



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH 100-50/45-4D

ForbiddenArea

RPH 100-50/45-6D

ForbiddenArea


µ

µ



RPH fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH 100-50/45-8D


RPH 100-50/56-4D

µ

µ



RPH fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

(1 The recommendation mentioned is valid for all duct fans.

Installation, maintenance, service

In places where there is little room, it should be con-

sidered whether the duct adapting piece, the noise atte-

nuator, the heat exchanger, the heater etc. have to be

located immediately behind the fan's exhaust. The con-

struction and arrangement of the fan's exhaust is similar

to that of the RP fan. Only about 1 of the total exhaustcross-section is free out of the whole cross-section (500

x 250 for example).

That means that closely behind the fan, there are spe-

eds in the free exhaust that are 4 times higher than, for

example, in the intake. Thus the greater the distance

of the attenuators (or of other resistances) from the

exhaust is the better. (1 On the exhaust side, the DV

elastic connection (noise-insulated) sufces in most ca-

ses as a sufcient distance.

Before installing, self-adhering sealings are to be

afxed to the front connecting surface of the ange.

The mounting of the anges of the individual compo-

nents of the Vento system is done by means of zinc-co-

ated M8 nuts and bolts (M10 only on RPH 90-50 and

RPH 100-50). It is necessary to secure bonding by me-

ans of fan-shaped rests from both sides on one ange

connection.

For strengthening, it is favourable to connect an-

ges having a side longer than 40 cm in the middle with

a screw clamp, which prevents the ange prole from

opening.

Electric installation

Only someone who is certied according to the nati-

onal regulations can do the electrical installation. WAGO terminals are used, max. connecting cross-

-section 1.5 mm2

Connection to the terminals is done according to the

description on the cables of the electric motor in the

terminal box or according to the description of the termi-

nals, see illustration 7 on page 22.

To connect the electric motors of the fans, we reco-

mmend the following cables:

HO5VVH2 - F 2Ax0,75 – circuit of thermo contract

CYKY 3Cx1,5 – power supply of single-

phase motors

CYKY 4Bx1,5 – power supply of three-phasemotors

After mounting on the duct network for which it has

been designed, the fan is put into operation sometimes

fully throttled with closed intake or exhaust so that there

is no overloading of the fan! (valid for fans with a non-

-operating area). The fan is put under load by inc-

reasing the airow, i.e. loosening the throttle.

After being put into operation, it is necessary to

check the correct rotation direction of the rotor on three-

-phase fans. This can be done by removing the synthe-

tic rubber plug of the service aperture on the fan's cup.

After putting the fan into operation, it is necessary to

measure the current, which must not exceed the permi-ssible current Imax. on the manufacturing plate. Should

the values for current be higher, it is necessary to check

the control of the duct network.

RPH fans are not intended to be sold directly to

the nal user due to their conception. Each installa-

tion must be carried out on the basis of professional

planning by a qualied designer of air-handling equip-

ment, who assumes responsibility, among other things,

for the correct selection of the fan. The installation of the device and its putting in operation must be done

only by a professional installation rm.

Before installing, it is necessary to carefully check

the fan, especially if it has been stored for a longer pe-

riod of time. Above all, it is necessary to check whether

any of the components have been damaged, whether

the insulation of the cables is in order and whether the

rotating parts of the fan can rotate freely.

We recommend installing DV elastic connections

with noise insulation in front of and behind the fan.

To protect the fan and duct against contamination

and dust, it is expedient to always use a KFD or VFK air

lter with a ltration insert.

Should the fan be so installed that people or objects

might come in contact with the rotor, it is necessary to

install a protective grating.

The fan must always be afxed to separate han-

gings so that it does not burden the attenuating inserts

or the connected duct. The hangings must be insulated

against noise and vibration (elastic attenuator).

As a suitable installation, an anchoring on the ceiling

is recommended with the help of steel wall clamps and

a hanging across so-called "Z hangings" with the appro-

priate load capacity (for example, ZZTP hangings with

an integrated silent block and a load capacity of 80 kg)and their xation with steel rivets - see illustration 5, or

xation on an auxiliary construction.

The airow direction is indicated by an arrow located

on the fan case.

RPH fans can operate only in a horizontal position.

When located under the ceiling, it is expedient to install

the fan with the motor's cup pointing downward in order

to facilitate access to the terminal box and motor.

Illustration 5 – Hanging on "Z hangings



RPH fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Installation, maintenance, service

Illustration 6 – connection diagram

TK - terminals of the motor's thermo contact

U1, U2 - terminals of the power supply for the single-phase motor 1f - 230V/50Hz

U1, V1, W1 - terminals of the power supply for the three-phase motor 3f - 400V/50Hz

PE - terminal for the protective conductor

The fans are equipped with thermo contacts that

are located in the motor's coils and led off to the TK

terminals. When the motor is overloaded, the thermo

contact expands. To evaluate the defect, it is necessary

to connect the terminals of the thermo contact to the

control system, which is able to evaluate the defect andprotect the motor from undesired thermal effects (for

example, on the control unit, the TRN controllers and

the STE(D) relays). When the control system functions

properly, the motors are not put back into operation,

even after the thermo contact has cooled down and

switched. Before putting back into operation again

(by deblocking the defect), it is necessary to conduct a

check of the duct network control, the electric parame-

ters and the whole electrical installation.

Operation, maintenance and service

When in operation, it is particularly necessary to watch

over the correct functioning (smooth running) of the fan,

to see to it that the fan and surrounding area are clean

and to put the fan only under a load within the range of

its output characteristics.

When there is a defect, it is necessary to thoroughly ve-

rify that the net voltage is disconnected, to check whe-

ther there are foreign objects in the fan and whether the

fan can rotate freely.

Illustration 7 – internal arrangement

The internal arrangement on the 3f fan is similar.

Should the fan fail to start running again after being

turned on, it is necessary to adhere to the following pro-

cedures depending on the manner in which the fan is

safeguarded:

When the fan is safeguarded by a STE or STD relay:

turn the fan on and off by means of the buttons on theprotective relay.

When the fan is safeguarded by a TRN controller:

turn the fan on and off by means of the switch on the

controller's remote control.

When the fan is safeguarded by a control unit: pre-

ss the deblocking button on the control unit (symbol of a

horn) and put the unit into operation again.

In case the fan does not start running: check the elect-

rical installation and measure the resistance of electric

motor's coils. When the motor is damaged, contact

your supplier.

Declaration of conformance

The RPH fan is manufactured in conformance with:Government regulation No.163/2002 Sb.

The designation CE on the product expresses conformance

with:

the guideline of Counsel 73/23/EHS in the wording

of the guideline of Counsel 93/68/EH (with Government

regulation No.: 17/2003 Sb.)

the guideline of Counsel 89/336/EHS in the wor -

ding of the guideline of Counsel 91/263/EHS, the guide-

line of Counsel 92/31/EHS and the guideline of Counsel

93/68/EHS (with Government regulation No.: 18/2003

Sb.)

the guideline of the European Parliament andcounsel 98/37/ES in the wording of article 21 paragraph

1 of the guideline of the European Parliament and coun-

sel 98/79/ES (with Government regulation No.: 24/2003

Sb.)

Attention!When performing maintenance or repair work, it is ne-

cessary to always disconnect the device from the elect-

ricity net! To ensure there is no voltage, it is necessary

to disengage the electrical installation by means of the

separate blocking switch (or by the control unit with

such a switch).

The wiring diagrams of a fan with front-end elements

(protection relay, controllers, control units) are compo-

nents of the installation instructions.

single-phasefan motor

three-phasefan motor



RPH fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RPH fans without output control with STE(D)

protection relayIllustration 8 - connection of fan

Illustration 8 shows the connection of the RPH fan in a

simple ventilation device without fan output control.

This manner of connection ensures:full thermal protection of the fan by means of ther

mo contacts and STE protection relay

(single-phase) or STD relay (three-phase).

manual turning on and of the fan's running by means

of the buttons on the STE(D) protection relay.

After pressing the black button with the designation "I" on the STE(D)

protection relay, the fan will start running, and the button will remain in

the pressed position, which signals the fan's running. The fan stopsrunning when the red button with the designation "O" is pressed.

When the motor's coils heat up to over 130 °C as a result of overlo -

ading, the thermo contacts in the electric motor's coils are disconne-

cted. Through the disconnection of the thermo contacts, which are

led out to the terminal box of the fan, the TK, TK circuit of the STE(D)protection relay is disconnected. The STE(D) reacts to this state by

shutting off the power supply to the overheated fan motor. The motor

does not start running again by itself after it has cooled down. The

operating personnel must conrm the defect (deblock) by pressing

once again the black button with the designation "I".

2 3 0 V

RPH

STE (D)

230V / 50Hz(3 x 400 V / 50Hz)

2 3 0 V /

5 0 H z

( 3 x 4 0 0 V /

5 0 H z )

Example A

RPH fans with output control with

a TRN controller Illustration 9 - connection of the fan

Illustration 9 shows the connection of the RPH fan in a

ventilation device with control of the air output with the

help of a TRN controller with an Ore5 driver.

This manner of connection ensures:

the possibility of selecting fan output in steps 1-5

and also its full protection by means of the connected

thermo contacts.

the turning on and off of the fan's running on a

controller or from the Ore5 remote control, or, in certain

cases, by any switch (room thermostat, gas detector,

presostat, hygrostat etc.).

RPH

2 4

V =

TRN

ORe5

2 4 V =


2 3 0 V /

5 0 H z

( 3 x 4 0 0 V

/ 5 0 H z )

230V / 50Hz(3x 400V / 50Hz)

By setting the required output step using the selection button on the

Ore5, the fan will start running with the appropriate revolutions. The

condition for the fan's running is the switching of the switch connected

to the PT1, PT2 terminals and the circuit of motor thermo contacts

connected to the TK, TK terminals of the corresponding controller. By

means of the switch on the PT1, PT2 terminals, the fan is stopped ex-

ternally. If this possibility is not used, it is necessary to jointly connect

the PT1 and PT2 terminals.

When the fan is overloaded as a result of the motor's coils overhe-

ating, the circuit of thermo contacts is disconnected. The controller

reacts to this state by disconnecting the power supply to the fan, and

a defect is signaled on the Ore driver by a red signal. The motor does

not start running again by itself after the coils have cooled down. Toput the fan back into operation, it is necessary to rst set the positi -

on "STOP" with the help of the selection button, thus conrming the

removal of the defective state, and to then set the required fan output.

With this arrangement, the selection "STOP" must not be blocked on

the Ore5.

Example B



RPH fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RPH fans with TRN output controllers

with a control unit Illustration 10 - connection of fan

Illustration 10 shows the connection of RPH fans with TRN

output controllers with a common internal driver in a more

complicated air-conditioning device that has a control unit.This manner of connection ensures:

the turning on and off of the fans by the control unit.

Protection of the motors must always be ensured by the

control unit through connecting the TK, TK terminals of

the thermo contacts to the 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the

control unit.

the connection of the fans shown through joint fan

output selection by an internal driver in steps 1-5. The unit

must be equipped with two internal drivers that can control

each fan separately. In the connection D, all supplemen-

tary functions of the controller must always be blocked by

connecting the PT2 terminals and the E48 in the controller.

The air-handling device is put into operation by the control unit. One

internal driver for the remote control of the controller is built into the

control unit. The internal driver has the positions 1-5 for setting the

required step of fan output. The control unit provides all protection

and safety functions of the fans and the whole system.

TRN TRN

3

x400V,50Hz

3

x400V,50Hz

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

2 4 V =

control

unit

RPH

2 4 V =

230

V,50Hz

2 4 V =

3x 400V / 50 Hz3x 400V / 50 Hz

c o n t r o l u n i t

Example C

RPH



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


Materials

The external casing and connecting anges of RP Ex

and RQ Ex fans are made of galvanized sheet steel (Zn

275 g/m2), respectively stainless steel. Impeller blades

are made of galvanized sheet steel, diffusers are made

of copper, and the motors' casings are made of alumini-

um alloys. The internal structure of the motors consists

of steel, copper and plastic parts. All materials are ca-

refully veried and checked so they ensure long service

life and reliability of the fans.

ImpellersImpellers of RP Ex and RQ Ex fans are equipped with

forward curved blades. After connecting the motor to

the wiring, the impeller's direction of rotation must be

checked. The fans' impellers must always rotate to the

left, i.e. counter clockwise (looking through the inspec-

tion opening on the motor cup). The inspection opening

on the motor cup is sealed with a rubber plug. Impellers

along with the motor are perfectly statically and dynami-

cally balanced.

Motors

Compact three-phase asynchronous motors with anexternal rotor and a resistance armature of appropriate

output and speed, and approved in accordance with the

94/9/ES (ATEX) Directive are used as drives, see gu-

re #2. The motors are situated inside the impeller, and

during operation are optimally cooled by the owing air.

The motor's high quality

enclosed ball bearings

with permanent lubricant

lling enable the fans to

reach a service life of

more than 40,000 opera-

ting hours without main-

tenance. The motor elect-

rical protection degree is

IP 44, insulation class F.

The motor windings are

impregnated to provide

Applications of Ex Fans

Ex versions of fully controlled, low-pressure RP and

RQ radial Fans can be universally used for complex

air-conditioning, from simple venting installations to so-

phisticated air-handling systems. Thanks to their specialdesign, which in accordance with the EN 13463-1 and

13463-5 standards prevents mechanically generated

sparks, and the "e" version of the motor in accordance

with the EN 50014 standard, these fans are intended for

applications in explosion hazardous areas.


These fans are designed for indoor and outdoor appli-

cations, and to transport air without solid, brous, sticky

or aggressive impurities. The transported air must be

free of corrosive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to

zinc, copper and/or aluminium. The allowed temperatu-

res of the transported air ranges from -20 °C up to+40 °C.

These fans are designed for use in Zone 1 in reference

to the classication of explosion hazardous areas in

accordance with the EN 60079-10 standard.

Explosion-proof RP and RQ Ex fans, secure version "e",

belong according to EN 60079-0 to Group II and are la-

belled with the II 2G Exe II TX marks.

The fans themselves are labelled with the

II 2G c IIB+H2TX marks proving their explosion-

-proof design.

The fans can work in any position.

When positioned under the ceiling, it is advisable tosituate the RP Ex fan with its cup directed downwards

to ease access to the motor terminal box. However, if

transported air is oversaturated with moisture or if the

risk of intensive steam condensation inside the fan

exists, it is advisable to situate the fan's cup upwards.

We recommend adding a 1 to 1.5 m long piece of strai-

ght duct to the fan's outlet to reduce pressure losses in

the assembly.

RQ Ex fans are mostly installed in the horizontal posi-

tion of the motor shaft rotation (however, this is not a

condition of use). The square sidewalls of the fan serve

also as legs to x the fan onto the base using anchor

bolts. The fan can be positioned in four positions turned

by 90°.

Dimensional Range

RP Ex fans are manufactured in a range of six sizes

according to the A x B dimensions of the connecting

ange.

RQ Ex fans are manufactured in a range of three sizes

according to the impeller's diameter, see gure # 1.

The standard dimensional and performance range of

explosion-proof fans enables the designers to optimize

all parameters for air ow up to 5,800 m3 per hour.

(1 Group II. - Electrical equipment for explosion hazardous areas

(except underground mines with presence of methane).

RQ Ex Fans

400-200

500-250

40-20

50-25

600-300 60-30

600-350 60-35

700-400 70-40

80-50800-500

A x B [mm]

RP Ex Fans

200

220

280

Diameter [mm]

20

22

28

Figure 1 - Dimensional Range

Figure 2



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

them with additional protection against moisture. The

motors feature relatively low build-up current.


The fan's wiring is terminated in a special explosion-

-proof terminal box of IP 66 protection degree. For wi-ring diagrams of motors, refer to the section "Wiring".

Attention! The motors must not be delta connected.

They must always be star connected.

Motor Protection

As standard, permanent monitoring of the internal mo-

tor temperature is used in all motors. The temperature

inside the motor is read by temperature-sensitive sen-

sors (thermistors) situated in the motor winding (2. The

thermistors must be connected to the trip relay which,

after reaching a temperature of 130 °C, disconnects the

protective contactor circuit. This system protects themotor against unfavourable operating conditions, e.g.

overloading due to phase failure, forced motor braking,

current protection circuit

breakdown or excessive

temperature of the trans-

ported air. This thermal

protection is comprehen-

sive and reliable providing

it is correctly connected.

RP Ex and RQ Ex fans

have been approved by

Notied Body ES 1026,

Fyzikálně-technický ústavOstrava-Radvanice, to be

operated only in conne-

ction with the prescribed

thermal protection (refer to the wiring diagrams in the

chapter "Wiring").

Therefore, it is forbidden to protect the fan motors by

conventional thermal protection ensured by the motor

overcurrent protective elements!

Speed Control

Generally, several types of control can be used with

fans; however, voltage control is the most suitable for Vento fans. The fan output can be fully controlled by

changing the speed. The fan's speed is changed de-

pending on the voltage at the motor terminals. RP Ex

and RQ Ex fans can be steplessly controlled providing

the change in voltage is stepless.

In practice, stage voltage controllers are usually used.

Five-Stage Voltage Control

The voltage control of Vento fans is the most suitable,

technically as well as operationally. There is no interfe-

rence, humming, squeaking or vibration of the motor;

furthermore, voltage controlled motors feature lower

warming.

TRN and TRR voltage controllers can control the fan

output in ve stages in 20 % steps, with which ve pre-

ssure-airow relation curves in the working characteris-

tics of each fan comport.Ex fan motors can be operated within a range from 25%

to 100% of the rated voltage. Refer to table # 1 showing

the correlation between the input voltage and selected

stage of the controller.

Ex fans are delivered only with three-phase motors.

Three-phase TRN or TRRD controllers are used to con-

trol speed, respectively output.

Four types of TRN controllers, TRN 2D, TRN 4D, TRN

7N, and TRN 9N, are manufactured according to their

(2 The motors of RP and RQ fans intended for non-explosive

environment are equipped with a thermo-contact which when opening

can cause sparking inside the motor (this is impermissible in Zone 1

areas). Therefore, Ex-type fans are provided with PTC thermistors,

which must be connected to the thermistor relay. As far as operation

is concerned, the system of thermistors and tripping device comports

with the system of thermo-contacts used for RP and RQ fans intended

for non-explosive environment.


Table 1 - input voltage and controller's stage

current ratings. The option of remote control (by manual

switch ORe5 or by an OCm controller in the control unit,

respectively by automatic switching of the ve stages of

the OXe controller based on an external control signal

of 0 - 10 V) is a signicant feature of this product line.

TRN controllers are equipped with integrated fan pro-

tection, which is activated by connecting to the thermis-

tor relay.Four types of simpler TRRD controllers, TRRD 2, TRRD

4, TRRD 7 and TRRD 9, are also manufactured. These

controllers cannot be remotely controlled (therefore,

they must be situated within reach of the operator), and

they do not contain any fan protection (this must be pro-

vided by another device).

Accessories

RP Ex and RQ Ex fans are part of the wide range of

Vento modular venting and air-handling system compo-

nents. Any air-handling set-up, from simple venting to

sophisticated comfortable air-conditioning, can be crea-

ted by selecting suitable elements. When designing a

particular air-handling device, it is necessary to keep in

mind the environment for which the air-handling device

is intended.

For example, all the protection elements (thermistor

relay, TRN, or WebClima) must be situated outside

explosion hazardous areas.

Třífázový

elektromotor

Křivka charakteristiky – stupeň regulátoru

Figure 3 - Thermistor

3-phase

fan motor

Voltage (V)




RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Vybavovač ochrany + ochrana


The type designation of RP Ex and RQ Ex explosion -

-prove fans in projects and orders is dened by the keyshown in gure # 4.

RQ 28-4D Ex or RP 60-30/28-4D Ex species the typeof fan, impeller and motor.


Output characteristics of RP Ex and RQ Ex fans aremeasured in the most modern testing laboratory for aerodynamic and electrical measurements of fans andpressure losses of passive elements within the CzechRepublic. A table showing the most important values is situatednext to each fan's characteristic in the "Data Section"of the catalogue (see table # 2). These values are alsolisted on the fan's rating plate.

The meaning of individual lines is as follows:

Explosion-proof Ex version

Motor

D - three-phase motor Number of motor's poles

4 - four-pole

6 - six-pole




Fan casing

RP 60 - 30 / 28 - 4 D Ex

RQ 28 - 4 D Ex


Figure 4 – Type designation key of Ex fans

Table 2

RP 70-40/35-6D Ex

1 - Power supply voltage2 - Maximum power input of the motor at working point 5c of the fan characteristics

3 - Maximum current at nominal voltage at working point 5c of the fan characteristics4 - Mean speed, rounded to tens, measured at working point 5b of the fan characteristics6 - Maximum permissible transported air temperature

7 - Maximum air ow rate at working point 5c of the fan characteristics8 - Maximum total pressure between points 5a - 5c of the fan characteristics9 - Minimum permissible static pressure at point 5c of the fan characteristics

10 - Total weight of the fan11 - Recommended fan output controller 12 - Compulsory protection tripping device + prescribed protection

µ

1 –

2 –3 –

4 –

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 –

9 –

10 –11 –

12 –



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Table 3 - RP Ex Fan DimensionsDimensions, Weights and Performance

of RP EX Fans

For important dimensions of RP Ex fans, refer to gure# 5 and table # 3 & # 4.

Vmax.


∆pt max.

– maximum total pressure of the fan is the maximum sum of ∆ps

and ∆pd

(∆ps

+ ∆pd)

max.

∆ps min.

– minimum allowed static pressure (i.e. pressure loss of connected duct) indicates the lowest value to which the fan must be

throttled (at nominal voltage at working point 5c) so not to be overloaded and thus activating motor protection

n – fan speed measured at the highest efciency working point (5b), rounded to tens

U – nominal power supply voltage of the motor without control (all values in the table are related to this voltage)

Pmax. – maximum electrical input of the motor at maximum loading, i.e. at air ow Vmax.

Imax.

– maximum phase current at voltage U and maximum allowed loading, i.e. at air ow Vmax

at working point 5c (this value must

be checked and the measured current must be written down on the guarantee card)

tmax.


controll. – prescribed fan output voltage controller

m* – weight of the fan (±10%)

Fan parameters

Figure 5 - RP Ex fan dimensional diagram

Table 4 - RP Ex fan basic parameters and nominal values

RP 40-20/20-4D Ex

RP 50-25/22-4D Ex

RP 60-30/28-4D ExRP 60-35/31-4D Ex

RP 70-40/35-6D Ex

RP 80-50/40-6D Ex



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RP 40-20/20-4D Ex

RP 50-25/22-4D Ex

µ

µ

Forbidden

Area



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RP 60-30/28-4D Ex

RP 60-35/31-4D Ex

µ

µ

Forbidden

Area



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RP 70-40/35-6D Ex

RP 80-50/40-6D Ex

µ

µ

Forbidden

Area



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Dimensions, Weights andPerformance

For important dimensions of RQ Exfans, refer to Figure # 6 and Table# 4 & # 5.

∆∆

Parametry ventilátorů

Table 4 - RQ Ex types and dimensions

Table 5 – RQ Ex fan basic parameters and nominal values

Figure 6 – control drawing of RQ Ex fan

Vmax.


∆pt max.

– maximum total pressure of the fan is the maximum sum of ∆ps

and ∆pd

(∆ps

+ ∆pd)

max.

∆ps min.

– minimum allowed static pressure (i.e. pressure loss of connected duct) indicates the lowest value to which the fan must be

throttled (at nominal voltage at working point 5c) so not to be overloaded and thus activating motor protection

n – fan speed measured at the highest efciency working point (5b), rounded to tens

U – nominal power supply voltage of the motor without control (all values in the table are related to this voltage)

Pmax.

– maximum electrical input of the motor at maximum loading, i.e. at air ow Vmax.I

max. – maximum phase current at voltage U and maximum allowed loading, i.e. at air ow V

maxat working point 5c (this value must

be checked and the measured current must be written down on the guarantee card)

tmax.


control. – prescribed fan output voltage controller

m* – weight of the fan (±10%)

RQ 20-4D E x

RQ 22-4D E x

RQ 28-4D E x



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)

V – air-ow (m3/h)



[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

RQ 20-4D Ex

RQ 22-4D Ex

Forbidden

Area

µ

µ



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

V – air-ow (m3/h)



V – air-ow (m3/h)


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]


[dB(A)]



Point 5b 5b 5b

Point 5b 5b 5b


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure


Voltage

Current

Electric input

Speed

Air ow rate

Static pressure

Total pressure

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

RQ 28-4D Ex

Thermistor Protection of Ex Fans

The temperature inside the motors of all RP Ex and RQEx fans is permanently read by temperature sensitivesensors (PTC thermistors) situated in the motor win-

ding. The thermistors must be connected to the thermis-

tor relay, which disconnects the protective circuit of theSTD or TRN controllers.

At a maximum, two fans can be connected to thethermistor relay, and they must be connected in series.It necessary to be aware of the fact that this type of combined connection will cause both fans to be stoppedeven if only one of the motors fails.

STDTRN

controller or

protectiverelay

During failure (off) state,terminals 11 and 12 are inter -connected.

During failure-free (on) state,terminals 11 and 14 are inter -connected.

3-phase fan motor

t h e r m i s t o r r e l a y

Figure 9 - Example of the thermistor relay's wiring

Markings Usedm weight kgS area, surface m2V air ow rate m3/hn speed rpmt air temperature °C∆p

sstatic pressure difference Pa

∆pt

total pressure difference Pap

ddynamic pressure Pa

ρ air specic density kg/m3

LWsound power level dB

LWA

A scale sound power level dB(A)

LWAokt A scale octave sound power level dB(A)L

PAA scale sound pressure level dB(A)

U voltage VI current AP electric input W

µ



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Installation

RP Ex and RQ Ex fans, including other Vento ele-

ments and equipment, are not intended, due to their concept, for direct sale to end customers. Each installa-

tion must be performed in accordance with a professio-

nal project created by a qualied air-handling designer who is responsible for proper selection of the fan. Theinstallation and commissioning may be performedonly by a specialized assembling company licensed inaccordance with generally valid regulations.The fan must be checked carefully prior its installa-

tion. In particular, it is necessary to check the parts andcable insulation for damage, and to see whether therotating parts can rotate freely. Minimum clearance be-

tween rotating and xed parts is 4 mm.

It is recommended to insert elastic connections infront of and behind the fan, see gure 10.

It is advisable to place an air lter in front of the fanto protect it and the duct against dirtying and dust fou-

ling.

If the fan is installed in such a way that persons or objects can come into contact with the impeller, theguard grid must be mounted.

If the fans draw in air from the open space, respecti-vely if the suction of foreign objects cannot be elimina-

ted, the fans' inlets must be provided with a protectinggrid of IP 20 protection.

We recommend adding a 1.5 m long piece of strai-ght duct to the fan's outlet to get optimal pressure con-

ditions. In cramped spaces, it is advisable to consider the necessity to situate directly behind the fan's outletthe duct adapting piece, attenuator, heat exchanger,

heater, etc. Figure 11 shows the fan's outlet design andarrangement. From this gure, it is obvious that fromthe entire cross-section (e.g. 500 x 250), only about 1/4of the outlet cross-section is free. This means that theairow velocities close behind the fan can be as muchas four times higher than, for example, in the inlet. The-

refore, the greater the distance of the attenuators (or other resistant elements) from the outlet, the better. Onthe inlet side, an elastic connection will be sufcient asa distance piece in most cases.

The fan must be suspended by separate suspensi-ons, or xed to the foundations, so that no loading canbe transferred to the elastic connections or connectedduct.

Anchoring to the ceiling with steel anchors and sus-

pension using threaded rods (see g. #12), perforatedgalvanized strips (see g. #13) or ancillary constructionis recommended for RP Ex fans.RQ Ex fans are provided on three sides with ancho-

ring holes to be anchored to the foundation in one of three possible positions (see gure # 14). RQEx fans can be anchored with four anchoring bolts; ho-

wever, we recommend using silent-blocks to eliminatethe transfer of vibrations.

Free outletSpiral casing

Dividing partition



Figure 12 - Fan anchoring

Figure 11 - Fan outlet arrangement

Figure 13 - Suspension using ancillary construction



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

The fanscan work in anyposition. Whenpositioned under the ceiling, it isadvisable to si-tuate the fan with

its cup directeddownwards toease access to

the motor termi-nal box, see gu-

re # 11.If transportedair is oversatura-

ted with moistureor if the risk of intensive andpermanent steamcondensation

inside the fan exists, it is advisable to situate the fan'smotor cap upwards to enable better condensate drain-

age!Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing ontothe connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento system, use galvanized M8 screws andnuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive connectionof the ange using fan-washers placed on both sidesat least on one ange connection, or use Cu conductor wiring.To brace anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it isadvisable to connect them in the middle with another

screw clamp which prevents ange bar gapping (seeg. # 15).

power supply and CYKY 2Bx1,5 for the thermistor circu-

it are recommended. For a list of recommended cablesrelated to the wiring on pages 16-21, refer to table # 6.

Rubber plugRotation direction arrow

Wiring

The wiring can be performed only by a qualied wor -ker licensed in accordance with national regulations.The fans are equipped with a plastic terminal boxintended for Zone 1 EEx e II T6.The terminal box is xed with screws to the fan casing,and equipped with labelled screw terminals (see gure# 16).

Open the terminal box only if not energized.The wiring connection to the terminals can be perfor -med following the marking on the motor cables, descrip-

tion of terminals or the label on the terminal box lid.To connect the fan motor to the supply, use onlycables approved for this purpose. CYKY 4Bx1,5 for the

After starting the fan, the proper direction of the im-

peller rotation must be checked. To do so, remove therubber plug from the inspection opening in the fan cup(see. gure # 17). After starting the fan, the current must also bemeasured, and it must not exceed the maximum allo-

wed current stated on the rating plate (Imax.). If themeasured values exceed the given current value, it isnecessary to check the duct system regulation.The fan can be started after its mounting into theduct system for which it has been designed, or fullythrottled by closing either the intake or discharge toavoid its overloading! The fan is loaded by increasingthe air ow, i.e. by releasing the throttling.n The fan installation must comply with the ČSN EN60079-14 Standard for Electrical Appliances Intendedfor Explosive Gaseous Atmosphere, Art. 14 ElectricalInstallations in Dangerous Areas.

Table 6 - Recommended cables

Figure 14

Figure 15 – screw clamps

Figure 17

Figure 16 - All-plastic terminal box on the casing



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


The fan does not require special maintenance. Duringoperation, it is necessary to check proper functioning of the fan, its smooth running, to keep it and its surroun-

dings clean, and to load the fan only within the range

given by its output characteristics.If a failure occurs, make sure that the power supply isdisconnected. Check the fan for foreign objects insideand free impeller rotation. If the fan does not run after it has been restarted, the following procedures must befollowed depending on the protection system used:If the fan is protected by an STD relay, turn the fanon/off using the buttons on the protecting relay.If the fan is protected by a TRN controller, turn thefan off and on using the switch on the remote controlsof the controller.If the fan does not start, check the wiring and measure

the motor winding impedance. If the motor is damaged,contact your supplier.Attention! When performing any maintenance or re-


the power supply!


Figure 14 - Wiring diagram

K1, K2

– motor thermistor terminalsU1, V1, W1

– three-phase motor power supplyterminals 3f - 3x 400V/50HzPE


The wiring diagrams with front-end elements (protectiverelays, controllers, control units) are included in the in-


three-phase motor

of the fan



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

24V=

2 , 5 V

=

230V / 50Hz

3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

1 2 V p ř í p . 2 4 V =

2 4 V =

3x 400V / 50Hz

3x 400V / 50Hz

2 4 V =

2 , 5 V =

3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz

AFan equipped with thermal protection,

without Output Control

An RP (RQ) Ex fan connection in a simple venting sys-

tem without output control is shown in gures # 19.aand 19.b.This type of connection ensures full thermal protectionof the fan using thermistors, thermistor relay and pro-

tecting relay STD. The connection shown in the gu-

res enables manual turning of the fan on/off using thebuttons on the protecting relay.

After pressing the button marked "I" on the STD protecting relay, thefan starts and the button will stay in the depressed position, signallingthe fan's operation. The fan can be stopped by pressing the buttonmarked "0".If the motor is overheated above 130°C due to overloading, the im-

pedance of the K1 and K2 thermistors in the motor winding will beincreased several times.The thermistor relay will detect the increased impedance and open

contacts 11 and 14. Upon opening contacts 11 and 14, the STD pro-tecting relay circuit TK, TK will be disconnected. As a reaction to thisstate, the STD relay will disconnect the power supply to the overhea-

ted motor. After cooling down, the motor is not automatically started.The failure must be conrmed (unblocked) by the operator by pressingthe red "I" button.

BFan with Output Control

and Protection Controller

An RP (RQ) Ex fan connection in a venting system withoutput control using the TRN controller equipped with anORe5 control unit is shown in gures # 20.a and 20.b.In addition to the selection of the fan output within thestage range "0" - "5", this type of connection also ensu-

res its protection via thermistors, thermistor relay andthe protection integrated into the TRN controller.The connection shown in the pictures also enables the

fan to be switched on/off manually, by the ORe5 remotecontroller or any other switch (like room thermostat, gasdetector, pressostat, hygrostat, etc.) on the PT1 andPT2 terminals.

After turning the selector to position "1" to "5", the fan will start at thecorresponding output (1 to 5), and an indicator signalling the fan's ope-

ration will light up. The closed switch connected to PT1, PT2 terminalsand closed terminals 11 and 14 of the thermistor relay connected to TK,TK terminals of the controller are essential for fan operation. The switchconnected to PT1, PT2 terminals is used to stop and start the fan withoutother relations so that the fan after being started runs at the output preseton ORe5. If this possibility is not used, it will be necessary to interco -

nnect terminals PT1 and PT2. If the fan is overloaded, contacts 11 and14 of the tripping device will open due to overheating of the motor. As a

reaction to this state, the controller will disconnect the power supply tothe motor, and turn off the fan operation signalling indicator. After coolingdown, the motor is not automatically started. First, it is necessary toconrm (unblock) the failure removal by turning the selector to position"0". After turning the selector to position "1" to "5", the fan will start atthe corresponding output. In this arrangement, position "0" on the ORe5control unit must not be blocked

thermistor

relay STD

thermistor

relay

TRN

For example, detector

of explosive gas

concentrationRQ (RP) Ex

RP (RQ) Ex

Zone 1

BNV

Zone 1

BNV



ORe5



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

2,5V=

3 x 4 0 0

V / 5 0 H z

3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

3x 400V / 50 Hz

RQ Ex

WBC-Dex...(incl. thermistor relay)

24 V=

3x 400V / 50Hz

3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

2 , 5 V =

3x 400V / 50 Hz

RP (RQ) Ex

WBC-Dex...(incl. thermistor relay)

TRN

DFan with Control Unit

and Output Control

An RP (RQ) Ex fan equipped with an output controller and an OC controller connection in a more sophistica-

ted venting system with a WebClima control unit (e.g.with air heating) is shown in gures # 22.a and 22.b.This type of connection ensures full thermal protectionof the fan using thermistors and a WBC-Dex control unitwhich already contains a thermistor relay installed in thefactory. Fan switching on/off is ensured by the control

unit. The motor protection must always be ensured bythe control unit by connecting the TK, TK thermistor ter -minals to the 5a, 5a, 5b and 5b terminals in the controlunit. The OCe controller is installed in the control unitduring production. This connection of the speed cont-roller enables the option of fan output in the range fromstage "1" to stage "5".In the D connection example, all additional functions of the controller must always be blocked by interconnecti-ng the PT2 and E48 terminals in the controller.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. An OCe internalcontroller is integrated into the control unit, which enables remote

control of the controller. The OCe controller is provided only with posi-tions "1" to "5" to set the required fan output. Stages "1" to "3" can beblocked. All protection and safety functions of the fan as well as theentire system are ensured by the WebClima control unit.

CFans with Control Unit without Output

Control

An RP (RQ) Ex fan without output control connection ina more sophisticated venting system equipped with aWebClima control unit (e.g. with air heating) is shown ingures # 21.a and 21.b.This type of connection ensures full thermal protectionof the fan using thermistors and a WBC-Dex control unitwhich already contains a thermistor relay installed in thefactory. Fan switching on/off is ensured by the controlunit. The motor protection must always be ensured bythe control unit by connecting the TK, TK thermistor ter -minals to the 5a, 5a, 5b and 5b terminals in the controlunit.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. All protectionand safety functions of the fan as well as the entire system are ensu -red by the WebClima control unit.

2,5V=

Zone 1

BNV

Zone 1

BNV



HMI (controller)



RP Ex, RQ Ex Fans

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

3x 400 V / 50Hz

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 , 5 V =

0 – 1 0 V =

2 4 V =

3 x 4 0 0 V / 5 0 H z

230V / 50Hz

EFan with Automatic Output Control

for Special Applications

An RP (RQ) Ex fan connection in a special venting sys-

tem with automatic output control using the TRN contro-

ller equipped with an OXe controller integrated into theOSX control unit is shown in gures # 22.a and 22.b.Two TRN controllers can be controlled by the OSXcontrol unit. In addition to automatic fan output controlwithin the stage range "0" - "5", this type of connectionalso ensures fan protection via thermistors, thermistor relay and the protection integrated into the TRN con-

troller. This type of connection enables the fan to beswitched on/off manually, by any other switch (like roomthermostat, gas detector, pressostat, hygrostat, etc.) onterminals PT1, PT2. Automatic selection of the controller output stage is en-

sured by the OXe controller in relation to any physical

quantity which is read by the active sensor equippedwith an analogue output (signal source 0-10V). Ex fansuse mostly an explosion gas concentration sensor.

The fan in the picture is started, controlled and protected by the TRNcontroller. An automatic driver of the OXe controller evaluates thecontinuous 0-10V signal from a converter (signal source), and in veadjustable levels switches stages "1" to "5" of the controller. Thermalor pressure converters, converters for the measurement of relative or absolute humidity, concentration of gases, vapours or explosives inair, sensors of air quality and many other converters of different physi-cal quantities can be used as sources of the control signal.The closed electrical circuit between TK, TK terminals situated in thecontrol unit and closed external switch connected to PT1, PT2 termi-nals are essential for the fan's operation.

The switch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals can be used to stop andstart the fan separately without other relations. The PT1, PT2 termi-nals in the controller can also be interconnected with analogous termi-nals in the OSX control unit, and thus enable the fan to be stopped bythe button from the control unit. If this possibility is not used, it will benecessary to interconnect terminals PT1 and PT2.If the fan is overloaded, contacts TK, TK in the OSX control unit willbe disconnected due to overheating of the motor. As a reaction to thisstate, the controller will turn the overheated motor off. After coolingdown, the motor is not automatically started. The failure must be con-

rmed by pressing the separate unblocking button which is situatedinside the OSX control unit. As most similar special installations canvary from case to case, it is advisable to consult the specic connecti -on with the manufacturer. The manufacturer will deliver an OSX cont-rol unit adapted according to the disposition, modication and number

of individual devices. The following specication must be attached toyour order:- Type of fan No. 1- Type of fan No. 2- Type of controller No. 1- Type of controller No. 2- Type and manufacturer of the sensor (converter) provided witha 0-10V output.- Specication of the physical quantity read by the sensor (converter)and its range.

- Specication of the sensor (converter) power supply

RQ (RP) Ex

TRN

For example, a sensor of

explosive gas concentration

(source of 0-10V signal);

OSX control unit

for Ex fans (thermistor relay,

OXe, unblocking, source)

Thermostat

(optional contact)

Zone 1




Fan Output Controllers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Základyoregulaciventilátorů

Why Control Fan Output?Requirements for efciency of air-handling device ope-ration cannot be reduced just on the heat-output controlarea. Maximum energy savings can only be produ-ced by the full control, i.e. control of heating, cooling,

mixing, as well as the air ow control. The followingsections contain brief description of the most commonreasons for application of air ow control.

Energy Savings

If the air ow rate in a ventilated room is reduced by thecontroller to the half the inputs of the fan, heater andcooler will also be reduced to the half. Air-handling de-vices are often designed for applications with time va-rying requirements for the air exchange. The reasonscan be as the following: variable loading due to varyingnumber of persons in the ventilated room (restaurants,theatres, concert or dancing halls, etc.) or varying heatgain (loss) caused by internal sources or insolation, va-rying emissions of pollutants, humidity, etc. The highestenergy savings can be produced by using controllablefans and designing the air-handling device with variableair ow rates.

Noise Level Reduction

Some air-handling devices can be dimensioned to bepermanently operated at full output. However, on someconditions temporary noise level reduction can be re-quested.Vice versa - other air-handling devices can be designed

to be permanently operated at lower air ow rates withthe possibility to increase the air ow rate temporarily.

Process Ventilation

In practice, fully controllable fans of Vento and Aero-Master systems have proved their advantages in manycases. Just to give a few examples, they are used inaerodynamic testing laboratories, testing wind tunnels,air douches and oases with varying air ow rates, pro-cess cooling of machines or air exchangers, etc. Theyare frequently used in boiler houses requiring varyingsupply of combustion air depending on the number andoutput of currently used boilers. When air-conditioning

clean areas, the fan output controllers can automaticallykeep required positive pressure Dps=const. at differentair ow rates. And vice versa, sometimes the fan outputcontrollers can automatically ensure constant air owrate V=const. at variable pressure loss, e.g. caused bythe lter fouling.

Troubleshooting the Project

In places with insufcient energy sources for heating(cooling), which do not allow the heaters (coolers) to bedimensioned for the full air ow rates at minimum (ma-ximum) outdoor temperatures, air ow control can beused to compensate insufciency in heating (cooling)

output. Adjustment of the system, i.e. increasing/dec-reasing the air ow rate, can be performed manually bythe operator, or automatically using standard REMAKgoverning and controlling components.

Fan Speed ControlThe fan output can be controlled by changing the im-peller's speed. Generally, several types of control canbe used with fans. However, voltage control is the mostsuitable for fans equipped with resistance armature

motors. There is no interference, humming, squeakingor vibration of the motor. Furthermore, voltage contro-lled motors feature lower warming. RP, RQ, RO and RFfans, including their modications, can be steplesslycontrolled providing the change in voltage is stepless. Inpractice, stage-switching voltage controllers are usuallyused.

Five Stage Voltage Control

TRN, TRRE or TRRD stage voltage controllers cancontrol the fan output in ve stages by 20% steps, withwhich ve pressure-airow relation curves in workingcharacteristic of each fan comport.RP, RQ, RO and RS fan motors, including their modi-cations, can be operated within the range approx. from25% to 110% of the rated voltage. The following tableshows the correlation between the input voltage andselected stage of the controller for single-phase andthree-phase motors.

Stepless Electronic Control

Stepless electronic output control is suitable for single--phase fans; especially for RO fans (all sizes) and RFfans (size RF 30/...). Higher warming of motors at lower speed and noisiness can be considered as disadvan-tages of electronic control using PE 2,5 and PE 5 con-trollers. As a partial disadvantage can also be pointedthe fact that when determining operating modes the de-signer does not have the possibility to exactly dene thecontroller's stage of required output related to the loadof the ventilated space. However, when used in simpleair-handling systems, the stepless (continuous) controlcan provide some advantages.

Speed Control using Frequency Converters

Despite the continuous advancement in developmentof frequency converters, it still represents higher in-vestment using them to control the fan output, and tech-nically they are more convenient for standard motors,which are not designed for voltage control.


Table 1 - input voltage and stage of the controller

Characteristics curve – Controller's stageMotor

type

single-phase

three-phase




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Working Characteristics and ControlWorking Characteristics and ControlThe following text explains relationships of fan controland their working characteristics. Output characteristicsdetermine the relationship curve of the air ow rate V

(m3/h) and total fan pressure ?pt (Pa). An example ingure # 1 gives detailed explanation. All RP, RQ, RO andRF fans, including their modications, are fully control-lable, and they can be operated in connection with TRNor TRRE(D) ve-stage controllers in one of ve outputstages. Each output stage set on the controller (stage5,4,3,2, and 1) corresponds to one of the values of the

of which resistance characteristic, e.g. , does not gothrough the forbidden area. This fan must be throttled tothe minimum pressure loss ∆p

smin in accordance with

data tables of the respective fan.If the fan is operated in the forbidden area without be-

ing protected by the prescribed way the motor can bedamaged due to electric overloading. If the protection isperformed by the prescribed way the thermo-contactswill activate the protection at internal motor temperatureof 130°C, and the fan will be stopped. Warning! In some cases, if the fan's motor is cooled bythe freezing air the motor protection may not be activa-ted and motor will not be damaged. However, the con-troller is not cooled the same way as the fan's motor,and the winding of the controller might be overloadedand damaged due to exceeding current. Therefore,

after connecting the fan, the check of input current isessential. The phase current must not exceed maximumallowed value in any controller's output stage.

For assignment of the controller to the fan, refer to thecatalogue of the respective fan. The controller's versionmust comply with the fan (single-phase/three-phase),and the controller's maximum current must be higher than, or at least equal to, maximum current of the fan,refer to the fan's catalogue.

Example: According to RP fans' catalogue, RP 70-40/35-4D three-phase fan has maximum current Imax

= 6 Amp. TRN 7D three-phase controller is the closestcontroller with higher maximum current. This controller is also recommended in the "Data Section" of the RPfan Catalogue.

controller's input voltage (see table #1, page 91). Eachinput voltage corresponds to one of the fan's working cu-rves, the so-called fan's characteristic curve (see gure # 1).If no controller is connected to the fan, then the fan canonly be operated in accordance with curve .The characteristic of the particular duct system has aparabolic map curve of the relation V-∆p

t(e.g. curve

). Effective working point

of the fan - duct systemassemblage will lie at the intersection of the fan curvecorresponding to the selected output stage and the cu-rve of the connected duct system. The output of the fancontrolled by changing the voltage is dependent on theload.Therefore, not only the voltage and speed are changedbut also the current and input. Numerical values can befound in data tables, which include changes of thesevalues for three selected points of each working charac-teristic, e.g. 5a, 5b and 5c of characterist . Some fanshave the so-called forbidden area. The forbidden (non--working) area is dened by dashed lines. It is mar-ked in gure #1 when any characteristic ends with point"c", e.g. 5c, which does not lie on the dynamic pressure"p

d" curve .

Such the fan must not be operated with free inlet or freeoutlet; it must always be connected to the duct system



Figure 1 - Input voltage working characteristic




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Air Flow ControlFan output control is mostly used in systems with varia-ble air ow and constant duct system. We suppose thatthe characteristic curve of the duct system has deter-minate parabolic course, and the goal of the control is,

to change the air ow rate. The working characteristicof the fan can be changed from the maximum air owrate, which corresponds to working point 5A (see gure# 2), by switching the output stages, and thus to movethe working point along the duct system's characteristiccurve A from point 5A to points 4A, 3A, 2A or 1A, wherethe air ow rate is the lowest.

ow rate uctuation, e.g. in the range [V1 = 1,500, V2 =1,900], i.e. ± 150 m3/h (± 8.5% of required value).The working point of the given air-handling assemblycan lie on highlighted segments of characteristic curveswithin the determined range of the fan's working cha-

racteristics.

It is common practice to assemble similar air-handlingsystems with variable air ow rates using componentsof Vento system. Examples of these applications arepresented in scheme diagrams on the following pages.

Pressure ControlFan control can also ensure the constant air ow ratein a variable duct system. This type of control is appliedwith air-handling systems if aerodynamic properties of the duct system are signicantly changed in the course

of time, and these changes must be compensated bythe fan. As a good example of such the situation we canuse the lter fouling in air-handling systems intendedfor clean areas, which can produce pressure loss of hundreds of Pa, this could cause signicant reduction of air ow. If the constant air ow rate is required a simpleair-handling assembly can be congured from Ventosystem components; this assembly will keep the air owrate in a very narrow range even though the initial mi-nimum pressure loss in the duct system at the requiredair ow rate will only be for example 10% or 20% of theeventual pressure loss.

Let's suppose that the required air ow rate needs to bekept automatically without need for the operator's assi-stance. An example of the situation when the air owrate of about 1,750 m3 per hour has to be kept withinthe pressure difference ranging from 40 Pa to 270 Pais shown in gure # 3. Let's select the permissible air

The duct system's characteristic curves going throughthe initial and end points of particular segments areshown in gure # 4. The duct system's rising characteri-stic curves are marked with letters A to D. Let's suppose

that during service life of air lters initial A curve for cle-an lters will gradually change to end D curve for fouledlters, which must be replaced.The entire air-handling assembly will be controlled de-pending on sensed value ∆pt, which in this case repre-sents the difference between total pressure pt2 behindthe fan and static pressure ps1 in front of the fan (∆p

t

= pt2

- ps1

). If we omit inuence of dynamic pressure,which in this case represents about 4 Pa, the measu-rement of static pressure in front of and behind the fan(pressure differential) will be sufcient.

Constant ductsystem


∆ p t

– t o t a l p r e

s s u r e ( P a )


∆ p t

– t o t a l p r e s s u r e ( P a )

Variable ductsystem A to D


∆ p t

– t o t a l p r e s s u r e ( P a )


Figure 2 - Maximum air ow rate

Figure 3 - Fan working characteristics

Figure 4 - Duct system characteristics




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

The following Vento components are needed to congu-re a simple pressure controlled air-handling assembly: Fan (for example RP 60-35/31-6D) Fan output controller (for example TRN 2D) OSX control unit

Differential pressure sensor of working range, e.g.from 0 to 30 Pa, which provides output signal of 0–10VThe air-handling assembly will work so that the differen-tial pressure sensor will generate continuous analoguesignal of 0 to 10 V. When adjusting the assembly, indivi-dual comparison levels will be preset by the trimmer onthe face panel of OSX control unit; these levels deneselected pressure differential corresponding to a cer-tain output stage of the controller. In our demonstrationexample, these levels will be preset so that the secondoutput stage will be switched at pressure differentiallower than Dp2B. If pressure differential goes above the

value of Dp2B the controller will automatically switchto stage # 3. If pressure differential goes above the va-lue of? Dp3C the controller will automatically switch tostage # 4, respectively stage # 5. Output stage # 4 canbe skipped because duct system characteristic C goesthrough point 3C, and its working point 5C on curve # 5also lies within the determined air ow range.Figure # 5 shows all possible operational states of example air-handling assembly. Initial working point willbe 2A (fan characteristic curve 2, duct system characte-ristic curve A). Gradual lter fouling increases quicknessof the duct system characteristic curve until the statemarked with curve B is reached. The working point will

also be moved along the highlighted segment as far as to point 2B when the pressure differential reaches

Air-Handling Assembly

with Manual Air Flow Control

A simple air-handling system with variable air ow rate isshown in gure # 6. Adjustment of the inlet and outlet fanair ow rate is performed manually using common option onORe5 controller. The same air-handling assembly is shown ingure 7; however, here the inlet and outlet fan air ow ratescan be adjusted individually using two separate ORe5 contro-llers.

If ORe5 controller is replaced by other relay switching logic system, theabove-mentioned model can be used for a stage-type air ow controldependant on the selected logic system. For example, to increasethe quantity of combustion air according to the number of currentlyoperated boilers, etc.

Examplesofair-handlingassembliesequippedwithairowandpressurecontrol

Air-Handling Assembly with Automatic Air Flow Control

A simple air-handling system with automatic air ow rate control is shown in gure # 8. Aside fromseveral additional functions, OSX control unit mainly ensures automatic control of the fan outputsdepending on input information coming from the sensor. A converter of any physical quantity tounied analogue signal can serve as a sensor. Most often, physical quantity which we want toinuence by changing the air ow is measured, i.e. temperature (ventilation to reduce thermalloading), humidity (keeping the level of absolute or relative air humidity), concentration of gasesor vapours (reducing the concentration of explosives or other hazardous substances), air quality(ventilation of restaurants), pressure, pressure differential (keeping constant positive pressure inclean areas, or negative pressure in polluted hazardous areas), etc.

Variable ductsystem A to D


∆ p t

– t o t a l p r e s s

u r e ( P a )


Obrázek 5 – pracovní stavy zařízení

Figure 6 Figure 7

the rst comparison level ∆p2B. At that moment, OSXcontrol unit will switch from output stage # 2 to outputstage # 3 while the working point will jump from point2B to point 3B. Continuing lter fouling will move theworking point up, along the highlighted segment, as far as to point 3C when the pressure differential reacheslevel Dp3C corresponding to the second comparisonlevel. At that moment, OSX control unit will switch fromoutput stage # 3 to output stage # 5. Further lter fou-ling will move the working point to the end point marked5D, which represents the value seven-times higher thanthe one at point 2A. After replacing the air lters, the air--handling assembly will again start at point 2A.

ORe5

RP

RP

TRNTRN

Room

OSX

RP

RP

TRNTRN

RP

RP

TRNTRN

ORe5

Room

ORe5Figure 8

Sensor

Room




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

More Sophisticated Air-Handling Assembly

with Manual Air Flow Control

A more sophisticated air-handling assembly with air hea-ting and cooling, which is equipped with a control unit, isshown in gure # 9. In this case, it is advisable to install

internal controls of the controllers directly into the controlunit (instead of using separate ORe5 controllers). Internalcontrols can again be common ("dependent") for inlet andoutlet, or separate ("independent") for each controller.

Air-Handling Assembly with Automatic Air Flow Control

Figure # 11 shows a similar assembly, when the control unit is,as in the previous example, extended with an OX controller;however, its input is not connected to the unit internal control

signal but to external signal coming from the sensor of any phy-sical quantity. As far as the function is concerned, this assemblyis as same as the model with OSX unit shown in gure # 8.The only difference is, that the control unit with an integratedOX controller controls not only the fan output but also heating,cooling, respectively mixing. So, this is an example of the fullycontrolled air-handling assembly.

Air-Handling Assembly with Pressure Control

An example of the assembly which ensures constant air owrate in a variable duct system (e.g. great change in pressureloss due to fouling of end lters) is shown in gure # 12. A simpleand fully automatic assembly keep the air ow rate within verynarrow range. This air-handling assembly will work so that thedifferential pressure sensor will generate 0 to 10V continuousanalogue signal. According to this signal, OSX control unit swit-ches the controller's output stages. For the detailed analysis of an example air-handling assembly, refer to page 104.

More Sophisticated Air-Handling Assembly

with Pressure Control

Figure # 13 shows an example of the assembly which ensuresconstant air ow rate in a variable duct system (e.g. great changein pressure loss due to fouling of end lters).

As far as the air ow control principle is concerned, this assemblycorresponds with the assembly shown in gure # 12. However,in this case the OSX unit is replaced with a control unit equipped

with an OX controller. So, this assembly is fully and automaticallycontrolled (i.e. control of operation, temperature and pressure;and control of cooling and mixing, respectively control of heatexchange can also be added).

Figure 11

Figure 13

Figure 12


Room

TRN

OSX

V = const.

Figure 10

Room

RP

TRN

RP

Control unit

Room

RP

TRN

RP

Sensor

Room

TRN

Control unit




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Types of Voltage Controllers

TRN controllers are intended for the switching and ve-stage speed control of RP, RQ,RO and RF fans, including their modications. As standard, the TRN transformer con-trollers are equipped with an integrated fan motor protection. They are operated usingremote controller. Therefore, they can be situated out of the operator's reaching range.These controllers enable direct control from the control unit, respectively fully automa-

tic control.

TRRE (D) controllers are intended for the switching and ve-stage speed control of RP, RQ, RO and RFfans, including their modications. The TRRE(D) transformer controllers are not equipped with an inte-grated fan motor protection. Therefore, they must be used in connection with control units, respectivelySTE(D) protecting relays. These controllers are manually operated by the rotary selector situated on thefront panel, and therefore, they must be within the operator's reaching range.

PE controllers are intended for the switching and stepless control of single-phase fans. Electronic thermistor PE controllers arenot equipped with an integrated motor protection. Therefore, without additional components they can be only recommendedfor the fans equipped with their own protection using the so-called series thermo-contact (RO a RF 30/...). These controllersare manually operated by the rotary selector situated on the front panel. They can be installed into the mounting box embed-

ded under the plaster.

The controllers are intended for special voltage-controllable

asynchronous motors with a resistance armature. This table

provides a review and specication of individual controllers

based on their specication, use, properties, accessories

and comfort.


Table 2 - Specication of controllers

*) It enables (stepless) setting of the fan speed to minimum.

< 7< 9 < 7< 9 < 5

Pages 129–137 Pages 138–141 Pages 142




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Application of TRN ControllersTRN transformer controllers are intended for the switchingand ve-stage speed control of RP, RQ, RO and RF fans,including their modications.

Concept of ControllersControl and power parts of TRN controllers are separa-ted and interconnected by the cable. Separated conceptof controllers provides high variability, excellent layoutplanning and functional exibility. It is advisable to placethe output controller close to the fan, e.g. in a machineroom, in the ceiling, etc. While the remote control canbe conveniently situated within of the operator's reach.TRN controllers enable direct control from the controlunit, respectively fully automated control using specialcontrol elements.

Integrated Basic Features

As standard, TRN controllers (resp. in connection withremote controls) provide the following properties andfeatures:

Start-up

Starting /stopping the fan using remote control.

Fan Output Control

Five-stage fan output (speed) control depending on thecommand coming from the controller.

Thermal Protection of Fans

Permanent monitoring of the motor temperature (state of thermo-contacts in the motor winding). Switching the fansautomatically off if the maximum permissible temperaturehas been exceeded. The designer decides whether theprotection will be active by selecting one of recommendedways of the wiring (refer to the Wiring Diagrams).

Safety Blocking after Activating the Protection

After the thermal protection has been activated the safetyblocking function blocks the fan against spontaneousstarting. After checking the fan the controller must beunblocked turning the selector to the "0" position.

External Start-up

Remote (external) starting and stopping of the fan other

than using connected controller. This feature can be usedto start or block the fan by an external switch (thermostat,pressostat, manostat, hygrostat, gas detector, any auxi-liary contact, etc...). If the fan is started by the externalswitch the fans' operation and output will be controlled bythe connected controller, and vice versa, if output stage1-5 is preset on the controller the fan's operation will becontrolled the external switch.

Blocking of Output Stages

Controllers and controls support electronic blocking of some output stages by simple settings performed on thecontroller and/or remote control device. One or any combi-nation of stages can be blocked (applies for stages whichcan be blocked). For example, this feature can be used if the fan cannot be switched off by the controller but onlyby the external switch (i.e. function of external start-up isused). The blocking serves for the minimum air ow ratesetting, i.e. to limit low outputs etc. The blocking of stages

TRN Transformer Controllers

Table 3 - Controller Output Range

# 1, 2 and 3 can be performed directly in TRN controller.Blocking of stage "0" in an ORe5 controller, which can beoperated independently or combined with a control unit,is performed in case of the controller switching by thecontact, or if it is combined with a control unit (compulsory

for electrical heating). For blocking settings of TRN con-trollers, refer to the section "Wiring". For blocking of the"0"stage in an ORe5 controller, refer to the documentationdelivered with the controller.

Operation, Output and Failure Signalling

Controllers signal current operation state on an ORe5:• Operation or stop mode• Active output stage• Failure

Permanent Elimination of Some Functions

If TRN controllers are powered from the parent controlsystem, e.g. REMAK control units, by no means the fo-llowing functions may be used:

• Protection function• Function of external start-up

The protection function can be permanently disabled byinterconnecting the controller's TK, TK terminals. If this isthe case, the TK terminals in the fan's terminal box mustbe connected to corresponding terminals in a control unit.The failure of the fan will be evaluated by the parent controlsystem. External start-up function can be permanentlydisabled by interconnecting the controller's PT1, PT2terminals. Both, protection and start-up functions can bedisabled by interconnecting the controller's terminals PT2

and E48 - see the wiring diagram on page 100.The wiring diagram of the controller in a parent controlunit system is always included in the wiring diagram of the parent control unit..

Operating Conditions, PositionThese controllers are intended for indoor applications ina dry, dust and chemical free environment. They are de-signed for normal environmental conditions in accordancewith ČSN 33 2000-3 (IEC 364-3).

• Degree of protection: IP 20• Permissible ambient temperature: +5 °C to +40 °C• Position: always vertical or horizontal.

The controllers can be situated on a wall, air-handling ductor ancillary construction. They can be mounted on A and Bcombustibility grade materials in accordance with the ČSNEN 13 501-1 and ČSN 73 0823 standards.The installation must be performed considering the weightof the controller, easy cable wiring, barrier-free serviceaccess, and free cooling openings. The controller casing isprovided with ventilation openings – it must not be covered.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

D

A

E~ 25,2

F

4 0

B

C

Ø 7

1 3

Controls of TRN ControllersSeveral types of controls can be used to control TRNcontrollers. Each control enables one or two fan outputcontrollers to be controlled.The controllers can be specied according to their loca-tion and the way of control:

Designation of ControlExample: Designation TRN 4E species a single-phasefan controller designed for maximum current of 4 A.

Materials

External casings of all types of controllers are madeof steel sheet nished with RAL 9002 sprayed powder coating. Plastics, copper, aluminium, transformer steeland galvanized sheets are used in the internal structureof the controller. Internal electronic components of thecontroller are situated on printed circuit boards providedwith protecting coating. Switching and protection ele-ments are used in both, power and control electronics. All components and materials are carefully checked sothey ensure long life service and reliability of the contro-llers.

Integrated controllers and their description are a part of thecontrol unit conguration, and they must be consulted withthe manufacturer.Note: Some control systems (e.g. VCB) enable using inter-nal manual controls of the controllers in a time (automatic)mode - program.The use of ORe5 remote controller with manual selectionof output stage and light signalling of operation is essentialif no control unit is used in the control system. However, itscombination with a control unit can also be used in some

cases. It is intended for separate interior installation. Automatic control without using the control unit can be sol-ved by using OSX unit, refer to page 137.


Figure 15 - Dimensions and weights

Figure 14 - Type designation

Table 4 - Dimensions and weights

TRN 2E

TRN 4E

TRN 7E

TRN 2D

TRN 4D

TRN 7D

TRN 9D

Maximum current loading

2, 4, 7, 9 (A)

Transformer controller

TRN 4 E TRN ..E - single-phase

..D - three-phase

Table 5 - Controller types

Dimensional and Output RangeTotally seven types of TRN ve-stage controllers aremanufactured in accordance with table #3 and gure #14, see below.

Controller




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Table 6 - Fuses

InstallationTRN controllers are not intended, due to their concept,for direct sale to end customers. Each installation mustbe performed in accordance with a professional projectcreated by a qualied air-handling designer who is re-

sponsible for proper selection of the controller. The installation and commissioning can be perfor-med only by an authorized company licensed in accor-dance with valid regulations.The controller must be checked carefully before itsinstallation, especially if it was stored for a longer time.In particular, it is necessary to check all parts and cableinsulation for damage.

The remote control can be situated at any distancefrom the controller, and mounted on a wall at the opera-tor's location.

Wiring

The wiring can be performed only by a qualied worker licensed in accordance with national regulations.Cables for the power supply, fan motors connectionand control are led through plastic grommets, and co-nnected to the WAGO terminals in the lower part of thecontroller casing. The controller's entry is provided withplastic grommets. An example of a layout of individualconnection points for all controller sizes is shown in -gure # 17.For types of corresponding fuses for respective con-trollers, refer to table # 6. To make replacing the fuseeasy, free access and the necessary handling spacemust be provided.

It is advisable to place the TRN output controller clo-se to the fan, e.g. in a machine room, in the ceiling, etc.The controller can be placed on a wall, air-handling ductor ancillary construction. With regard to its weight, thecontroller is installed in three steps:

• First, x the base with 4 screws of 6 mm diameter.• Hang the controller supporting plate, including wiring,on the base, and secure it with a screw.• Finally, x the controller cover.The installation must be performed considering theweight of the controller, easy wiring, barrier-free serviceaccess, and free cooling openings. As the controller contains sensitive electro-mecha-nical parts, take care and keep the controller interior clean. Especially, it is necessary to avoid the controller being contaminated with dirt from a construction site(dust, sand, plaster, etc).

Holes for xing screws

Top cover

Base

Cable wiring grommets


Figure 16 – Controller description

Figure 17 - Controller connecting points

TRN 2E, TRN 4E, TRN 7E TRN 7D, TRN 9DTRN 2D, TRN 4D

power supply terminals , fan motor connecting terminals , fuses , power supply , remote control conne-cting terminal box , assembly of switching relays (or contactors) .

Each fan must be connected to a separate contro-ller. If the same output stage for two fans (inlet, outlet) isneeded, it is possible to control both controllers by oneremote control. For more detailed information, refer tothe operating instructions of individual controllers. As standard, the TRN controllers are equipped withintegrated fan motor protection. The TK, TK terminals inthe controller serve to interconnect the TK, TK terminalsof the fan motor thermo-contacts.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

If the fan motor is overheated due to overloading or emergency, the thermo-contacts will open and the cont-roller will stop the fan. When the motor cools down, andthe failure is removed, the fan can be restarted from thezero position on the remote control.

The TRN controllers enable remote (external)starting/stopping of the fan independently of the con-troller. This function can be controlled by connectingor disconnecting the circuit between the PT1 and PT2terminals. This feature can be used to start the fan byan external switch (thermostat, pressostat, hygrostat,auxiliary contact, etc...). After connecting the controller, the current must bemeasured, and it must not exceed maximum allowedvalue in any output stage. The maximum current valueis stated on the rating plate, and also as a numericalpart of the type designation code of the controller (e.g.

TRN 7D means Imax. = 7A).If the current values are higher, check whether thecontroller is connected to the appropriate fan; the ratedcurrent of the fan should be lower or equal to I max. of the controller.If the measured current value still exceeds the maxi-mum permissible value even though the connected fancomplies with the above-mentioned criteria, immediate-ly check the duct system regulation. The fan is probablyoperated in a so-called forbidden (non-working) area of the fan output characteristics. The proper current valueImax can be reached by air ow throttling. If the currentvalue does not drop even after adjusting the air-hand-ling system, it is necessary to check the electrical para-meters of the entire wiring.The installation of the controller must be performedin accordance with the project and catalogue (respecti-vely Installation Manual). Before putting the controller into operation, a wiring inspection must be performed.


ON … connectedOFF … disconnected

Blocking of Output StagesFor each output stage which can be blocked (1, 2, 3)there serves one connection - "jumper". A combination

of their states assigns blocked output stages. Their se-ttings are independent; however, in practice the loweststages are blocked, usually dependently, as indicated inthe following table:

Table 7 - Blocking of output stages

TRN 2D (4D, 7D, 9D) three-phase fan controller

Wiring diagram

Figure 18 - TRN controller terminal diagram

TRN 2E (4E, 7E) single-phase fan controller

Speed

Speed 1

Speed 2

Speed 3

Speed 4

Speed 5

STOP All other speed options

STOP/RESET

START

48 : 0V/DC49 : +24V/DC, 80 mATK, TK : thermo-contactterminalsPT1, PT2 : external switching termi-nals (e.g. room thermostat)L1, N, PE : 230V power supply

U1, N, PE : motor controlled voltageU1, V1, W1, PE : 400V power supplyU5, V5, W5 : controlled motor voltage

1x 230V+N+PE AC 50 Hz


Figure 19 - Location of jumpers

JumpersJ1, J2, J3

Dimensioning of contacts24V/DC, 0,1A




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


Transformátorové regulátory TRN

Installation ExamplesOn following pages you nd illustrations of installations

and wiring of TRN controllers; simple assemblies usingonly ORe5 controllers are completed with their wiringdiagrams.

Installations using ORe5 controller

A One TRN controller featuring protection function equipped with an ORe5 controller.

B Two TRN controllers featuring protection function equipped with a common ORe5 controller.

C Control unit with two TRN controllers and a common ORe5 controller.

Installations using controller installed directly into

the control unit

D Control unit with two TRN controllers and commoninternal controller E Control unit with two TRN controllers and integrated

individual internal controllersF Two TRN controllers featuring protection function

equipped with a common OSX unit.

The wiring diagrams with front-end elements (protectiverelays, controllers, control units) - see examples- areincluded in the installation manual, respectively in the AeroCAD project of these front-end elements.

Most of control system functions are set as soon asthe system is connected. It is only necessary to set theblocking of control stages. For blocking procedure of TRN controllers, refer to the section "Wiring". The bloc-king of individual controllers is described in their accom-panying documentation.

All non-standard connections must be consulted

with the manufacturer in writing, respectively cont-

rol of the controllers must be a part of the air-hand-

lingdeviceconguration-i.e.anAeroCADproject

or a letter of inquiry. The manufacturer's approval of

the controller's wiring is essential for validity of the

guaranty.

Simple air-handling systems equipped with a controlledfan sometimes require damper control to open the dam-per at the fan start-up. As the voltage on the controller'soutput terminals varies depending on the output stageselected this voltage cannot be used to control the dam-per actuator directly. Recommended solution is basedon the power supply versatility of some time-relays,which can work at input voltage ranging from 24V to240V AC/50Hz.K1 relay provides one switching contact, which can beused to control LM230 or LF230 actuator. Alternatively,a pressure differential sensor can be used, e.g. P33V

(suitably adjusted) situated on the fan, which ensuresopening of the damper if the preset pressure differencehas been indicated at the fan start-up.

K1

Time relay

Three-phase motor of the fan

Damper actuator LKS ..-.. /230LKSF ..-.. /230

For recommended cables to connect or interconnectthe assembly components, refer to table # 8.

Figure 20 - LKS and LKSF damper wiring diagram

Control of LSK, LKSF Dampers

Table 9 - input voltage and selected stage

Control StagesRP, RQ, RO and RF fan motors, including their modi-cations, can be operated within the range approx. from25% to 110% of the rated voltage. The following tableshows the correlation between the input voltage and

selected stage of the controller for single-phase andthree-phase motors.

Three-phase controller

TRN-D

Motor type

single-phase

three-phase


Cable VoltageConnection




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

One TRN controller featuring protection

function equipped with an ORe5 controller

An assembly of TRN controllers with individual ORe5 cont-roller in a single venting system with one or more fans which

must be controlled independently is shown in gure # 21 (a =single-phase, b = three-phase).This connection of the speed controller ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within the stagerange "1" to "5".Thermal protection of the fanFan switching on/off manually, by the ORe5Fan switching on/off externally, by any other switch (likeroom thermostat, gas detector, pressostat, hygrostat, etc.) onterminals PT1, PT2

Upon selecting the required output stage using a selector on theORe5 controller, the fan will start at corresponding speed. The closedswitch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals and the thermo-contact circuitconnected to TK, TK terminals are essential for the fan operation. Theswitch connected to PT1, PT2 terminals can externally stop the fan. If this possibility is not used, it will be necessary to interconnect termi-nals PT1 and PT2.If the fan is overloaded, the thermo-contact circuit will be disconnecteddue to overheating of the motor winding. As a reaction to this state,the controller will disconnect the fan power supply, and the red controllight on ORe5 controller will signal the failure. After cooling down, themotor is not automatically started. To restart the fan, i t is necessaryrst to set the selector to the "STOP" position, and thus conrm failureremoval, and then to set the required fan output. In this arrangement,the option "STOP" on ORe5 controller must not be blocked.

Example A

3 x 400V, 50Hz

2 4 V =

3 x 4 0 0 V

230 V, 50Hz

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 3 0 V

2 4 V =

2 4 V =


ORe5 ORe5


TRN - DTRN - E

Figure 21 - Connection of Controllers

Two TRN controllers featuring protection func-

tion equipped with a common ORe5 controller

An assembly of two TRN controllers with a common ORe5controller in a single venting system is shown in gure # 22.The fans are always controlled together to the same outputstage.This connection of the speed controller ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within the stagerange "1" to "5".Thermal protection of the fansCommon fan switching on/off manually, from ORe5 Assembly switching on/off externally by any other switch(like room thermostat, gas detector, pressostat, hygrostat, etc.)on terminals PT1, PT2. External switching of the controller isindependent; this example shows external starting of only onecontroller (TRN-E).

Upon selecting the required output stage using a selector on ORe5 controller the fan will start at corresponding speed. The closed switch connected to PT1,PT2 terminals and the thermo-contact circuit connected to corresponding con-troller TK, TK terminals are essential for the fan operation. The switch conne-cted to PT1, PT2 terminals can externally stop the fan. If this possibility is notused, it will be necessary to interconnect terminals PT1 and PT2. If the fan isoverloaded, the thermo-contact circuit will be disconnected due to overheatingof the motor winding. As a reaction to this state, the controller will disconnectpower supply to the overloaded fan. If this controller is the so-called reference

controller, i.e. the controller's ERR terminal is connected to ERR terminal onORe5 controller, the failure will be signalled by the red indicator on the ORe5controller. If the thermo-contact circuit of the second fan is not simultaneouslydisconnected the second fan stay in operation. After cooling down, the fan is notautomatically started. To restart the fan, it is necessary rst to set the selector to the "STOP" position, and thus conrm failure removal, and then to set therequired fan output. In this arrangement, the option "STOP" on ORe5 controller must not be blocked.

ORe5

400V, 50Hz

4 0 0 V

230 V, 50Hz

2 4 V =

2 3 0 V

2 4 V =

24 V=

2 4 V =

2 4 V =


TRN - DTRN - E

Example B


a b




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Control unit (in this example VCX) with two TRN

controllers and a common ORe5 controller

An assembly of the control unit with two TRN controllers witha common ORe5 controller is shown in gure # 23.

Among others, this connection ensures:The possibility of fan output selection within the stagerange "1" to "5".Thermal protection of the motor (TK thermo-contact termi-nals are connected to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the controlunit).Manual switching on/off using ORe5 controller.Programmable switching on/off of the entire device fromthe control unit.In this assembly connection the following is essential: All additional functions of the controller must always beblocked by interconnecting the PT2 and E48 terminals in thecontroller.

The "STOP" position on ORe5 controller must be blocked

(same as in the following examples with a control unit).

After setting the required speed turning the selector to the required position (1to 5), the control unit will be switched on, and fans will start at the correspon-ding output. The ORe5's indicator will light up indicating the selected fan outputstage and assembly operation. If the fans are overloaded, the thermo-contactcircuit will be disconnected due to overheating of the motor winding. As a reac-tion to this state, the control unit will stop the assembly in emergency mode. Thered indicator will light up indicating the failure on the ORe5 controller and controlunit. After the motor winding has cooled down, the thermo-contact will close;however, the control unit will block the fan start-up until the operator conrmsthe failure removal by pressing an unblocking button on the control unit

Example C


2 3 0 V

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

3 x 4 0 0 V ,

5 0 H z

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

3 x 4 0 0 V

24 V=24 V=

24 V=ORe5

control unit

TRN-DTRN-E

Control unit with two controllers and common internal

control of the controllers (VCB, WBC + MCU-1, PAD3)

An assembly of the control unit with two TRN controllers anda common internal controller is shown in gure # 24. Theinternal controller is installed in the control unit during produc-tion.

Among others, this connection ensures:Manual selection of the fan output within the stage range"1" to "5".Thermal protection of the motor (TK thermo-contact termi-nals are connected to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals in the controlunit).Manual or programmable switching on/off of the entire de-vice using a control unit.

In this installation, all additional functions of the controller must always be blocked by interconnecting the PT2 and E48terminals in the controller (for details, refer to page 133).

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. Internal controlis integrated in the control unit to control the controllers conjointly.Internal controller is provided only with positions "1" to "5" to set therequired fan output. The lowest stages "1" to "3" can be blocked. Allprotection and safety functions of the fans as well as the entire sys-

tem are ensured by the control unit.

4 0 0 V

24 V=

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

24 V=

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 3 0 V

400V, 50Hz

TRN - DTRN - E

Controlunit

Example D





F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Control unit with two controllers and internal control

of the controllers (in this example: VCB, WBC + MCU-2)

An assembly of the control unit with two TRN controllers and aseparate internal controller for each controller is shown in -

gure # 25. Internal controllers are installed into the control unitduring production (optional for MCU-2). Among others, thisconnection ensures:Manual selection of the fan output within the stage range1-5, independently for the inlet and outlet (this can be used toget the required positive or negative air pressure in the room).Thermal protection of the motor (by connecting the motor TK, TK thermo-contact terminals to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals inthe control unit).Manual or programmable switching on/off of the entire de-vice using the control unit.

In this installation, all additional functions of the controller must always be blocked by interconnecting the PT2 and E48terminals in the controller.

The air-handling system is started by the control unit. Internal controlsare integrated in the control unit to control the controllers individually.Internal controllers are provided with positions "1" to "5" to set the re-quired fan output stage. The lowest stages "1" to "3" can be blocked.

All protection and safety functions of the fans as well as the entiresystem are ensured by the control unit.

3 x 4 0 0 V

24 V=

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

24 V=

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2 3 0 V

3x400V, 50Hz

TRN-DTRN-E

control unit

Example E


Two TRN controllers featuring protection function

equipped with a common OSX unit.

An assembly of the control unit with TRN controllers and acommon OSX unit is shown in gure # 26. The fans are cont-rolled together to the same output stage. Among others, this assembly depending on its connection en-sures the following: Automatic switching on/off of the fan at the selected valueof input control voltage.Manual switching on/off of the fan from the OSX unit.Fan switching on/off, by external switching function.

Automatic selection of the fan output stage ranging from"1" to "5" depending on a physical quantity, which is read bythe sensor equipped with a unied analogue output (signalsource of 0-10V).Manual start-up of the system at the MANUALLY preset(by the button) output stage. The factory default setting of theOSX controller enables MANUAL start of the assembly at thefull output using this button.Thermal protection of the fans

The fans on the picture are started, controlled and protected by TRNcontrollers. OSX unit evaluates signal coming from a converter (signalsource), and in ve adjustable levels automatically switches stages"0" to "5" of the controller. Thermal or pressure converters, converters

for the measurement of relative or absolute humidity, concentration of gases, vapours or explosives in air, sensors of air quality and manyother converters of different physical quantities can be used as sour-ces of the control signal.For detailed information about OSX (for explosion-proof fans OSX-Ex)units, refer to their accompanying documentation. For the wiring dia-grams of OSX (for explosion-proof fans OSX-Ex) units, refer to their accompanying documentation.

0– 10V =

24 V =

230V / 50Hz

230 V, 50 Hz

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

2 3 0 V ,

5 0 H z

2 4 V

=

2 4 V

=

3 x 4

0 0 V ,

5 0 H z

3 x 400 V, 50Hz

TRN-DTRN-E

OSX

control box

Source of the signal

– temperature sensor (0-10V signal)

Example F





R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Application of TRRE and TRRD ControllersTRRE (single-phase) and TRRD (three-phase) transfor-mer controllers are intended for the switching and ve--stage speed control of voltage controllable fans (e.g.RP, RQ, RO and RF fans, including their modications).

Design of ControllersTRRE(D) controllers are equipped with an integratedcontrol and power systems. Unlike TRN controllers,these cheaper controllers are not equipped with thermalprotection of the fans. For transparent comparison of controller types, refer to table # 2.

Integrated Basic Features As standard, TRRE and TRRD controllers provide thefollowing properties and features:

Start-up

Starting /stopping the fan using the rotary selector situa-ted on the front panel.

Fan Output Control

Five-stage fan output (speed) control by changing theinput voltage, which corresponds with the position of theselector on the front panel.

Blocking of Output Stages

These controllers enable mechanical blocking of outputstages 0-3 by simple adjustment of the rotary switchcoulisse, refer to the following page. The blockingserves for the minimum air ow rate setting, i.e. to limitlow outputs (e.g. air-handling systems equipped with anelectric heater).

Operation, Output and Failure Signalling

Controllers signal current state of operation:• Operation mode (the green indicator lights up)• Stop mode (selector in the "0" position,the indicator does not light)• Active output stage (selector's positions 1-5)• Failure (selector's positions 1-5, the indicator does not light)

Operating Conditions, PositionThese controllers are intended for indoor applications

in a dry, dust and chemical free environment. They aredesigned for normal environmental conditions in accor-dance with ČSN 33 2000-3 (IEC 364-3).

• Degree of protection: IP 20• Permissible ambient temperature: +5 °C to +40 °C• Position: always vertical or horizontal.

The controllers can be situated on a wall, air-handlingduct or ancillary construction; however, always only inthe vertical or horizontal position. The installation mustbe performed considering the weight of the controller.They can be mounted on A and B combustibility gradematerials in accordance with the ČSN EN 13 501-1

standard. The controller casing is provided with venti-lation openings which must not be covered. Permanentand easy access to the controller must be ensured.

Controllers - top cover open

Controllers - top cover closed

Designation of ControllersExample: Designation TRRE 4 species a single-phasefan controller designed for maximum current of 4 Amp.

TRRE and TRRD Transformer Controllers

Figure 27 - Types of TRRE(D) controllers


Table 10 - Types of controllers

Maximum current loading

2, 4, 7, 9 (A)

Transformer controller

TRRE 4 E..E - single-phase

..D - three-phase

MaterialsExternal casings of all controller types are made of steelsheet nished with RAL 9002 sprayed powder coating.Plastics, copper, aluminium, transformer steel andgalvanized sheets are used in the internal controller's

structure. Switching and protection elements (switches,fuses, indicators, etc.) are used in both, power and con-trol wiring. All components and materials are carefullychecked so they ensure long life service and reliabilityof the controllers.

Dimensional and Output RangeTotally seven types of TRRE (D) ve-stage controllersare manufactured in accordance with table #10 and -gure # 27.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Figure 29 - Controller dimensions

InstallationTRRE and TRRD controllers are not intended, due to

their concept, for direct sale to end customers. Eachinstallation must be performed in accordance with aprofessional project created by a qualied air-handlingdesigner who is responsible for proper selection of thecontroller.The installation and commissioning can be perfor-med only by an authorized company licensed in accor-dance with valid regulations.The controller must be checked carefully before itsinstallation, especially if it was stored for a longer time.In particular, it is necessary to check all parts and cable

insulation for damage:• First, x the base with 4 screws of 6 mm diameter

(see gure # 30).• Hang the controller supporting plate, including wiring,on the base, and secure it with a screw.• Finally, x the controller cover The controller must be placed within reach of the

operator. The installation must be performed conside-ring the weight of the controller, easy wiring, free coo-ling openings and its degree of electrical protection. As the controller contains sensitive electro-mechani-

cal parts, take care during installation and keep the con-troller's interior clean (avoid dust, sand, plaster, etc).The controllers enable mechanical blocking of out-put stages 0-3. The blocking serves for the minimumair ow setting, i.e. to limit low outputs or to block the"0" stage if the control unit is used. The controller'sblocking can be simply carried out by bending the corre-sponding lamella on the rotary switch coulisse.

Top cover

Base

Arm of the rotary selector

Stage blocking coulisse

Indicator of operation

K

P

The blocking of a selectedoutput stage can be simply ca-rried out by bending the corre-sponding lamella on the rotaryswitch coulisse K up, 90° aslant(see gure # 32). Thus the armof the rotary switch P is blockedfrom passing through the positi-on of the given output stage.

outer grounding point

D

A

E~ 25,2

F

4 0

B

C

Ø 7

1 3

Holes for xing screws

Top cover

Base

Rotary selector

Indicator of operation

Cable wiring grommets

Table 11 - Controller dimensions

TRRE 2

TRRE 4

TRRE 7

TRRD 2

TRRD 4

TRRD 9

TRRD 7

Obrázek 30 – popis regulátoru

Figure 31 - Mechanical blocking of output stages

Figure 32


Controller




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Table 13 - Fuses

Stages 0 - 3 can be bloc-ked by bending the corre-sponding lamellas on the ro-tary switch coulisse .(see gure # 33). One or the

range of two, three or four successive positions of therotary switch can be blocked.

Figure 34 shows blockingof the output sta . The rota-ry switch can be turned rightor left so all stages exceptstage are available.

Wiring

The wiring can be performed only by a qualied worker licensed in accordance with national regulations.Cables for the power supply, fan motors connection andcontrol are led through plastic grommets and connectedto the WAGO terminals in the lower part of the controller casing. The controller's entry is provided with plastic gro-mmets. An example of a layout of individual connection po-ints for all controllers' sizes is shown in gure on page 130.The TRRE and TRRD controllers are not equippedwith an integrated fan motor protection. Therefore, ex-ternal protection devices must be used (STE, STD rela-ys or control unit).

After connecting the controller and starting the fan,the current must be measured, and it must not exceedthe maximum allowed value in any output stage. Themaximum current value is stated on the rating plate,and also as a numerical part of the type designati-on code of the controller (e.g. TRRD 7 means I

max.=

7Amp).If the current values are higher, check whether thecontroller is connected to the appropriate fan; the ratedcurrent of the fan should be lower or equal to Imax. of the controller.If the measured current value still exceeds the maxi-mum permissible value even though the connected fancomplies with the above-mentioned criteria, immediate-ly check the duct system regulation. The fan is probablybeing operated in a so-called forbidden (non-working)area of the fan output characteristics. The proper cu-rrent value Imax. can be reached by air ow throttling.If the current value does not drop even after adjus-ting the duct system regulation, it is necessary to checkthe electrical parameters of the entire wiring.Each fan should be connected to a separate contro-ller. If this recommendation cannot be fullled, max. twofans can be connected to one controller, and enoughcurrent margins must be kept; i.e. the minimum rating

current of the controller must be 20% higher than thesum of the maximum currents of connected fans.Example: The maximum sum of currents of two RP 60-35/31-6D fans is 2 x 1.86Amp = 3.72Amp. Adding 20%of safety margin, it makes the total controller's currentof 4.46 Amp. Then, the closet bigger controller's size isTRRD 7.

Each installationof the controller

must be perfor-med on a basis of the project and inaccordance with thecontroller's docu-mentation, respecti-vely documentationother connectedequipment.

The wiring must be checked before putting the devi-ce into operation.

Wiring diagram

On following page you nd illustrations of installationsand wiring of TRRE and TRRD controllers.

G – Installation including STE(D) protecting relay

One TRRE controller with STE protecting relayOne TRRD controller with STD protecting relayH – Installation including the control unit

Control unit (VCX) with two TRRE and TRRD contro-llers

Non-standard assembly connections must be consulted

with the manufacturer in writing. The controller's wiring

in accordance with the manufacturer's prescription or

approval is essential for validity of the guarantee.

For types of corresponding fuses for respective con-trollers, refer to table # 13.For recommended cables to connect or interconnectthe assembly components, refer to table # 12. Marking of the cables corresponds to the wiring diagrams.


Figure 33

Figure 34


Figure 35 - TRRE(D) controller terminal diagram



S i n g l e - p h a s e

T R R E

c o n t r o l l e r

T h r e e - p h a s e

T R R D

c o n t r o l l e r

Cable




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

One TRRE(D) controller

with STE(D) protecting relay

An assembly of TRRE and TRRD controllers with a fanand STE and STD protecting relays in a single venting

system is shown in gure # 36 (a = single-phase, b =three-phase). This connection ensures::Manual selection of the fan output within the stagerange "1" to "5".Thermal protection of the fan by STE(D) relayManual switching on/off of the fan. The controller and protecting relay must be placed wi-thin the operator's reach. To ensure control exactness inthis application, it is advisable to block the "0" position.In this case, the air-handling assembly will be startedfrom STE(D) protecting relay. The blocking is not essen-

tial; however, without the blocking it will be possible toswitch the fans off from both, protecting relay and cont-roller.

After turning the selector to position 1-5, the fan will start at the corre-sponding output. An indicator on the front panel will light up indicatingthe fan's operation.If the fan is overloaded, the thermo-contact circuit will be disconnec-ted due to overheating of the motor winding, and STE(D) protectingrelay disconnect the power supply to TRRE(D) controller. The air-han-dling assembly can be restarted after removing the failure cause andunblocking the STE(D) protecting relay.

Obr. 43

2 4 V =

3 x 4 0 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

TRRD STD

3x 400V / 50Hz

2 3 0 V

2 3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

TRRESTE

230V / 50Hz

Example G

Control unit with TRR(D) controllers

An assembly of the control unit with TRRE and TRRDcontrollers is shown in gure # 37.This connection ensures:Manual selection of the fan output within the stagerange "1" to "5".Thermal protection of the motor (TK thermo-contactterminals are connected to 5a, 5a, 5b, 5b terminals inthe control unit).Manual or programmable switching on/off of the enti-re device using the control unit.

Position "1" on the controller must be blocked in the as-sembly with a control unit (fro the details, refer to page133). The controller must be placed within the opera-tor's reach.

The required fan output can be set by switching the selector's positi-ons "1" to "5". After starting the air-handling assembly from the controlunit, an indicator on the TRRE(D) controller's front panel will light upindicating the fan's operation. All protection and safety functions of thefans as well as the entire system are ensured by the control unit.

Example HFigure 37 - Connection of Controllers


3 x 4 0 0 V

2 4 V =

2 4 V =

2

3 0 V

/ 5 0 H z

3x400V, 50Hz

TRRDTRRE

230V, 50Hz

c o n t r o l u n i t

a b




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Application of PE ControllersPE electronic controllers are intended for the switchingand stepless control of single-phase motors equippedwith a resistance armature. These controllers are notequipped with an integrated motor protection. There-

fore, without additional components they can be onlyrecommended for RO and RF 30/... fans (which areequipped with their own protection using the series ther-mo-contacts situated in the power supply circuit).

Integrated Basic Features As standard, PE controllers provide the following:features: Start-up

Starting /stopping the fan using the rotary selector situa-ted on the controller's front panel. Fan Output Control

Stepless fan output (speed) control by changing the in-

put voltage turning the selector on the front panel. Switch Off Blocking

The blocking of the motor switching off can be enabledby the wiring shown in gure # 32. The blocking mustbe active if connected to the control unit. Minimum Output Setting

Minimum fan speed can be set by the setting screw (marked"MIN"); this setting is not used to block the fan switching off - seethe section "Wiring". Operation and Output Signalling

PE controllers signal the following states of operation:• Operation (indicated on the control button)

• Stop (the indicator does not light)• Position of the control selector indicatesapproximate output stage.

Designation of ControllersTwo types of controllers, PE 2,5 and PE 05, are delive-red. The number in the controller's designation indicatesthe rated current value.

Unlike TRN controllers, PE contro-

llers can cause humming (squea-king) of the motor at low speed. Attention!

If PE controller works in assembly with a control unit L1phase conductor must be connected to the controller's ↑1 terminal (dashed line). If this is the case, the fan cannotbe switched off by the controller.In all other cases, L1 pha-se is connected to the controller's ↓ 3 terminal. Then, thefan can be switched off by the controller.

Mounting box

Cover frame

Fuse

C - cover

Illuminating module

C - cooler cover

Setting screw(MIN)

Selector

Cover frame

Middle C - cover

Selector

Fuse

Setting screw(MIN)

Distance bolt

PE controller

single-phasemotor

of RO Fan

PE electronic controllers

Table 14 - Technical parameters

Figure 38 - PE thyristor controller Figure 39 - Controller's wiring

Operating Conditions, PositionThese controllers are intended for indoor applicationsin a dry, dust and chemical free environment. They aredesigned for normal environmental conditions in accor-dance with IEC 364-3 (ČSN 33 2000-3). They can beinstalled into the mounting box embedded under the

plaster. Degree of protection: IP 20. Permissible ambi-ent temperature: +5 °C to +40°C.

WiringThe wiring can be performed only by a qualied worker licensed in accordance with valid regulations. After disconnecting the power supply, the controller can be connected using connecting terminals directedupwards (PE 2,5) or directed downwards (PE 05).Warning! If PE controller works in assembly witha control unit, L1 phase conductor must be connectedto the controller's ↑1 1 terminal. If this is the case, thefan cannot be switched off by the controller. In all other

cases, L1 phase is connected to the controller's ↓ 3 ter -minal.Minimum fan speed can be set using the settingscrew (marked "MIN") to enable the safe fan's restarteven encountering pressure resistance when the power supply has been resumed after its failure. After the wiring has been completed replace theframe and cover using plastic matrix. Slide the controlbutton on the shaft, and turn it to the right until the stop




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Applications of Heate

Electric heaters are intended for air heating, from sim-

ple venting installations to sophisticated air-handling

systems. They are designed to be installed directly in

square air ducts. Ideally, they can be used along with

other components of the Vento modular system which

ensure inter-compatibility, balanced parameters, safety

and efciency of operation.

Working Environment

Electric heaters are intended for normal environmental

conditions in accordance with ČSN 33 2000-3 (IEC 364-3). The transported air must be free of corrosive chemi-cals or chemicals aggressive to aluminium, copper and

zinc, respectively to plastics. Further, the transported air

must be free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive, am-

mable or explosive impurities.

• Degree of protection: IP 40• Permissible air temperature: -25 °C to +40 °C• Location: indoor, or outside under projecting roof

Dimensional and Output Range

Electric heaters are delivered in a range of nine stan-

dardized sizes according to the A x B dimensions of the

connecting ange, and in a range of three types accor -ding to the method of control - EO, EOS, EOSX. Elect-ric heaters can be connected to air ducts in the same

way as any other Vento duct system component. Seve-

ral output versions of electric heaters are manufactured

for each standardized size (see table # 1). According tothe heating output, in total nine electric heater versions

of gradually growing maximum heating output from

3 kW to 45 kW are manufactured. Higher outputs canbe reached by assembling several heaters in series.

Position and Location

The heaters can operate in any position except the

position with the wiring distribution box directed down-

wards (there is a risk of condensate penetration fromthe air duct). When projecting the layout of the heater location, we recommend observing the following: An air lter must be installed at a sufcient distancein front of the heater to avoid its fouling (according tore regulations, direct installation of the air lter just infront of the heater is forbidden).We recommend adding a 1 m long piece of straightduct to the heater's inlet to reduce thermal load of co-

nnected devices.

The heater's casing must be situated at a safe di-

stance from ammable or easily inammable materials(min. 5 cm).The location of the heater must allow free cooling.

Free access to the heater must always be ensuredto enable checks and service.The prescribed air ow direction through the heater is marked on the heater's wiring box by an arrow (seegure # 1).

FlangeHeater's casing

A i r f o w d

i r e c t i o n


Figure 1 - Air ow direction

Table 1 – Output Range

SizeOutput [kW]

Materials and Design

As standard, the external casing of the heater, casing of

the wiring box and connecting anges are made of gal-vanized sheet steel (protecting layer of 275 g/m2 Zn).Heating rods are made of stainless steel. The heating

rods of the 50-25 and larger heater sizes are xed toaluminium braces to eliminate vibrations. The cooler of

the power semiconductor relays is made of ribbed sec-

tional aluminium. Plastics, copper, aluminium and brassare used in the internal wiring. All components and

materials are carefully checked so they ensure long lifeservice and reliability of the heaters.

Wiring box

Grommets

Heating rods

T y p e

Max. output kW

A x B dimensions

Heater type:

EOS 70- 40 / 30

Electric heater without switching - EO

Electric heater with switching - EOSElectric heater with cascade switching - EOSX


Designation of Heaters

Type designation of the electric heaters in projects andorders is dened by the key in gure # 2. The heater'stype designation includes its rounded up max. output.



Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

P1, P2, P3*

Plugged cable grommets

(for Pg dimension, refer to table)

Table 2 - Dimensional Range

Figure 3 - Dimensions and weights

Parameters

P3*

Not used with EO heaters

* Weight ±10 %

Type and sizem *



Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Output and Pressure Loss Determination

EO, EOS and EOSX electric heaters are dimensionedaccording to required heating output Q according to ma-

ximum air ow rate V and required heating-up ∆T.

Preliminary correlations of parameters (Q, V, DT) for all output ranges of standard heaters are included in thegraph, see gure # 4. Heating-up DT for the correspon-

ding air ow rate is valid providing the heater works atmaximum output. If a control unit is used, the heaters'

output will be controlled according to actual need in re-

lation to the required outlet air temperature.

Pressure losses of EO, EOS and EOSX electric hea-

ters are included in the nomogram, see gure 5.Each heater in the table is marked with a number in accordance with its output and connecting

dimensions, and each number comports with one pre-

ssure loss/air ow rate correlation characteristic.

(1 This function must be ensured by the control unit..(2 For details on blocking of individual controllers' stages, refer tothe controllers' documentation, respectively fan output control

1

3

4,5

6

7,5

12 15 22,5 30

Heater output Q (kW)

A i r h e a t i n g - u p ∆ T

[ K ]

Air fow rate V [m3 /h]

Q=m.c.∆T

45

Parameters

Figure 4 - The air temperature growth in the heater in relation to the air ow rate

Planning the heater When dimensioning and planning the electric heater, it isnecessary to observe the following safety principles:The heaters must be situated at a safe distance fromammable or easily inammable materials. The locationof the heater must allow free space for heater surfacecooling.To reduce the heat loading (by heat radiation and/or conduction) of connected devices, we recommendinserting at least a 1 m piece of air duct in front of andbehind the heater. At a minimum distance of 1–1.5 m in front of theheater, an air lter must be installed to avoid its fouling.Without using an air lter, there is a danger of the hea-ting rods fouling and eventually being damaged due toinsufcient cooling. According to re regulations, direct installation of the air lter just in front of the heater is forbidden!

It is necessary to keep free access to the heater,especially to its wiring distribution box, to enable easychecks, inspections and service.The heaters can operate in any position except theposition with the wiring distribution box (switchboard)

directed downwards (there is a risk of condensate pe-netration from the air duct).The heater output must be automatically controlledso that the outlet air temperature is limited to +40°C.The operation of the heater must be blocked if thefan is out of operation for any reason. (1

Either the air-handling device is switched off manua-lly or automatically the heater must be switched off rst,and then with a time delay sufcient for heater cooling,the dampers can be closed and the fan switched off.The speed of the air ow in the electric heater should not fall below 1–2 m/s. If the output of the fan iscontrolled by the TRN controller, it is possible to blockthe lower stages so that the speed of the air ow will notfall below the above-mentioned value.(2



Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all EO, EOS and EOSX heaters. For selected air ow rate theair ow velocity in the free heater's cross-section can be read, and then the corresponding heater's air pre-

ssure loss can be determined in the upper part .

Example: At an air ow rate of 4,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow in the electric EOS 70-40/30 heater will be4.46 m/s. The heater's air pressure loss for the above-mentioned air ow rate according to the table will be 26Pa on curve .

V - A i r o w

[ m 3 / h ]

V - A i r o w

[ m 3 / s ]

D i m e n s i o n a l r a n g e s

∆ p - a i r p r e s s u r e l o s s

[ P a ]

v - Air ow velocity in the heater's cross-section [m/s]

S i z e o f t h e

h e a t e r

265

4,46

4

A s s i g n m e n t o f c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o p a r t i c u l a r h e a t e r s i s i n c l u d e d i n t h e t a b l e

Each EO, EOS or EOSXheater in the table ismarked with one number in accordance with itsoutput and connecting

dimensions: Each number comportswith one pressure loss/air ow rate correlationcharacteristic.

9 0 - 5

0

2

3

45001

Figure 5 - Pressure losses in heaters

Parameters

Output / dimension

Area of limited use

(air fow velocity 1 to 2 m/s)



Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

(3 (3 EOSX heaters are manufactured with an output from 12 kWand higher, because the symmetry of the phase loading distribution

into the sections cannot be ensured at lower outputs.

control

unit

EO, EO S

, EO S X

Con trolling se

nsor

on the inle t b

ehind

the hea ter

230/400 V, 50Hz

(CYKY according to table, page 5, column "Feeder")

control

unit

EO, EO S

, EO S X

Tempera ture sen

sor

24 V = (JYTY 2 x 0,5)

Tempera ture sen

sor

24 V =

(JYTY according to table, page 5, column "TK")

24 V = (not used with EO heaters)

(JYTY according to table, page 5, column "Control")

Tempera ture sen

sor

Figure 6 - Example of heater connection (VCB unit)

Control and Protection Correlations

EO, EOS, EOSX electric heaters are powered, contro-

lled and protected by the control unit.

Connection of EO, EOS and EOSX heaters to thecontrol unit is shown in gures 6 and 7.

230/400 V, 50Hz

(CYKY according to table, page 5, column "Feeder")

24 V = (JYTY 2 x 0,5)

24 V =

(JYTY according to table, page 5, column "TK")

24 V = (not used with EO heaters)

(JYTY according to table, page 5, column "Control")

Control

Table 3 -Types of control

Figure 7 - Example of heater connection (WBC unit)

The control unit must be congured for each type of control!

vcb

Basic Differences in Control

EO Heaters

The ON/OFF control of the heater's output is used for both units in a basic EO heater arrangement with a con-

trol unit, while the full output rate is connected upon anyrequest for heating output (see gure # 8A).Heating output is switched by the contactor in a control

unit. Taking into account the type of switching (by thecontactor) it is advisable to use EO heaters especiallyfor applications not too demanding for switching.

EOS Heaters

The ON/OFF control of the heater's output is used for both units in a basic EOS heater arrangement with acontrol unit, while the full output rate is connected upon

any request for heating output (see gure # 8A).

The control unit can be optionally congured for a pul-se functioning mode of width modulation (PV currentvalve). If this is the case, the heating output will befed precisely in accordance with the request from the

control unit, which will always switch the full output for a

short time period. The switching interval is 4 seconds.

EOSX Heaters

The design of EOSX electric heaters uses sequentialswitching of individual sections. The control unit swit-

ches individual sections of the EOSX heater accordingto requests of the heating mode (see gure # 8C).These heaters can be judged as more favourable as far

as stability of the mains is considered. (3



Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

30,0

7,5

22,5

0

15,0

30,0

7,5

22,5

0

15,0

30,0

7,5

22,5

0

15,0

100

25

75

0

50

A r e a o f

p r o p o r t i o n a l i t y

O u t l e

t a i r t e

m p e r a

t u r e

Current required temperatureta

ta

- P

Time T

T e m p

e r a t u r e t ( o C )

R e q u i r e d o u t p u t ( % )

C o n n e c t e d i n p u t ( k W )

C o n n e c t e d i n p u t ( k W )

C o n n e

c t e d i n p u t ( k W )

Time T

A n a l o g u e c o n t r o l s i g n a l f r o m t h e c o n t r o l u n i t

10 V

7,5 V

5 V

2,5 V

0 V

Time T

Time T

Time T

Temperature course

Schematic diagram of thetemperature course in the

duct behind the electric

heater.

Required output

Schematic diagram of thecourse of the control unit's

request for the heating out-

put. The request is repre-

sented by the value of the

control voltage in the range

0 - 10V.

Control within the area of proportionality

Control C

Control A

Control ATwo-step ON/OFF control. Electrical input is connected bysteps (see gure # 8A), however, heating output has a con-

tinuous course because of thermal inertia.

Control BTwo-step control using pulse width modulation. Electrical

input is connected by pulses with continuous change of the

switching time within a constant time period of 4 seconds

(see gure # 8). The switching time, i.e. aliquot part of thetime period of 4 seconds, is proportionate to the requestfor heating output. Output distribution is controlled an

electronic module inside the control unit (the so-called PV

current valve). Providing the output is properly dimensionedand the control pressure data points of the control unit areproperly set, the uctuation of the outlet temperature behindthe heater will be within ± 0.5 °C. Control mode B is suitablefor installations requiring minimum uctuation of the outlettemperature.

Control C

Cascade type of control by switching individual sections of the heater. Electrical input is connected gradually by casca-des of the particular EOSX heater according to the requestfor heating output (see gure # 8). This type of control isespecially suitable for installations requiring distribution of

the electrical input due to loading of the mains.

Control B

Control

Figure 8 - Simplied model of switching (control) of electric heaters depending on the temperature course (4

(4 (4 This example shows only a simplied model.



Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Installation

EO, EOS and EOSX electric heaters, including other Vento elements and equipment, are not intended, dueto their concept, for direct sale to end customers. Eachinstallation must be performed in accordance with a

professional project created by a qualied air-handlingdesigner who is responsible for proper selection of theheater and accessories.The heater must be checked carefully before its in-stallation, especially if it was stored for a longer time. Itis necessary to check parts for damage, and in particu-lar, whether the heating rods, thermal fuses, insulationof conductors, terminals, etc are in good condition.The heaters can operate in any position except theposition with the wiring distribution box directed down-wards.The heater must be installed so that the prescribedair ow direction through the heater is retained. The

prescribed air ow direction is marked on the terminalbox with an arrow. The correct air ow direction canalso be determined according to the position of the alu-minium cooler, which must be situated in cold air ow(in front of the heating rods).There is no need for individual suspensions to installthe electric heaters. They can be inserted into the ductline, but they must not be exposed to any strain or torsi-on caused by the connected duct line.The heaters must be situated at a safe distance fromammable or easily inammable materials. The locationof the heater must allow free space for heater surfacecooling.

It is necessary to keep easy access to the heater,especially to its wiring distribution box.Before installation, paste up to +100 °C heat resi-stant sealing onto the connecting ange facing the hea-ter.Heaters with dimensions up to 80-50 mm are conne-cted to the air-handling duct by 20 mm wide bar an-ges and four M8 screws on each ange. Heaters withdimensions up to 90-50 mm are connected to the air --handling duct by 30 mm wide bar anges and four M10screws on each ange. To brace the anges with a sidelonger than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them in themiddle with another screw clamp which prevents angebar gapping.The lid of the wiring distribution box of heaters up to30 kW is xed with four M4 screws, while the lid of thewiring distribution box of 45 kW heaters is xed with sixM4 screws.It is necessary to ensure conductive connection of the ange using fan-washers placed on both sides, atleast on one ange connection.The electric heater output must be automaticallycontrolled. REMAK units are recommended to supply,control and protect electric heaters.

Wiring and Commissioning

The installation of the heater must be performed inaccordance with the project and catalogue (respectivelyInstallation Manual). The installation and commissioningcan be performed only by a company specialized in wi-ring and licensed in accordance with valid regulations.

For the wiring diagrams of terminals of electric hea-ters, refer to page 154.The wiring must be checked before putting the devi-ce into operation.Before putting the device into operation, all the

checks and settings must be performed in accordancewith the Service Manual. The Service Manual (providedby the manufacturer) includes a detailed descriptionof steps to activate the device and to perform regular inspections. Results of inspections are recorded in therecord sheet inserted into the Service Manual.Proper functioning of the protective and emergencythermostats connection must be checked before com-missioning the electric heater. When the circuit of theemergency thermostats is disconnected, the controlunit must disconnect the power supply to the heater power circuit, and signal failure of the heater due tooverheating.

The EOSX heaters are controlled by a voltage of 10-40V/DC from the control unit. When connecting the he-ater, it is necessary to observe the proper polarity - theheater Q14 terminal (+). If the polarity is reversed, theheater will not heat.The control voltage of the EOSX heater is led throu-gh a limiting thermostat with a switching point of +45°C, which is situated on the cooler of the SSR switchingrelays.The heater is provided with two emergency thermo-stats adjusted to +80 °C (5. The thermostats are conne-

cted to terminals E3 and GE.

Installation, Service and Maintenance

TroubleshootingWhen you start the air-handling system for the rst time,you could face an undesirable situation. The followingtext includes the most common problems and their causes:

Permanently low output air temperature• Too low a temperature was set on the control unit.• Too low heater output for the given air ow and ∆T.• Incorrect connection (polarity) of Q14, GC terminals.• The limiting thermostat is defective.• The electric heater's control circuit has been disconnected. Permanently high output air temperature• Too high a temperature was set on the control unit.

• The SSR switching relay is defective. The output air temperature fuctuates• Too high EO or EOS heater output for the given air ow and∆T. As far as the control quality is concerned, higher temperatureuctuation can be expected with EO and EOS heaters conne-cted to the control unit than with EOSX or EOS heaters equi-pped with a current valve

Repeated activation of emergency temperatureprotection• No air ow due to incorrect installation.• Failure of the emergency thermostat.• The emergency circuit has been disconnected.• The SSR switching relay is defectiveThe above-mentioned failures, which repeatedly activate ther-mal protection, are serious and must be removed immediately.

(5 First thermostat is adjusted to +80 °C. The second one can beadjusted in a range of +50 °C to +90 °C; factory default setting is +80°C. If a change in temperature is required, it is advisable to use onlythe range +50 °C to +80 °C (table 6, page 119).



Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Table 5 - Protecting thermostats

Table 4 - Switching options


For basic electrical parameters and recommended ca-

bles to connect the electric heaters to the control unit,

refer to Table 6 on page 150. The markings used in thistable have the following meaning:

Feeder - Power supply of the heater TK - Protecting thermo-contact circuitControl - Control and governing circuit(s)

The heater supply cables must be dimensioned in

accordance with valid technical standards, and the

maximum current, cable bedding and length must also

be taken into account. The cable sections are valid for CYKY cables, type of cable bedding: B, C, E in air atambient temperature up to +30 °C (ČSN 33 2000-5-523, resp. IEC 364-5-523).The cables are led through grommets into the wiring

distribution box, which is an integral part of the heater.

Inside the wiring distribution box, the cables are inter-connected with inner wiring using screw-free clip termi-

nals.

The heating rods of all heaters are designed for

230V voltage.The heaters are provided with two-stage thermal

protection with two stand-alone thermostats (for details,refer to the chapter "Thermal Protection").Simpler and cheaper heaters in the EO product line,designed for less demanding conditions, are switched

by the contactor directly in the control unit.

(8 For detailed description of blocking of individual controller'sstages, refer to the section concerning TRN output controllers.

EOS and EOSX heaters are switched by electronicnon-contact SSR (Solid State Relay) switching relayswhich are characterized by long service life (indenitenumber of closures compared to contactors), low input(15 mW) to switch output rates in kW's, switching at

zero voltage, abatable nuisance, without sparking, op-tically separated input and output (dielectric strength of 4 kV). Possible methods of control are described in aseparate section..

Thermal Protection

Generally, if the electric heaters are not properly pro-

tected and controlled, they can be dangerous. Aside

from electrical protection, attention must also be paid to

thermal protection. When creating the project layout, werecommend observing the following principles:The electric heater output must be automatically

controlled

(6

.The operation of the heater must be blocked if thefan is out of operation for any reason, or the speed of

the air ow falls below the accepted level.(6

(6 This function must be ensured by the control unit(7 This function is normally ensured by the control unit in association

with a P33N differential switch is situated of the lter

Either the air-handling device is switched off manua-

lly or automatically the heater must be switched off rst,and then with time delay sufcient for heater cooling,the dampers can be closed and the fan switched off (6. An air lter must be placed at a sufcient distance in

front of the heater. Without an air lter, there is a danger of the heating rods fouling and being damaged due to

insufcient cooling. Sufcient protection can be ensuredby a KFD lter with a lter insert.Gradual lter fouling causes a reduction in the air ow rate.Therefore, it is necessary to monitor the lter conditionvia the differential pressure sensor, and change the l-ter insert in time (7.

The speed of the air ow in the electric heater should not fall below 1 - 2 meters per second. If theoutput of the fan is controlled by the TRN controller, it

is possible to block the lower stages of the controller sothat the speed of the air ow will not fall below the limitvalue (8.

As a consequence of breakdown or failing to observeany of the above-mentioned recommendations, an

emergency situation could occur due to overheating.

Complex and system protection can be ensured by pr-

oper connection of the electric heater to the control unit.

As standard, all heaters are equipped with stand-alone

thermal limiters in accordance with the ČSN 33 2000-4-42 (IEC 364-4-42) standards. The thermal limiters (ther -mostats) in cooperation with a control unit permanentlyprevent the limit temperature in the air-duct and in the

wire distribution box from being exceeded ( table # 5).

Basic (emergency) thermal protection

Thermal protection of all electric heaters is ensured

by two emergency thermostats connected into a serial

loop. The thermostats are adjusted in production to+80oC; one reads the temperature among the heatingrods while the other reads the temperature inside the

wiring distribution box. If the thermo-contact in the loop

trips (due to the heater overheating), the power supplyof the electric heater must be disconnected. (6

Extended thermal protection

The thermal protection of EOS and EOSX electric hea-

ters is extended by a protective SSR circuit. The tempe-

rature of the cooler of the SSR switching relays is readby the third protective thermostat set to a switching po-

int of +45 °C. When this temperature is exceeded, thecontrol signal to SSR is interrupted. After cooling down,the thermostat will automatically switch the control cir-

cuit, while the fans work without stopping all the time.




Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

E O

E O S

E O S X

Table 6 - Basic electrical parameters




Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Power supplyControl and signalling of emergency failure

Adjustable limiting thermostatProtective conductor terminalSSR switching relay with varistorsNeutral bus bar Ground screwInterconnecting bus bar of heating blocks

EOS... / 3

EO... / 3–45

View into the EOS 50-30/15 wiring boxafter removing the protecting cover

(switching relays are not included)

EOS... / 4–15 (one single-phase SSR switching relay is included)

(two single-phase SSR switching relays are included)

View into the EOS 30-15/3 wiring box after removingthe protecting cover.

The EOS 70-40/30 heater's wiring box - protecting cover removed

Pohled ve směru proudění vzduchu

Cooler

of SSR relays View into the EOS 70-40/30 heater's wiring box

EOS... /22 – 45

EOSX .../12 – 45(two or three three-phase SSR switching relays are included)

During operation, the heater must be checked for surface cleanness, surface temperature, and the conne-

cted cables for damage.

It is necessary to inspect the proper switching func-

tions of protective devices. If the air-handling device

is stopped by the emergency system due to heater overheating, it is necessary to nd and remove the failu-

re following the respective installation manual.


Figure 9 - Location of the switches' cooler

Figure 10 - View into the EO wiring box

Figure 13 - EOSX heater wiring box

Figure 11 - Wiring boxes of EOS heater

Figure 12 - EOS heater wiring box - cover removed

Figure 14 - Wiring box after removing the cover


The electric heater needs to be regularly checked atleast at the beginning of each heating season in the

scope of the service inspection.



Electric heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Wiring diagrams

El. heater

EO

El. heater

EOS

El. heater

EO

El. heater

EOS

El. heater EOSX

El. heater

EOSX

El. heater EOSX

El. heater

EOSX

N

- Neutral conductor U, V, W

- Power supply terminals

3 x 400V/50Hz

PE

- Protective conductor terminal

G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

N

- Neutral conductor U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

GC, Q14

- control signal 10-40V/

DC (+ Q14)

G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

GC, Q14

- control signal 10-40V/

DC (+ Q14)

N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

N

- Neutral conductor

U, V, W


3 x 400V/50Hz

PE


G3, E3

- thermo-contacts

max. 230V/1A

GC, Q14

- control signal 10-40V/DC(+Q14)

Q31

- 1st section switching (-Q31)

Q32

- 2nd section switching (-Q32)

GC, Q14


Q31

- 1st section switching (-Q31)Q32


GC, Q14


Q31

- 1st section switching (-Q31)Q32


EO

Type SizeOutput [kW]

EO


EOS


EOS


EOSX


EOSX


EOSX


EOSX




Electric heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Applications of water heaters

Hot-water heaters are intended for air heating, from

simple venting installations to sophisticated air-handling



other components of the Vento modular system which

ensure inter-compatibility and balanced parameters.

Operating conditions

The heated air must be free of solid, brous, sticky andaggressive impurities. The heated air must also be free

of corrosive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to alu-

minium, copper and/or zinc.

Maximum allowed operating parameters of heating wa-

ter:

Max. allowed water temperature ...............+130 °C

Max. allowed water pressure .....................1,6 MPa

Performance properties of water heaters for common

values of water temperature gradients, various air owrates and inlet air temperatures for water as a heat-

-transfer agent are included in nomograms in the data

section of this catalogue.

Dimensional Range

VO water heaters are ma-

nufactured in a range of

ten sizes according to the

A x B dimensions of the

connecting ange (seegure # 1). Single, twoand three-row heaters

are available for all sizes

(except for sizes 30-15and 40-20 - only two and

three-row heaters).Water heaters can be

connected to air ducts

in the same way as any

other Vento duct system

component. Connections

of all water heaters to the

heating water supply aremaximally standardized.

These heaters enable

designers to cover the full

air ow range of Ventofans.

Poloha a umístění

When projecting the layout of the heater location, we

recommend observing the following principles:

If water is used as the heating medium, the heater

can be situated only in an indoor environment where

the temperature is maintained above freezing point (thisdoes not apply to heated air during operation).Outdoor installation is allowed only if an antifreeze

solution is used as the heating medium (mostly ethyle-

(1 For instructions, refer to the section Installation, Maintenance and Service.

ne glycol solution). In this case, the actual heater's pa-

rameters must be calculated using AeroCAD software.

Water heaters can work in any position in which air venting of the heater is possible. (1

Free access to the heater must be ensured to ena-

ble control and service. An air lter must be installed in front of the heater toavoid its fouling.

The counter-current connection of the heater is nee-

ded to achieve maximum output.

The heater can be situated either in front of or be-

hind the fan. However, if the heater is in front of the fan,

the heater output must be controlled so that the air tem-

perature will not exceed the maximum allowed value for

the given fan.

If the heater is situated behind the fan, we reco-

mmend inserting between the fan and the heater a

spacer (e.g. 1-1.5 m long straight duct) to steady the air ow.


The external casing of the heaters is made of galvani-

zed steel sheets. The headers are made of welded ste-

el pipes and nished with a synthetic coating. The heatexchange surface is created by 0.1 mm thick aluminiumoverlapping ns pulled on copper pipes of Ć 9.52 mm(3/8"). As standard, VO heaters are manufactured intwo-row versions with shifted geometry (ST 25 x 22mm).

All used materials are carefully checked so they ensurelong service life and reliability. All heaters are tested

under water for leakage using pressurised air of 2 MPafor ve minutes.

Heater's casing

Fins (Al) on pipes (Cu)

Headers (tube head)

Header Connections

Sumps are situated on bothsides of the headers.

- for NS 130 sensor - for TACO valve

…2R - two-row

…3R - three-row

A x B dimensions

Water heater

VO 50-30 / 3R

Figure 1 - Dimensions

Figure 3 - Designation of Heaters


Figure 2 - Heater's design

400-200

500-250

40-20

50-25

500-300 50-30

600-300 60-30

60-35

700-400 70-40

80-50800-500

300-150 30-15

A x B [mm]

90-50900-500

100-501000-500



Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Designation of Heaters

The type designation of heaters in projects and orders

is dened by the key in gure # 3.The heater's output is only valid for the selected opera-

ting conditions. Selected (i.e. nominal) operating condi-

tions are specied by the air ow rate at air ow velocityof 3.7 m/s, inlet air temperature of -15 °C and heatingwater operating temperature gradient of +90 °C / +70°C. Nominal operating conditions are included in the no-

mograms (according to the number) as an example. Accessories like self-air venting TACO valve, SUMX mi-xing set and NS 130R anti-freeze sensor featuring shorttime constant (resp. other sensors) can be delivered. Accessories are not included in the heater delivery so

must be ordered separately.

Air-Venting of the Heater

To ensure proper operation of the heater, it is necessaryto install reliable air-venting, the best being automatic.

The TACO automatic air-venting valve with outer G1/2"thread is designed to be screwed directly into the heater

header pipe. It must be installed on the very top of both

header pipes.(2 Thanks to its small dimensions, it is sui-table when using the heater just below the ceiling.

Antifreeze Protection

Antifreeze protection of the heater is created by com-

prehensive interconnected equipment preventing fre-

ezing of the heater in normal operating conditions. To

ensure safety of the assembly, it is advisable to use

proven Vento components, the choice of which depends

on the particular device and the selected control unit.

As standard, the antifreeze protection consists of:

– Control unit

– NS 130R water temperature sensors, NS 120

air temperature sensors and optionally a capillary

probe

– Inlet air damper controlled by the safety actuator

– Mixing Set

A particular conguration of the antifreeze protectioncan be specied using the catalogue of control units,respectively using AeroCAD software, available from

REMAK or their distributors.

1 VO Water heater 2 TACO air-venting valve

3 NS 130R antifreeze sensor

SUMX Mixing Set Components::4 Corrosion-proof connecting hoses

5 Circulation pump

6 Actuated ESBE three-way control valve

Technické informace

Figure 4 - Heater with a mixing set

(2 For instructions, refer to the section Installation, Maintenance and

Service

Dimensions and weightsFor important dimensions and weights (without water lling) of heaters, refer to gure # 5 and table # 1.The connection for the heating water is provided with

G 1" outer thread which is used for all heater sizes.Connections for TACO valves and NS 130 sensor areprovided with G1/2" inner thread.

Tabulka 1 – souvztažnost napětí a stupňů regulaceTable 1 - Dimensions of water heaters

Water

outlet

Water inlet



Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

(3 The air pressure loss for all heaters can be determined from the

nomogram. As the design of the heaters is standardized, the pressure

loss only depends on the air ow velocity through the heater. Thenomogram also includes air ow rate - velocity conversion curves for all heater sizes.

(4 The nomograms cannot be used to determine the maximum

calculated output and water discharge because value ∆ tW

= 20K isgiven for the xed heating water temperature gradients.

Heater Dimensioning

For nomograms showing the thermodynamic correlation

for each heater, refer to pages 157-174. All necessarynal parameters of the heater corresponding to the per -

formance job can be obtained from the nomograms.Required default parameters

- Selected heater's size- Air ow rate (velocity in the cross-section)- Calculated inlet air temperature

- Calculated water temperature gradient

Determined fnal parameters

- Outlet air temperature

- Heater's output- Required water discharge- Water pressure loss

- Air pressure loss (3

Heater Dimensioning Procedure

Outlet air temperature behind the heater for requi-

red default parameters can be determined from

the nomograms.

If the outlet air temperature is the same or higher than the required temperature, the heater complies with

the performance job.

Maximum output of the heater , maximum water

discharge and water pressure loss at maximum

discharge for the required default parameters

can also be determined from the nomograms.(4

A suitable mixing set for water discharge and pre-

ssure loss at the given discharge can be determined

following the procedure included in the section SUMXMixing Sets.The heater's pressure loss at the given air ow ratefor calculation of the assembly pressure loss balance

needed for the fan selection can be obtained from the

nomogram on page 174.

Parameters

Figure 5 - Dimensions of VO water heaters (type designation corresponds with table # 1)

Dimensional range 30-15 to 80-50

Dimensional range 90-50 to 100-50

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø



t2

– Outlet air temperature behind the heater (°C) →

V – air ow rate (m3/h) →

v – Air ow velocity in the heater (m/s) →

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw

– Water ow through the heater (m3/h) →

∆ p w

– W a

t e r p r e s s u r e

l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →

Q – Output (kW) →

159

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Cu/Al water heater 300 x 150 mm

5

2

1

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

Nomogram of thermodynamic characteristics

Air ow rate - Inlet air temperature - Water temperature gradientOutlet air temperature - Output - Water discharge and pressure loss

Example: At the selected air ow rate of 300 m3/h, the velocity of the

air ow through the 30-15/2R heater will be 1.85 m/s.For the selected air ow rate (speed) at inlet air temperature in

front of the heater of -15 °C‚ and heating water temperature

gradient of +90/+70 °C, the outlet air temperature behind the

heater will be +31.2 °C.

Heater output of 5.3 kW comports with the selected air owrate (speed) at the inlet air temperature in front of the heater

and the same water temperature gradient; while the requi-

red water discharge will be 0.23 m3/h at water pressure loss

in a heater of 0.8 kPa.

Values in the nomogram can be interpolated and extrapolated.

3

31,2

7

10

0,8

8 0 / 6

0

VO 30-15/2R

5,3

Nomogram 1

9

0,23

8

4

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0

6



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →

Q – Output (kW)→

160

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


1

Nomogram termodynamických závislostíprůtok vzduchu - vstupní teplota vzduchu - Temperature drop

výstupní teplota vzduchu - výkon - množství a tlaková ztráta vody

Example:

At the selected air ow rate of 1066 m3/h, the velocity of the

air ow through the 30-15/2R heater will be 3,7 m/s.

For the selected air ow rate (speed) at inlet air temperature in



heater will be +21,6 °C.

Heater output of 13,1 kW comports with the selected air owrate (speed) at the inlet air temperature in front of the heater


red water discharge will be 0,65 m3/h at water pressure loss

in a heater of 2,27 kPa.


5

2

3

4

21,6

6

108

9

VO 40-20/2R

7

Nomogram 2

13,1

2,27

0,65

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

8 0 / 6

0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1

1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


161

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1



5

2

3

4

30,1

8

1,03

VO 50-25/2R

23,2

Nomogram 3

7

6

10

9

3,76

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5

08 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0 6 0 / 4 0

1 3 0 / 1 1

0

1

1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0


air ow through the 30-15/2R heater will be 3,7 m/s.For the selected air ow rate (speed) at inlet air temperature in











t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


162

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


1








Heater output of 28 kW comports with the selected air owrate (speed) at the inlet air temperature in front of the heater





5

2

4

22,3

6

7

8

9

VO 50-30/2R

28

Nomogram 4

1,23

10 3,6

3

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

8 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0 6 0 / 4 0

1 3 0 / 1 1

0

1 1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


163

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1







heater will be +23 °C.






8

2

3

4

23

5

7

9

10 6,1

6

VO 60-30/2R

33,7

Nomogram 5

1,55

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5

0

8 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

6 0 / 4 0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


164

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

VO 60-35/2R Cu/Al water heater 600 x 350 mm

1













5

2

3

4

22,9

6

7

8 10

9

1,80

40

Nomogram 6

5,9

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5

08 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0 6 0 / 4 0

1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1 1 0 / 7 0 8

0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


165

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1













5

8

9

2,34

3

4

23,5

6

7

8,7

53,8

Nomogram 7

10

2

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

8 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0 6 0 / 4 0

1 3 0 / 1

1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

8

0 / 6 0

7

0 / 5 0

6

0 / 4 0

9

0 / 7

0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


166

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .














21,9

4

1

2

3

5

6

7

8 10

9

78,3

Nomogram 8

12,2

3,44

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

8 0 / 6

0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0 6 0 / 4 0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


167

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1











in a heater of 19 kPa.


5

8

9

4,15

3

4

24,2

6

7

19,0

92,7

Nomogram 9

10

2

9 0 / 7

0

1 1 0 / 9 0

7 0 / 5 0

8 0 / 6 0

T e m p e

r a t u

r e d r o p 1 3 0 / 1

1 0

6 0 / 4 0

1 3

0 / 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7

0 8 0 / 6 0

7 0 / 5 0

6 0 / 4 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


168

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .














32,2

4

1

2

3

5

6

7

810

9

20,5

Nomogram 10

5

0,91

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1

3 0 / 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


169

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1













5

8

9

1,43

3

4

37,3

6

7

8,5

32,5

Nomogram 11

10

2

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


170

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .














37,8

4

1

2

3

5

6

7

810

9

37

Nomogram 12

18

1,7

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1

3 0 / 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


171

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1













5

8

9

2,1

3

4

39,9

6

7

47,4

Nomogram 13

10

2

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0

9,6



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


172

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .














38,2

4

1

2

3

5 6

7

8 10

9

55,5

Nomogram 14

12,7

2,48

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1

3 0 / 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


173

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1













5

8

9

3,33

3

4

38,3

6

7

18,5

74,2

Nomogram 15

10

2

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u

r e d r o p 1 3 0 / 1

1 0

1 3 0 / 1

1 0

1 1

0 / 7 0

9

0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 –

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C ) ←

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


174

Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .














38,7

4

1

2

3

5 6

7

810

9

107

Nomogram 16

25,9

4,77

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u

r e d r o p 1 3 0 / 1

1 0

1 3 0

/ 1 1 0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



t2




t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

t 1 -

I n l e t a

i r t e m p e r a

t u r e

( ° C )

qw


∆ p w

– W a


l o s s a

t w a

t e r s

i d e

( k P a

) →


175

Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


1













5

8

9

5,43

3

4

39,5

6

7

41,5

122

Nomogram 12

10

2

9 0 / 7 0

1 1 0 / 9 0

T e m p e

r a t u r e

d r o p 1 3

0 / 1 1

0

1 3 0 / 1 1

0

1 1 0 / 7 0

9 0 / 7 0



Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

68

4500

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all VO heaters. For the selected air ow rate, the air ow velocity

in the free heater's cross-section‚ can be read in the lower graph, and then the corresponding heater's air

pressure loss at the known velocity can be determined in the upper part .

Example:

At an air ow rate of 4,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow in the VO 70-40 heater will be 4.46 m/s. The heater'sair pressure loss for VO 70-40/2R at the above-mentioned air ow rate will be 68 kPa.

∆ p - a i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P a ]

V - a

i r o w r a

t e

[ m 3 / h ]

V - a

i r o w r a

t e

[ m 3 / s ]

v - air ow velocity in the heater's cross-section [m/s]

1

2

3

5

Air Pressure Losses in VO Heaters

Nomogram of air pressure losses for all VO heaters

The curve of pressure losses is valid for all VO heaters. The air pressure loss depends on the air ow velocity,and it is calculated for the air velocity in a free cross section of all Vento system dimensional ranges.

4

S i z e o f

t h e

h e a t e r

v - velocity [m/s]4,46




Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Accessories

Heater Accessories

Water heaters in air-handling systems are reliable only

if completed with accessories which ensure the fo-

llowing essential functions:

Air-venting

Antifreeze protectionOutput control

Ideally, they should always be used along with accesso-

ries of the Vento system, which ensure inter-compatibili-

ty and balanced parameters.

Air-Venting of the Heater

The heater can be vented either manually or automa-

tically. With regard to the fact that the heater is mostly

installed in places difcult to access, at height or onceilings, automatic air-venting is a necessity. The TACO

automatic air-venting valve with outer G1/2" thread

(see g. #6) is designed to be screwed directly into theheater header pipe. It is installed on the very top of the

headers.(5

Max. allowed operating parameters of heating water:

Max. water operating temperature .115 °C (6

Max. water operating pressure .......0.85 MPa

Min. water operating pressure ........20 kPa

The valve must be installed in the vertical position or

aslant with its head upwards, respectively horizontally;

in no case downwards!

Minimum water pressure in the system ensures that

even if the pressure in the intake part of the mixing setdrops, the air-venting valve will not take up air into theoutlet heater header pipe.

Warning!

The following antifreeze solutions can be used as hea-

ting media:

– water plus ethylenglycol (Antifrogen N) – water plus 1,2-propylenglycol (Antifrogen L)

They enable the freezing temperature of the heating

media to be dropped depending on the solution concen-

tration.

Valve thread

Other antifreeze agents can be used only upon presen-

ting conrmation from the manufacturer on their compa-

tibility with swelling materials (inserts).

Antifreeze Protection Accessories

Antifreeze protection of the heater is created by com-prehensive interconnected equipment preventing free-

zing of the heater in normal operating conditions. The

section only includes devices which are directly connec-

ted to or associated with the heater.

Temperature Sensors for Control Units

The temperature of the water owing through the heater must be continuously measured and evaluated by the

control unit. The NS 130R sensor (resistance Ni 1000),which is equipped with an action reading element

situated in the casing made of stainless steel - class 17

248, is used to measure the water temperature.

The casing is provided with G1/2" outer thread, and itis intended for direct mounting into the bottom hole in

the heater's header for return water (after removing theblinding plug from the header).

Valve head

NS 130R NS 120

NS 130Rsensor casing

Figure 6 - TACO air-venting valve

(5 For detailed instructions, refer to the section Installation,

Maintenance and Service. (6 If the heating water temperature for the water heater operation is

+116 °C or higher, it will be necessary to ensure air-venting by a oatvalve.

Figure 7 - Types of temperature sensors



Water Heaters

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

A B C D

Installation

VO heaters and mixing sets, as well as other Vento

elements and equipment, are not intended, due to their

concept, for direct sale to end customers. Each installa-

tion must be performed in accordance with a professio-

nal project created by a qualied air-handling designer who is responsible for proper selection of the heater and

accessories. The installation and commissioning can

be performed only by a specialized installer company

licensed in accordance with valid regulations (if wiring isneeded, specialized also in wiring).The heater must be checked carefully before itsinstallation, especially if it has been stored for a longer

time. It is necessary to check parts for damage, and inparticular whether the pipes, heater vanes and header

pipes, insulation of conductors of the mixing set pump

and actuator are in good condition.

If water is used as the heating medium, the heater can then be situated only in an indoor environment whe-

re the temperature is maintained above freezing point

(this does not apply for heated air).Outdoor use is not recommended. It is allowed only

if antifreeze solution is used as the heating medium

(mostly ethylene glycol solution at a concentration corre-

sponding to the temperatures).

VO Water Heaters

There is no need for individual suspensions to install

the water heaters. The heater can be inserted into the

duct line, but it must not be exposed to any strain or tor-

sion caused by the connected duct line.Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing onto

the connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento system, use galvanized M8 screws andnuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive connection

of the ange using fan-washers placed on both sidesat least on one ange connection, or use Cu conductor wiring.

To brace the anges with a side longer than 40 cm, itis advisable to connect them in the middle with another

screw clamp which prevents ange bar gapping.Water heaters can work in any position in which air

venting of the heater is possible. The most common

heater positions are shown in gure #12. Positions A, Band C show the most suitable places for the TACO air-

-venting valve mounting (marked with arrows). PositionD shows impermissible installation of the heater as it

does not allow air venting.

The TACO air-venting valves must be installed as

shown in gure #9, i.e. vertically (upright) with their heads up - view A, or horizontally - view - B; in no case

downwards or slanted with their heads down - C, D.

The TACO air-venting valves must be mounted ontothe highest point of the inlet/outlet header pipe (see g.# 10). The openings in the header pipes have G1/2"inner thread and were closed with plugs in the plant.

Figure 9 - TACO valve positions

Figure 10 - TACO valve installation

TACO valves

Outlet water header

Mixing set

Inlet water header

NS 130R casing

Header's plug

NS 130R sensor cable

Water inlet

Water outlet

The casing of the antifreeze protection NS 130 sen-

sor can be mounted on the bottom side of the header

pipe.

To allow faster air venting while lling the system

with water, loosen the knurled screw on the TACO valveby one or two turns. After nishing the lling of the sys -

tem, tighten the knurled screw rmly. The valve will thenwork automatically.During the rst air venting, a couple of water dropscan leak through the air-venting valve. This will nothappen again during normal operating conditions.

When cleaning the TACO valve inside, it is nece-

ssary to replace the swelling rings (valve inserts). TheTACO valve is equipped with a back valve so there isno need to drain the heater.

When connecting the mixing set hoses, thermal sen-

sor NS 130 casing, or air-venting valve, be careful. Donot use excessive force, otherwise the pipes situated

between the header pipes and sidewall of the heater

could be damaged.

An air lter must always be placed in front of the he-

ater to avoid heater fouling.


Figure 8 - Heater's positions

DC

BA



Water Heaters

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

The heater can be situated either in front of or be-

hind the fan. However, if the heater is in front of the fan,

the heater output must be controlled so that the air tem-

perature will not exceed the maximum allowed value for

the given fan.

If the heater is situated behind the fan, we reco-mmend inserting a 1-1.5 m long straight duct betweenthe fan and the heater to calm the air ow down.The counter-current connection of the heater is nee-

ded to achieve maximum output (see g. # 11). All calculations and nomograms included in the section

"Water Heaters" are valid for the counter-current conne-

ction of the heaters. Such concurrent connection provi-des lower output, but it is more frost resistant. (7

The sophisticated design of the heaters enables you

to turn on one heater arbitrarily, and you will always be

able to arrange counter-current connection and install

the valves and thermal sensor in the right place.

(8

If the heater is covered by a ceiling, it is necessa-

ry to ensure access to the entire heater to enable

checking and service; especially air-venting valvesneed checking and maintenance.

(7 If the anti-freeze protection is correctly designed, the above-

mentioned feature of the concurrent connection is insignicant. (8 Therefore, only one version of the heaters is used in the Vento

system (no right or left versions).

A Counter-current

connection

B Concurrent

connection

W a t e r o u t l e t

W a t e r i n l e t

W a t e r i n l e t

W a t e r o u t l e t


Figure 11 - Water heater connection


The water heater requires regular maintenance at least

at the beginning and end of the heating season. During

operation, it is necessary to check proper air ventingand water leakages, respectively increasing pressure

losses in the water piping or air duct (due to fouling). Itis necessary to supervise pump and actuator operation,

and keep the mixing set's lters clean. If the air-handlingsystem is stopped due to the action of the antifreeze

protection, the reason must be found and removed fo-

llowing the procedure included in the Installation Manu-

al, in the section "Troubleshooting". All important system protection functions, including an-

tifreeze protection of the mixing sets and heaters, must

be permanently controlled by the control unit.

Attention! During the winter season, the control unit

must not be disconnected from the power supply

for too long! Power supply failure during air-hand-ling system operation is especially dangerous!

v z d u

c h v s t u

p



SUMX Mixing Sets

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Application of Mixing Sets

SUMX mixing sets ensure continuous output control

(proportional control using an analogue voltage signal

of 0-10 V) and protection of the water heater. Output

control is ensured by a change in the water output

temperature at constant water discharge. A mixing set

connected to the control unit and antifreeze protection

system components can effectively protect the heater

against freezing followed by its destruction. The below-

-mentioned information can also be suitably used for

integration of the mixing sets into a cooling system

equipped with a water heat exchanger.

Operating Conditions

The water running through the mixing set must not

contain impurities, solids or chemicals aggressive to

copper, brass, stainless steel, zinc, plastics, rubber or

cast iron.The heating system inlet branch must always be equi-

pped with a sludge and cleaning lter . The mixing set

must not be operated without this lter. Maximum allo-

wed operating parameters of heating water:

Maximum allowed water temperature ....... +110 °C

Max water pressure for SUMX 1–10 ...........0,8 MPa

Max water pressure for SUMX 16–25 ........ 0,3 MPa

Maximum water pressure for SUMX 28-90 . 0,6 MPa

For installations using hot water up to 130 °C, it is po-

ssible to use the so-called inverted (reverse) mixing set

conguration with a pump situated in the return water

branch to ensure the required water temperature of 110 °C in the heater outlet. The designation of the inver-

ted mixing set is SUMX..i.

Sealing of a corresponding quality must be used for the

installation. It is advisable to consult the manufacturer.

If water is used as the heating medium, the mixing

set can only be situated in an indoor environment where

the temperature never falls below freezing point.

Outdoor installation is acceptable only if glycol antifre-

eze solution is used as the heating medium. Salt brine

solutions are not recommended, see the chapter "Water

Heaters".

In applications in which it is necessary to avoid pri-

mary circuit water cooling or in applications in which itis necessary to avoid interference from the primary and

secondary circuit pumps (undesirable heating water

ow direction through the heater), it is possible to equip

the primary circuit with a bypass (respectively with a

thermo-hydraulic separator). The bypass should be si-

tuated as close as possible to the mixing set connection

point. The heating water bypassing increases the return

water temperature therefore, the bypass (thermo-hyd-

raulic separator) must not be used in association with

modern condensing boilers. The same applies if the

heating water supplier does not allow the cooled water

to be returned to the system. As the mixing set pump overcomes only the secondary

circuit (the heater circuit) pressure losses, the primary

circuit pump must be designed to cover all pressure

losses up to the mixing set at the nominal water dis-

charge which has been determined by the water heater

design.


Table 1 – Mixing Set Types

The primary circuit pump must not affect the mixing

set pump, i.e. the mixing set must not be loaded by the

pressure from the primary circuit. It is not advisable to

include other consumers in the heater's circuit. Further,

it is necessary to equip the primary circuit inlet and out-

let branch with ball closing valves and the inlet branchwith a sludge and cleaning lter (which should also be

separated by a closing valve).

The mixing set must not be operated without

a sludge and cleaning lter.

Components of the primary circuit are not the sub-

ject of the delivery from REMAK a.s.


When projecting the layout of the mixing set locati-

on, we recommend observing the following princi-

ples:

The mixing set must be mounted so that the shaft of the circular pump motor will always be in the horizontal

position!

The mixing set must be situated so that air-venting

will be possible.

If the mixing set is covered by a ceiling, it is nece-

ssary to ensure access to the entire mixing set to ena-

ble maintenance.

The mixing set is connected to the heater via corro-

sion-proof hoses while the ange assembly should be

mounted using standard heat-engineering techniques

as close as possible to the heater. It is advisable to

minimize the length of the hoses so that the control re-

sponse will not be unnecessarily delayed.The mixing set is mounted using an integrated hol-

der, respectively, tube clamps can be used, if necessa-

ry. The weight of the mixing set must never be transfe-

rred onto the heat exchanger. The ange-connected mi-

xing sets are delivered disassembled. The connecting

hoses are not included in the delivery.

Materials

Common heat-engineering materials and components

are used to manufacture the mixing set. The mixing sets

are made of brass, stainless steel, respectively, cast

iron and in smaller scale, of galvanized steel and steel.The sealing components are made of rubber or plastic.



SUMX Mixing Sets

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X

C o n

t r o l l e r s

. . .

E l . h e a

t e r s

E O . .

W a

t e r

h e a

t e r s

V O

M i x i n g s e

t s

S U M X

W a

t e r c o o

l e r s

C H V

D i r e c

t c o o

l e r s

C H F


H R V


. . .

Primary circuit (boiler) (Example of connection)Secondary circuit (heater)

Boiler

SUMX Mixing Set

SUMX Mixing Set Components:

1 Corrosion-proof connecting hoses (connecting pipes)

2 Hot water circulating pump

3 Three-way regulating and mixing valve4 Mixing valve actuator

VO heater

+


Figure 1 – Connecting scheme of the heater and mixing set in a heating system

Dimensional Range and Design

The mixing sets are delivered in 12 output types. Eight

of them are equipped with screw couplings including

connecting hoses, and four of them are equipped with

ange connections without connecting hoses. The

ange-connected mixing sets are delivered unassem-

bled. The connecting hoses are not included in the de-

livery.

B

A

a) Standard connection (mixing)

Ohřívač VO

B

b) Inverted connection (separation)

A

Mixing Set Type

The rate of ow and pressure of the heating, respective-

ly, cooling medium in the mixing set is given by the size

of the pump and three-way mixing valve with Kv value

from 1.0 to 90 according to table # 1.

The mixing set type selection and allocation to the he-ater is performed automatically by the AeroCAD design

software.


1 Corrosion-proof connecting hoses (connecting pipes)

2 Hot water circulating pump

3 Three-way regulating and mixing valve4 Mixing valve actuator

SUMX Mixing Set

VO heater

Primary circuit (boiler) (Example of connection)

Secondary circuit (heater)

Water

outlet

Water inlet

Water distrubutor

Water Header

Boiler circuitpump

Sludge andcleaning lter

C l o s i n

g

b a

l l v a l v

e s

O p

t i o n a

l e l e

m e n

t s

o f t h e

b y p

a s s

( t h e

t h e r m o -

h y

d r a u

l i c s p

l i t t e r )

Water

outlet

Water inlet

Water distrubutor

Water

Header

Boiler circuitpump

Sludge andcleaning lter

C l o s

i n g

b a

l l v a

l v e s

O p

t i o n a

l e

l e m

e n

t s

o f t h e

b y p a s s

( t h e

t h e r m o -

h y

d r a u

l i c s p l i

t t e r )

+

Boiler



SUMX Mixing Sets

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Dimensions andPerformance

The basic specications can

be found in pictures #3a to #4b

and in table #4. The types are

listed in table #1. The pump

and actuator specications and

electrical parameters are inclu-

ded in table #2 and #3.

.


Figure 4a – Basic layout of mixing sets

Figure 3a – Basic layout of mixing sets

Table 3 – actuator parameters

Figure 3b – Basic layout of mixing sets

Figure 4b – Basic layout of mixing sets

B

A

Table 4 – dimensions, weight

* ± 20 mm

Connecting tting is only used with mixing set sizes

28 and 60.

B

SUMX 2,5 (3) (i)

Pump speed1 / 2 / 3

Figure 2 – Type designation

Valve Kv1 to 90

Type and Design

SUMX

Inverted

connection

Mixing Set Designation

The type designation of mixing sets in projects and or-

ders is dened by the key in gure # 37.

The project must also include the pump speed, which

is set during the course of installation. The speed of the

pump is indicated in parenthesis behind the type code

of the mixing set.

A

Table 2 – pump parameters

Connecting hose, Circulation pump, Three-way

regulating valve, Valve actuator, Integrated holder

Connecting ttings, Circulation pump, Three-

-way regulating valve Valve actuator, T-Piece



SUMX Mixing Sets

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X

C o n

t r o l l e r s

. . .

E l . h e a

t e r s

E O . .

W a

t e r

h e a

t e r s

V O

M i x i n g s e

t s

S U M X

W a

t e r c o o

l e r s

C H V

D i r e c

t c o o

l e r s

C H F


H R V


. . .


Mixing Set Characteristicsand Dimensioning

The proper dimensioning of the mixing set is essential

for stepless control of the water heater. The mixing set

selection is critical for optimal operation of the heatingsystem.

The graph of each mixing set includes three characteri-

stics related to the pump speed (1), (2), (3). The mixing

set working characteristic is given by the correlation of

the mixing set water discharge (qw sum) and pressure

(Dpw sum) at the selected speed (revolutions) of the

pump.

The mixing set calculation and dimensioning is perfor-

med automatically by the AeroCAD design software.

The below-mentioned procedure is recommended if the

air-handling device is completely designed using the

AeroCAD design software.

Design of the VO and SUMX Assembly - Example

Input variables:

VO 60-35 water heater, Air ow rate 2.800 m3/h, Water

temperature gradient +90/+70 °C, Design outdoor air

temperature -15 °C, Required outlet air temperature

+22 °C.

∆pw 3CV

- tlaková ztráta třícestného ventilu (kPa) ∆pw 3CV

- tlaková ztráta třícestného ventilu (kPa)

Design and calculation:

Maximum outlet air temperature of +39 °C at output

of 40 kW and water discharge of 1.80 m3/h for pre-as-

signed air ow rate of 2.800 m3/h, heater input air tem-

perature of -15 °C and water temperature gradient of

+90/+70 °C can be determined in the VO 60-35 heater nomogram (the chapter Water heaters).

As the maximum outlet air temperature is higher

than the required temperature, the heater meets the

output condition with a margin.

To get the pre-assigned (lower) outlet air temperatu-

re, it is necessary to decrease the heater's output. The

adjusted output results from the output calculation for

the pre-assigned air temperature gradient -15/+22 °C:

Q = m*c*∆ t = (2800/3600*1.2)*1010*(22-(-15)) =

34.9kW

Water discharge of 1.56 m3/h needed for output of

35 kW (rounded 34.9 kW) can be determined in the VO60-35 / 2R heater nomogram on page # 162 or in the

aggregate graph valid for all heaters on page 143, and

the water pressure loss in the VO 60-35 / 2R heater will

be Dpw = 5 kPa.

The SUMX 4,0 (2) mixing set suits best for water dis-

charge of 1.56 m3/h at pressure loss of 5 kPa, see the

graph on page # 181.

The heater-mixing assembly effective working point

will lie on the SUMX 4,0 (2) curve with qw sum

= 1.65 m3/h and ∆pw sum = 6 kPa.

5

5

5

15

20

0

25

30

30

30

35

35

35

40

4 5 4 5

0 . 0 5

0.

0.1

0.

0.2

0.

0 . 3 5

S U M X 1 , 0 ( 1 )

S U M X 1 , 0 ( 2 )

S U M X 1 ,6 ( 2 )

S U M X 1 ,6 ( 3 )

S U M X 1 , 6 ( 1 )

S U M X 4 , 0 ( 2 )

S U M X 4 , 0 ( 1 )

∆ p

w S U M

- m i x i n g s e t s t a t i c p r e s s u r e ( k P a )

∆ p

w S U M


∆ p

w S U M


S U M X 4 ,0 ( 3 )

S U M X 1 , 0 ( 3 )

qw sum

- mixing set water ow (m3/h)

qw sum

- mixing set water ow (m3/h) qw sum


qw sum


S U M X 2 ,5 ( 2 )

S U M X 2 ,5 ( 1 )

∆ p

w S U M


S U M X 2 ,5 ( 3 )

SUMX 4,0

SUMX 1,6SUMX 1,0

SUMX 2,5



SUMX Mixing Sets

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


0.0 . 0 . .

10

6

5 5

5

10

3 0 3 0

30

3 5 3 5

35

4 5 4 5

5 0 5 0

45

4

14

7

15

5

18

8

20

6 97 108 119 121 0 1 311 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8

∆ p

w S U M

- s t a t i c k ý t l a k s m ě š o v a c í h o u z l u ( k P a )

qw sum


∆ p

w S U M


qw sum



∆ p

w S U M


S U M X 1 6 ( 1 )

S U M X 2 5 ( 1 )

∆ p

w S U M


qw sum


∆ p

w S U M


S U M X 2 8 ( 1 )

qw sum



S U M X 6 0 ( 1 )

S U M X 9 0 ( 1 )

∆ p

w S U M


∆ p

w S U M


∆ p

w S U M

- s t a t i c k ý t l a k s m ě š

o v a c í h o u z l u ( k P a )

qw sum


S U M X 1 0 ( 3 )

S U M X 1 0 ( 2 )

S U M X 1 0 ( 1 )

SUMX 10S U M X 6 ,3 ( 3 ) S U M X 6 , 3 ( 2 )

S U M X 6 , 3 ( 1 )

SUMX 6,3

S U M X 1 6 ( 3 ) S U M

X 1 6 ( 2 )

SUMX 16

qw sum


S U M X 4 4 ( 3 )

S U M X 4 4 ( 2 )

S U M X 4 4 ( 1 )

S U M X 9 0 ( 3 )

S U M X 9 0 ( 2 )

SUMX 44

SUMX 90

S U M X 2 8 ( 2 )

S U M X 2 8 ( 3 )

SUMX 28SUMX 28

S U M X 6 0 ( 2 )

S U M X 6 0 ( 3 )

SUMX 60

S U M X 2 5 ( 3 ) S U M X 2 5 ( 2 )

SUMX 25



SUMX Mixing Sets

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X

C o n

t r o l l e r s

. . .

E l . h e a

t e r s

E O . .

W a

t e r

h e a

t e r s

V O

M i x i n g s e

t s

S U M X

W a

t e r c o o

l e r s

C H V

D i r e c

t c o o

l e r s

C H F


H R V


. . .

Heater Output Control

Pump ensures the constant water ow (circulation)

through the water heater. Three-way mixing valve

controlled by actuator controls the heater's output

by mixing the return water from the heater and heating

water from the boiler. If the control system requires fulloutput of the heater, the water will ow in the so-called

big circuit, i.e. from the boiler through the heating wa-

ter distributor, sludge and cleaning lter, service and

closing valve, SUMX intake, three-way mixing valve

(only A direction), pump , water heater, SUMX water

outlet, service and closing valve in to the heating water

header. If full output of the is not required, three-way

valve will start letting through some quantity of the

water from the B direction, and thus decreasing the wa-

ter temperature owing through the heater. If no heating

output is required, the water will only circulate within the

heater circuit, i.e. three-way mixing valve will only letthe water through in the B direction. The same applies

for the inverted connection (distribution function of the

three-way valve).

Installation

SUMX 1-25 mixing sets are connected directly to the

heater via corrosion-proof hoses. If needed, the hoses

can be cut to the desired length before installation.

The mixing set must not be exposed to any strain or

torsion caused by the connected pipe line.


Figure 6View from below

Figure 7 – Exploded view of the mixing set

(1) Valve, (2) Pump, (3) T-piece, (4) making-up piece, (5) Sealing,

(6) Sealing, (7) Washer, (8) Nut, (9) Screw, (10) Actuator, (11) Pin,

(12) Fixing screw, (13) Adapter

Figure 5 – Installation using suspension rods

The mixing sets can be mounted on separate sus-

pensions using an integrated holder, or using clamps

(see gure # 5).

If the mixing set is covered by a ceiling, it is ne-

cessary to ensure access

to the entire mixing set to

enable electric cable conne-

ctions, checking and mainte-

nance.SUMX 28 - 90 ange-co-

nnected mixing sets can be

connected to heat exchan-

gers using standard heating

engineering procedures;

among others, it is nece-

ssary to ensure adaptation

to threaded connections of

the heat exchangers - refer to the heat exchanger tech-

nical details. It is advisable to use clamps to connect

the ange-connected mixing sets to the suspensions or

supporting brackets.The mixing set must be installed in such a way that

the air in the piping will be able to run to the air-venting

valves of the heater or boiler piping. Especially the co-

nnecting corrosion-proof hoses must be shaped after

installation so as not to create an air trap.

The mixing set must be positioned so that the shaft

of the circular pump will always be in the horizontal po-

sition!

The circular pump must be vented after the system

has been lled with water in accordance with the manu-

facturer's instructions.

The speed of the circular pump is indicated in the pro-

ject after the type designation of the mixing set. For

example, the mixing set SUM 6,3 (3) is equipped with

the pump UPS 25-60 which is set to speed 3, the num-

ber in parentheses (3). The speed of the pump can be

adjusted by the plastic wheel on the pump during in-

stallation (see gure # 6).

When connecting the mixing set, it is necessary to

check the correctness of the adjustment of the three-

-way valve and actuator. One way of the three-way

valve, to which the bevelled spot on the valve shaft po-

ints, is always closed (gure # 11 shows the three-way

valve's function).

reversed

set-up

standard



SUMX Mixing Sets

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

NS120

230 V, 50Hz (CYKY 3C x 1,5)

controlunit

NS120

SUM X

VO

NS 130R

NS 100

24 V ~, 0 –10 V= (CYSY 3B x 0,5)

24 V = (JYTY 2 x 0,5)

Figure 9 – Mixing set connection


Figure 8 – Mixing set wiring diagram

1 x 230V + PE + N

PE protective conductor terminal

N Neutral conductor

L Phase conductor

1....grounding conductor ( )

2....24 V AC / DC (+ ~)

3....control signal (Y)

5....measuring voltage

Wiring



The pump must be connected via the terminal box in

accordance with the manual. The actuator is equipped

with a cable which must be connected in a wiring box

(not included in the delivery).

The mixing set pump and actuator are supplied and

controlled by the control unit.

For the mixing set wiring diagram, refer to gure # 8.

The principle diagram of the mixing set connection

to the control unit is shown in gure # 9.

After connecting the mixing set, it is necessary to

check the correctness of the actuator function depen-

ding on the control signal (heating “ no heating).

After turning the pump on, it is necessary to measu-

re the feed current, which must not exceed the allowed

current Imax.

stated on the pump rating plate.

Figure 10 - Switching the actuator turning direction

Figure 11 – Three-way valve function

Standard connection

(mixing)

Inverted connection

(separation)

Actuator turning

direction

0% heating 50% heating 100% heating

From the heat

exchanger

To the heatexchanger

From the boiler

To the boiler

From the bypass

To the bypassBevelled spot on the valve shaft

Valve gate

The mixing sets are delivered unassembled, the mi-

xing set must be assembled following gure # 7.

If the actuator turns incorrectly, change the direction

of rotation by just turning switch S1 to the other positi-

on. The switch is accessible after removing the actua-

tor's cover, see g. # 10.

Pump

Actuator HTYD (HTY)

Pump connection Actuator connection



SUMX Mixing Sets

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X

C o n

t r o l l e r s

. . .

E l . h e a

t e r s

E O . .

W a

t e r

h e a

t e r s

V O

M i x i n g s e

t s

S U M X

W a

t e r c o o

l e r s

C H V

D i r e c

t c o o

l e r s

C H F


H R V


. . .


The mixing set requires regular maintenance at least

at the beginning and end of the heating season.

During operation, it is necessary to check the system

for proper air venting and water leakage. It is necessary

to supervise proper operation of the pump and actuator,and keep the lters in front of the mixing set clean. If

the air-handling system is stopped due to the action of

the antifreeze protection, the reason must be found and

removed, refer to the chapter "Troubleshooting".

All important system protection functions, including an-

tifreeze protection of the mixing sets and heaters, must

be permanently controlled by the control unit.

Attention! During the winter season, the control unit

must not be disconnected from the power supply

for too long! Power supply failure during air-hand-

ling system operation is especially dangerous!


Troubleshooting

When activating the air-handling system, you can face

some undesirable situations. The following text includes

the most common problems and their removal:

Permanently low output air temperature

- Low hot water ow or pressure in the boiler piping

- Low water temperature in the boiler piping

- Low air temperature adjusted on the control unit

- Low speed of the pump in the SUMX mixing set

- Clogged screen in the SUMX mixing set

- Wrong adjustment of the three-way valveand actuator

- Aerated pump (resp. whole system)

- Wrong design of the VO and SUMX assembly

Permanently high output air temperature

- Too high water ow and pressure in the boiler piping

- Too high air temperature adjusted on the control unit

- Wrong adjustment of the three-way valve

and actuator


The output air temperature uctuates

- Too high water ow and pressure in the boiler

- Wrong adjustment of the three-way valveand actuator


Repeated activation of an antifreeze protection

- Low hot water ow or pressure in the boiler piping

- Low water temperature in the boiler piping

- Low air temperature adjusted on the control unit


- Clogged screen of the SUMX mixing set

- Wrong adjustment of the three-way valve

and actuator

- Aerated pump (resp. whole system)


Repeated activation of the antifreeze protection can

also be caused by too high temperature amplitudes.

The reasons are listed in the paragraph above.

If the output water temperature is permanently above

+30°C, the problem can be caused by failure of the con-

trol system or sensor.



Water Coolers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


Designation of Coolers

The type designation of coolers in projects and orders is

dened by the key in gure # 3.

CHV

The above-mentioned specication without an ordering

code corresponds to the stock conguration of the pro-

duct, i.e. the three-row left-hand arrangement with a

drop eliminator. Any other conguration (e.g. without a

drop eliminator) must be specied by the ordering code.

The cooler is a congured product which should be

preferably ordered using AeroCAD software, which will

generate its ordering code.

60-30 / 3 L

Without drop eliminator

Side arrangement

L - Left-hand version

P - Right-hand version

Number of rows

2, 3

Dimensional Range

Water Cooler

– BE

Applications of Coolers

CHV water coolers are intended for air cooling, from

simple venting installations to sophisticated air-handling



other components of the Vento modular system, whichensure inter-compatibility and balanced parameters.


The cooled air must be free of solid, brous, sticky and

aggressive impurities. The heated air must also be free

of corrosive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to alu-

minium, copper and zinc.Maximum allowed operating

parameters of cooling water:

Maximum water operating pressure: 1,5 MPa

Performance properties of water coolers for common

values of water temperature gradients, various air ow

rates and inlet air temperatures for water as a heat --transfer agent are included in nomograms in the data

section of this catalogue.


When projecting the layout of the cooler location in the

air-handling system, we recommend observing the fo-

llowing principles:

If water is used as the cooling medium, the cooler

can then be situated only in an indoor environment

where the temperature is maintained above freezing po-

int (the main condition is to maintain the temperature of

the transported air).

Outdoor installation is allowed only if antifreeze so-

lution is used as the cooling medium (mostly ethylene-

-glycol solution). However, the temperature limit of the

used actuating mechanism of the mixing set must be

taken into account; and in this case, the below-mentio-

ned nomograms cannot be used when determining the

cooler's parameters. The calculation must be performed

using AeroCAD software.

Water coolers can work only in the horizontal positi-

on, in which condensate draining and air venting of the

cooler is possible.

Access to the cooler must be ensured to enable

checking and service. An air lter must be installed in front of the cooler to

avoid its fouling (providing it has not already been in-

stalled, e.g. in front of the heater).

The counter-current connection of the cooler is

essential to achieve maximum output.

The cooler can be situated either in front of or be-

hind the fan.

If the cooler is situated behind the fan, we reco-

mmend inserting a spacer (e.g. 1-1.5 m long straight

duct) between the fan and the cooler to steady the air

ow.

Materials and DesignThe external casing of the coolers is made of galvani-

zed steel sheets. The headers are made of welded ste-

el pipes and nished with a synthetic coating. The heat

exchange surface is created by 0.1 mm thick aluminium

overlapping ns pulled on copper pipes of φ10 mm.


All used materials are carefully checked so they ensure

long service life and reliability. All coolers are tested

under water for leakage using pressurised air at 2 MPa

for ve minutes.

As standard, the water coolers are delivered in a left-

-hand version, looking at the air ow direction, and are

equipped with a drop eliminator and an insulated con-

densate drainage tray.

In case of two-stage cooling, it is advisable to exclude

the drop eliminator (order the water cooler without a

drop eliminator).The water cooler is equipped with a TACO automatic

air-venting valve situated at the top of the headers,

which ensures progressive air-venting of the cooler.

Figure 2 - Standard design of the cooler

External casing,Cooler, Coolant inlet, Coolant out-

let,Drop eliminator, Tray for condensate, Condensate

drainage (G 1/2" )



Water Coolers

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Parameters

Cooler Accessories

Accessories like the TACO automatic air-venting valve

and SUMX mixing set can be delivered as an internal

part of the cooler. Accessories are not included in the

cooler delivery so must be specied and ordered sepa-

rately. Water coolers can be completed with accesso-ries which ensure the following essential functions:

Output control

CHV water coolers can be controlled using mixing sets,

refer to the section "Mixing Sets".

Condensate drainage (siphon)

The cooler must always be equipped with a siphon to

drain the condensate. Without the siphon, condensate

drainage from the collecting tray is not ensured. The

siphon can be replaced by a pump intended for con-

densate drainage.

For important dimensions and weights (without water

lling) of coolers, refer to gure # 4 and table # 1.

The connection for the heating water is provided with a

G1" outer thread.

Figure 4 - Dimensions of CHV Water Coolers

Table 1 - Dimensions of water coolers

Condensate DrainageThe cooler is equipped with a tray to collect condensa-

te; the tray is terminated with an outlet to connect the

condensate draining kit. The condensate draining kits

are available as optional accessories. The siphon hei-

ght depends on the total pressure of the fan, and ensu-

res its proper functioning. The siphon must be designed

depending on the fan pressure (see g # 5).

Figure 5 - Example of condensate drainage siphon

H... Siphon height

K... Siphon drain height

P... Total pressure of the fan

4 x M8 screws to connect Vento components

řadarozměry v mmDimensions in mm

Size

400-200

500-250

40-20

50-25

500-300 50-30

600-300 60-30

600-350 60-35

700-400 70-40

80-50800-500

A x B [mm]


90-50900-500

Dimensional Range

VCHV water coolers are

manufactured in a range

of eight sizes according

to the A x B dimensions of

the connecting ange (seegure # 1). Two and three-

-row versions of coolers

are available for all sizes.

As standard, CHV water

coolers are manufactured

in three-row versions with

shifted geometry (ST 25 x

22 mm). Water coolers can

be connected to air ducts in

the same way as any other

Vento duct system com-

ponent. Connections of allwater coolers to the cooling

water supply are maximally

standardized. These coo-

lers enable designers to

cover the full air ow range

of Vento fans.



Water Coolers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Required default parameters

- Selected cooler's size

- Air ow rate (velocity in the cross-section)

- Calculated inlet air temperature

(25 °C, 30 °C, 35 °C)

- Relative air humidity

(40 %, 50 %, 60 %)

Determined nal parameters

- Outlet air temperature

- Output of the cooler

- Required water discharge

- Water pressure loss

- Air pressure loss

Warning: If other coolant is used, the calculation of the

cooler's parameters must be performed using AeroCAD

software.

Cooler Dimensioning Procedure

Outlet air temperature behind the cooler for requi-

red default parameters can be determined from

the nomograms.

If the outlet air temperature is the same or higher than the required temperature, the cooler complies with

the performance job.

Maximum output of the cooler , maximum water

discharge and water pressure loss at maximum

discharge for the required default parameters

can also be determined from the nomograms. (1

Cooler Dimensioning

Cooler Dimensioning

For nomograms showing the thermodynamic correlation

for each cooler, refer to pages 189-196. All necessary

nal parameters of the cooler corresponding to the

performance job can be obtained from the nomograms.

The nomograms have been developed for three-rowcoolers and the most common water temperature gradi-

ent: +6 °C/+12 °C:

A suitable mixing set for water discharge and pre-

ssure loss at the given discharge can be determined

following the procedure and characteristics of SUMX

mixing sets included in the section "SUMX Mixing Sets",

refer to pages 181-182.

Nominal operating conditions are included in the no-mograms; i.e. the air ow rate at air ow velocity of 2.7

m/s, inlet air temperature of +30 °C, inlet relative air hu-

midity of 40 %, water temperature gradient of +6 °C/+12

°C (i.e. water cooling by 6 K) and maximum output at

these conditions at corresponding water discharge and

water pressure loss. A mixing set can be connected to

the water cooler in these conditions.

The air pressure loss for all coolers can be determined

from the nomogram on page 197.

Cooler Control

SUMX mixing sets are designed as compact xtu-res. They are dimensioned using the same principles

applied when used with VO water heaters.

Figure 6 - Cooler equipped with a mixing set

(1 The nomograms on pages 190 to 196 can be used to determine the maximum calculated output and water discharge because they are

given for the xed water temperature gradient ∆ tW

= 6 K.

1 CHV water cooler

2 TACO air-venting valve

3 NS 130R antifreeze sensor


4 Corrosion-proof connecting hoses

5 Circulation pump6 Actuated ESBE three-way control valve

Water outlet

Water

inlet



Vodní chladiče

t2

- outlet air temperature behind the cooler (°C) →

V - air ow rate through the cooler (m3/h) →

v - air ow velocity in the cooler (m/s) →

qw

- water discharge through the cooler (m3/h) →

∆ p w

- w a t e r p r e s s u r e l o s s

( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →


Air ow rate - Inlet air temperature - Water temperature gradient

Outlet air temperature - Output - Water discharge and pressure loss

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

5

2

1

4 0 %

5 0 %

Example:

At the selected air ow rate of 775 m3/h, the velocity of the air

ow through the CHV 40-20/3L water cooler will be

2.7 m/s. For the selected air ow rate (velocity) at inlet air tem -

perature in front of the cooler of +30 °C‚ and outdoor air re-

lative humidity of 40 %, the outlet air temperature behind the

cooler will be +19.6 °C.

Cooling output of the cooler of 3.01 kW comports with the

selected air ow rate (velocity)

at the inlet air temperature infront of the cooler and the same humidity; while the requi-

red water discharge will be 0.43 m3/h at water pressure loss



3

19,6

7

10

6

2,2

CHV 40-20 / 3L

3,01

Nomogram 1

9

0,43

8

4

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

4 0 %

6 0 %

t 1 - v i n l e t a i r t e m p e r a t u r e

b e h i n d t h e c o o l e r ( ° C )

t 1 - i n l e t a i r

t e m p e r a t u r e ( ° C

)



t2


V - air ow rate through the cooler (m 3/h) →


qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →

192

Vodní chladiče




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

1

Example:


air ow through the CHV 40-20/3L water cooler will be




cooler will be +18,7 °C.

Cooling output of the cooler of 5,3 kW comports with the






5

2

3

4

18,7

6

10

8

9

CHV 50-25 / 3L

7

Nomogram 2

5,3

4,3

0,77

4 0 %

5 0 %

6 0 % 4 0

%

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

5 0 %




t e m p e r a t u r

e ( ° C )



Vodní chladiče

t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

1

Example:













5

2

3

4

18,7

8

0,9

CHV 50-30 / 3L

6,3

Nomogram 3

7

6

10

9

4,5

4 0 %

5 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 % 6

0 / 4

0

4 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %




t e m p e r a t u r e ( °

C )



t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →

194

Vodní chladiče




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

1

Example:













5

2

4

18,3

6

7

8

9

CHV 60-30 / 3L

8,1

Nomogram 4

1,12

10

7,9

3

4 0 %

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %




t e m p e r a t u r e (

° C )



Vodní chladiče

t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

1

Example:













8

2

3

4

18,3

5

7

9

10

8

6

CHV 60-35 / 3L

9,5

Nomogram 5

1,34

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %




t e m p e r a t u

r e ( ° C )



t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →

196

Vodní chladiče




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

CHV 70-40 / 3L

1

Example:






cooler will be +19.6 °C.







5

2

3

4

18,1

6

7

8

10

9

1,9

13,2

Nomogram 6

12,5

4 0 %

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %




t e m p e r a t u r e ( ° C )



Vodní chladiče

t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

CHV 80-50 / 3L

1

Example:













5

8

9

2,76

3

4

17,9

6

7

18,5

19,2

Nomogram 7

10

2

4 0 %

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 % 4 0

%




t e m p e r a t u r e

( ° C )



t2




qw


∆ p w


( k P a ) →

Q -output (kW) →

198

Vodní chladiče




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

CHV 90-50 / 3L

Example:







Cooling output of the cooler of 22 kW comports with the






17,9

4

1

2

3

5

6

7

810

9

22

Nomogram 8

26,5

3,2

4 0 %

5 0 %

O u t d o

o r a i r

r e l a t i v

e h u

m i d i t y

6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %




t e m p e r a t u

r e ( ° C )



Water Coolers

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

2500

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all CHV water coolers. For the selected air ow rate , the air ow

velocity in the free cooler's cross-section ‚ can be read in the lower graph, and then the corresponding coo-

ler's air pressure loss at the known velocity can be determined in the upper part .

Example:

At an air ow rate of 2,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow in the CHV 70-40 3L water cooler will be 2.45 m/s.

The cooler's air pressure loss for the above-mentioned air ow rate will be 46 Pa.


[ P a ]

V - a i r o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / h ]

V - a i r o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / s ]

v - air ow velocity in the cooler's cross-section [m/s]

2

3

5

Air Pressure Losses in CHV Water Coolers

Nomogram of air pressure losses for all CHV water coolers

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all CHV water coolers. The air pressure loss depends on the air

ow velocity, and it is calculated for the air velocity in a free cross section of all dimensional ranges.

4

S i z e o f t h e

c o o l e

r

v - velocity [m/s]2,45

D i m e n s

i o n a l r a n g

46

1



Water Coolers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Installation

CHV water coolers and mixing sets, as well as other Vento elements and equipment, are not intended, dueto their concept, for direct sale to end customers. Eachinstallation must be performed in accordance with a

professional project created by a qualied air-handlingdesigner who is responsible for proper selection of thecooler and accessories. The installation and commissi-oning may only be performed by a specialized assem-bling company licensed in accordance with generallyvalid regulations.The cooler must be checked carefully before its in-stallation, especially if it was stored for a longer time. Itis necessary to check parts for damage, and in particu-lar whether the pipes, cooler vanes and header pipes,insulation of conductors of the mixing set pump andactuator are in good condition.If water is used as the cooling medium, the cooler

can then be situated only in an indoor environment whe-re the temperature is maintained above freezing point.Outdoor use is not recommended. It is allowed onlyif antifreeze solution is used as the cooling medium(mostly ethylene glycol solution concentrated dependingon the temperature). However, the temperature limit of the used actuating mechanism of the mixing set must be

taken into account.

CHV Water Coolers

There is no need for individual suspensions to installthe water coolers. The cooler can be inserted into theduct line, it must not be exposed to any strain or torsion

caused by the connected duct line.Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing ontothe connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento system, use galvanized M8 screws andnuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive connectionof the ange using fan-washers placed on both sidesat least on one ange connection, or use Cu conductor wiring.Water coolers can work only in the horizontal positi-on, in which condensate draining and air venting of thecooler are possible.To allow faster air venting while lling the systemwith water, remove the upper cover of the cooler, and

loosen the knurled screw on the TACO valve by one or two turns. After nishing the lling of the system, tightenthe knurled screw rmly. The valve will then work auto-matically.During the rst air venting, a couple of water dropscan leak through the air-venting valve. This will nothappen again during normal operating conditions.When cleaning the TACO valve inside, it is necessa-ry to replace the swelling parts (rings and inserts). TheTACO valve is equipped with a back valve so there is noneed to drain the heater.Warning: The following antifreeze solutions can beused as heating media:

- water and ethylene glycol (Antifrogen N)- water and 1.2 - ethylene glycol (Antifrogen L)However, the cooler's parameters must be calculated


using AeroCAD softwareWhen connecting the mixing set hoses or air-ven-ting valve, be careful. Do not use excessive force,otherwise the pipes situated between the header pipesand the sidewall of the cooler could be damaged.

The counter-current connection of the cooler is nee-ded to achieve maximum output. All calculations and nomograms are valid for the count-er-current connection of the coolers. An air lter must be installed in front of the cooler toprotect it from fouling.If the cooler is covered by a ceiling, it is nece-ssary to ensure access to the entire cooler to enablechecking and service; especially air-venting valves

need regular checking.

Left-hand version

Figure 7 - Side arrangement of the cooler

drop

eliminator

cooler

outlet

inlet

Before operating the air-handling unit or after being outof operation for a longer period, it is necessary to ll thesiphon via the plastic plug with water. The air-handlingunit can also be equipped with a siphon with a disco-nnecting trap and a ball valve (only negative pressuresections). This type of siphon need not be lled with

water before putting it into operation.

Mixing Sets

Installation instructions included in the section "MixingSets" (except the anti-freeze correlations) are fully valid

for installation of the mixing sets with CHV coolers.

Right-hand version

drop

eliminator

cooler

inlet

outlet



Water Coolers

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Troubleshooting

When activating the air-handling system, you could face

some undesirable situations. The following text includes

the most common problems and their possible causes:

Permanently high output air temperature- Low cooling water discharge rate or pressure in the cooling circuit

- High temperature of the water in the cooling circuit

- High air temperature adjusted in the control system


- Clogged screen in the SUMX mixing set

- The three-way valve and SUMX mixing set actuator are incorrectly

adjusted.

- Aerated pump (resp. entire system)

- Incorrect design of the CHV and SUMX assembly

Permanently low output air temperature- High cooling water discharge rate and pressure in the cooling circuit

- Low air temperature adjusted in the control system


adjusted.


The output air temperature uctuates- High cooling water discharge rate and pressure in the cooling circuit


adjusted.



The water cooler and mixing set require regular main-tenance at least at the beginning and end of the heat-ing season. During operation, it is necessary to checkproper air venting and water leakage, respectively risingpressure losses in the water piping or air duct (due tofouling). It is necessary to supervise pump and actuator operation, and keep the mixing set's lters clean.




Direct Coolers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

thick aluminium overlapping ns pulled on copper pipesof Ø10 mm diameter. Standard CHF coolers are manu-factured in two-row versions with shifted geometry (ST25 x 22 mm). All used materials are carefully checkedso they ensure long service life and reliability. Direct

coolers are pre-lled with nitrogen in the productionfactory.


Figure 2 - Description of direct cooler parts

External casing, Evaporator, Coolant inlet, Coolant outlet,

Drop eliminator, Tray for condensate, Condensate drainage Capillary sensor (optional accessories, separate order necessary)


Designation of Direct Coolers

The type designation of coolers in projects and orders isdened by the key in gure # 3.

Without drop eliminator

Side arrangement

L - Left-hand

P - Right-hand

Number of rows

3

Dimensional Range

Direct Cooler

The above-mentioned specication without an orderingcode corresponds to the stock conguration of the pro-duct, i.e. the three-row left-hand arrangement with adrop eliminator. Any other conguration (e.g. without adrop eliminator) must be specied by the ordering code.The cooler is a congured product which should be

preferably ordered using AeroCAD software, which willgenerate its ordering code. As standard, direct coolers are delivered in a left-handversion, looking at the air ow direction, and are equi-pped with a drop eliminator, an insulated condensatedrainage tray and an optional integrated anti-frost sen-sor. The cooler can also be ordered without the dropeliminator.

400-200

500-250

40-20

50-25

500-300 50-30

600-300 60-30

600-350 60-35

700-400 70-40

80-50800-500

90-50900-500


A x B [mm]

Dimensional Range

CHF direct coolers are ma-nufactured in a range of

eight sizes according to the A x B dimensions of the co-nnecting ange (see gure# 1). Three-row versions of coolers are available for allsizes. Non-standard versi-ons of direct coolers can bedelivered on the customer'srequest based on calcula-tions performed using the AeroCAD design program.Direct coolers can be conne-cted to air ducts in the same

way as any other Vento ductsystem component. Directcoolers enable designers tocover the full air ow rangeof Vento fans.

CHF 60-30 / 3 L – BE

Applications of Direct Coolers

CHF direct coolers are intended for air cooling, fromsimple venting installations to sophisticated air-handlingsystems. They are designed to be installed directly insquare air ducts. Ideally, they can be used along with

other components of the Vento modular system, whichensure inter-compatibility and balanced parameters.


The cooled air must be free of solid, brous, stickyand aggressive impurities. The air must also be free of corrosive chemicals or chemicals aggressive to alumini-um, copper and/or zinc.The cooler evaporator is lled with protective gas whichis discharged after the evaporator is connected to thecooling circuit. The following operating coolants canbe used: R123, R134a, R152a, R404a, R407c, R410a,

R507, R12, and R22 (ASHRAE Number).


When projecting the layout of the direct cooler locationin the air-handling system, we recommend observingthe following principles: Direct coolers can work only in any position in whichcondensate draining is possible. Access to the cooler must always be ensured toenable checking and service. An air lter must be installed in front of the cooler toavoid its fouling (providing it has not already been in-stalled, e.g. in front of the heater).

The counter-current connection of the direct cooler is needed to achieve maximum output. The cooler can be situated either in front of or be-hind the fan. If the cooler is situated behind the fan, we reco-mmend inserting between the fan and the evaporator aspacer (e.g. 1-1.5 m long straight duct) to steady the air ow.


The external casing of the coolers is made of galvani-zed steel sheets insulated against moisture condensa-

tion. The heat exchange surface is created by 0.1 mm



Direct Coolers

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

(1 It the outlet air temperature from the direct cooler in the givendefault conditions is higher than required, it is necessary to select alarger cooler, or ask REMAK or their distributor to calculate the CHFcooler's parameters for the required conditions.

Direct Cooler DimensioningFor nomograms showing the thermodynamic correla-tion for each direct cooler, refer to pages 204-211. Allnecessary nal parameters of the direct cooler corre-sponding to the performance job can be obtained fromthe nomograms. The nomograms have been developedfor direct coolers and most frequently used evaporatingtemperature: + 5 °C: Required default parameters

- Selected cooler's size- Air ow rate (velocity in the cross-section)- Design inlet air temperature (+25 °C, +30 °C, +35 °C)

- Relative air humidity (40 %, 50 %, or 60 %). Determined fnal parameters

- Outlet air temperature- Output of the cooler - Air pressure loss

Direct Cooler Dimensioning Procedure

Outlet air temperature behind the cooler for requi-red default parameters can be determined fromthe nomograms. If the outlet air temperature is the same or higher than the required temperature, the cooler complies withthe performance job. (1

Maximum output of the direct cooler at maximumrequired air ow for the required default parameters can also be determined from the nomograms. The direct cooler's pressure loss at the given air owrate for calculation of the assembly pressure loss ba-lance needed for the fan selection can be obtained fromthe nomograms on pages 204-211.The air pressure loss for all coolers can be determinedfrom the nomogram on page 212. As the design of thedirect coolers is standardized, the pressure loss onlydepends on the air ow velocity through the cooler. Thenomogram also includes air ow rate - velocity conver -

sion curves for all cooler sizes.

Parameters

Figure 4 - Dimensions of CHF Direct Coolers

Tabulka 1 – souvztažnost napětí a stupňů regulaceTable 1 - Dimensions of CHF Direct Coolers

For important dimensions and weights (without water lling) of direct coolers, refer to gure # 4 and table # 1.The connection of the direct cooler depends on the se -lected dimensional range.

4 x M8 screws to connect Vento components

rozměry v mmDimensions in mmSize

Figure 5 - Example of condensate drainage siphon

H... Siphon height

K... Siphon drain height

P... Total pressure of the fan



t2




t 1 - v i n l e t a i r


t 1 - i n l e t a i r t e m p e r a t u r e ( ° C ) ←

Q - output (kW)→

204

Direct Coolers




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

5

2

1

4 0 %

5 0 %

Example:

At the selected air ow rate of 775 m3/h , the velocity of the air

ow through the CHF 40-20 / 3L cooler will be 2.7 m/s.

For the selected air ow rate (velocity) at inlet air temperature in

front of the cooler of +30 °C ‚ and outdoor air relative humidity

of 40% , the outlet air temperature behind the cooler will be

+17.9 °C .

Cooling output of the cooler of 4.2 kW comports with the gi-

ven air ow rate (velocity)

at the inlet air temperature in frontof the cooler and the same humidity .

Values in the nomogram can be interpolated and extrapolated

3

17,9

7

6

CHF 40-20 / 3L

4,2

Nomogram 1

4

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %



Direct Coolers

t2







Q - output (kW)→




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

1

Example:

At the selected air ow rate of 1210 m3/h , the velocity of the

air ow through the CHF 40-20 / 3L cooler will be 2.7 m/s.




+18 °C .

Cooling output of the cooler of 6,6 kW comports with the gi-




5

2

3

4

18

6

CHF 50-25 / 3L

7

Nomogram 2

6,6

6 0 %

5 0 %

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %



t2







Q - output (kW)→

206

Direct Coolers




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

1

Example:






+18,2 °C .





5

2

3

4

18,2

CHF 50-30 / 3L

7,6

Nomogram 3

7

6

4 0 %

5 0 %

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z d u

c h u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %



Direct Coolers

t2







Q - output (kW)→




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

1

Example:






+17.9 °C .





5

2

4

17,9

6

7

CHF 60-30 / 3L

9,6

Nomogram 4

3

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %



t2







Q - output (kW)→

208

Direct Coolers




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

1

Example:






+17,8 °C .





2

3

4

17,8

5

7

6

CHF 60-35 / 3L

11,2

Nomogram 5

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %



Direct Coolers

t2







Q - output (kW)→




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

CHF 70-40 / 3L

1

Example:






+17,8 °C .

Cooling output of the cooler of 15 kW comports with the gi-




5

2

3

4

17,8

6

7

15

Nomogram 6

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %



t2







Q - output (kW)→

210

Direct Coolers




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

CHF 80-50 / 3L

1

Example:






+17.9 °C .





5

3

4

17,9

6

7

21,5

Nomogram 7

2

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z

d u c h

u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %



Direct Coolers

t2







Q - output (kW)→




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

CHF 90-50 / 3L

Example:






+17.9 °C .





17,9

4

1

2

3

5

6

7

23,8

Nomogram 8

V l h k

o s t v

e n k o

v n í h

o v z d u

c h u 6 0 %

6 0 %

5 0 %

4 0 %

4 0 %

5 0 %



Direct Coolers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

58

2500

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all CHF direct coolers. For the selected air ow rate , the air owvelocity in the free cooler's cross-section ‚ can be read in the lower graph, and then the corresponding coo-

ler's air pressure loss at the known velocity can be determined in the upper part .

Example:

At an air ow rate of 2,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow in the CHF 70-40 / 3L direct cooler will be 2.45 m/s.

The direct cooler's air pressure loss for the above-mentioned air ow rate will be 58 Pa.

∆ p - a i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P a ]

V - a i r f o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / h ]

V - a i r f o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / s ]


1

2

3

5

Air Pressure Losses in CHF Direct Coolers

Nomogram of air pressure losses for all CHF direct coolers

The curve of pressure losses is valid for all CHF direct coolers. The air pressure loss depends on the air ow

velocity, and it is calculated for the air velocity in a free cross section of all Vento system dimensional ranges.

4

C o o l e

r

s i z e

v - velocity [m/s]


2,45



Direct Coolers

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .


Installation, servicing and maintenance can be perfor -med only by a specialized company licensed in accor -dance with valid regulations and possessing the appro-

priate tools. There is no need for individual suspensions wheninstalling the CHF direct coolers. The cooler can be in-serted into the duct line, it must not be exposed to anystrain or torsion caused by the connected duct line. Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing ontothe connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento system, use galvanized M8 screws andnuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive connectionof the ange using fan-washers placed on both sidesat least on one ange connection, or use Cu conductor wiring.




Plate Heat Exchangers

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

HRV 60 - 30

OBL elbow LV summer insert


The external casing and connecting anges of HRV

plate heat exchangers are made of galvanized steel

sheets. The heat exchanger is equipped with a heat-ex-

change insert made of thin aluminium ns (sheets). The

air-tightness of the inlet and outlet air separation within

the heat-exchange insert is ensured by capping the ns

and sheets and sealing the connections with polyester

resins.

Dimensional and Type Range

HRV plate heat exchangers are a part of the Vento air -

-handling modular system. They are manufactured in eight

dimensional rages, from HRV 40-20 to HRV 90-50. In

these eight dimensional rages, corresponding OBL…/45

elbows are also manufactured.


Figure 1 - Cross-airow heat exchanger

Figure 2 – location in the air-handling assembly

Figure 3 - Heat exchanger designation

Figure 4

Figure 5 - Heat exchanger accessories



Heat exchanger designation

Application

HRV cross-airow plate heat exchangers are used to

recover heat energy from the outlet air coming from anair-conditioned room, especially in applications which

are highly demanding for heating or cooling of the inlet

air.

Operating Conditions and Position

Inlet and outlet air must be without solid, brous, sticky,

aggressive and explosive impurities.

The heat exchanger is designed to be installed into the

air-handling system, into a parallel, perpendicular or 45°

aslant air inlet/outlet duct line, or their various combina-

tions.

The layout variability of the heat exchanger is providedby special connecting elbows OBL.../45. The number

of elbows must be specied in the project, depending

on the intended layout. The SKX mixing section can be

connected directly to the heat exchanger via elbows for

the parallel air outlet. The HRV heat exchanger even

without elbows has the standard connecting dimensions

of the Vento System. The HRV heat exchanger can be

operated either in the horizontal or vertical position.

However, condensate draining from the outlet air duct

behind the heat exchanger must be ensured. When

planning the air-handling system, it is necessary to con-

sider requirements for the servicing space to enable the

replacement of heat-exchange inserts

.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

A PVC outlet is included in the delivery of the heat

exchanger to drain condensate which may be created

in the heat-exchange insert. It must be connected to the

lowest point of the heat exchanger lid, which serves as

a tray, to drain the condensate from the heat exchanger

(if the heat exchanger is suspended under the ceiling

with the lid directed downwards), see fgures #9 and #

11 on page 216.

Technické informace

OBL 60 - 30 / 45

LV 60 - 30


Figure 6 - Important dimensions of heat exchangers

Table 1 - Dimensions and weights of heat exchangers

Figure 7 - Example of elbow designation

Figure 8 - Example of the summer insert designation

Figure 9 - PVC outlet* REMAK a.s. does not deliver elbows with other angles

Condensate

drainage outlet

Figure 10 - heat exchanger layout arrangements in the ducting depending on the orientation OBL elbows. /45

Angle between the elbow

inlet and outlet anges (45°)*



Type designation OBL



Type designation LV

100

H

I

G B D F

E

C

A

24

35

38

50

54

71

103

94




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Accessories

The following optional accessories can be ordered with

HRV heat exchangers:

OBL …/45 elbows to make the heat exchanger‘s in-

stallation in different layouts of ducting easy.

LV summer insert (built-in assembly) .... For summer

operation of the heat exchanger, the heat-exchange in-

sert can be replaced with so-the called „summer insert“.

The summer insert avoids unwanted heat exchange,

while the pressure loss is decreased by approximately

10% (this is advisable if a heat exchanger without a by-

pass is used in the inlet branch, respectively for air-han-

dling systems without cooling).

Heat Exchanger Dimensioning, Parameters

On page 215 you will nd correlation graphs of efci-

ency and pressure losses related to the air ow rate for

each heat exchanger. The heat exchanger‘s efciency isdened by the following relationship:

Φ = ( tp2

- tp1)

) / ( to1

- tp1

)

kde

to1

is the outlet air temperature in the entry to the

heat exchanger.

tp1

is the inlet air temperature in the entry to the

heat exchanger.

tp2

is the inlet air temperature in the exit from the

heat exchanger.

From this relationship and the known heat exchanger‘s

efciency, the required inlet air temperature tp2 in theheat exchanger‘s exit can be determined using the fo-

llowing relationship:

tp2

= Φ . ( to1

- tp1

) + tp1

As the heat exchanger‘s efciency is signicantly de-

pendent on the relative humidity of the outlet air (i.e.

the higher the relative humidity, the higher the heat

exchanger‘s efciency), two curves, the so-called „dry“

(minimum) and „wet“ (maximum) efciency, are included

in each graph. The value of relative humidity at which

a signicant change in the heat exchanger‘s efciency

was manifested was always selected as the relative

humidity for the „dry“ efciency. The value of the „wet“efciency was determined at 100% air relative humidity.

The temperature of the outlet air exhausted from the

ventilated room and the temperature of the inlet (out-

door) air are further parameters selected for the structu-

re of the graphs. The outlet air temperature was selec -

ted as

to1

= 25°C, and the inlet air temperature was in all cases

selected as tp1

= -10°C. However, the dependency of

the heat exchanger‘s efciency on these values is not

too signicant; therefore, if needed, the outlet air tem-

perature behind the heat exchanger for other to1

and tp1

temperatures can also be determined with decent accu-racy using the following graphs and above-mentioned

relationship. If the calculated outdoor air temperature

is lower than -10°C it is advisable, in relation to the

outdoor air humidity, to consider installation of an air

Příslušenství Heat Exchanger Dimensioning

preheater situated in front of the heat exchanger which

would raise the air temperature at the entrance to the

heat exchanger, or consider installation of active antif -

reeze protection. Otherwise, there is the risk of the heat

exchanger freezing, which would cause malfunction of

the entire air-handling system (for details, refer to thesection „Heat Exchanger Bypass and Antifreeze Protec-

tion“). Conditions in which the risk of frosting exists can

be precisely determined by the calculation using Aero-

CAD program

On the basis of these data or relationships, all nece-

ssary nal parameters of the heat exchangers can be

obtained from the required default data:

Required default parameters

- Selected heat exchanger‘s size

- Air ow rate (velocity in the cross-section)

- Relative outlet air humidity Determined nal parameters

- Outlet air temperature behind the heat exchanger

- Heat exchanger‘s pressure loss

Heat Exchanger Dimensioning Procedure

„Dry“ or „wet“ efciency of the heat exchanger for

the required values of the air ow rate can be determi-

ned from the graph. If the expected relative humidity

value of the outlet air lies in the area between the „dry“

and „wet“ efciency curves, the efciency can be esti-

mated within the range between these limit curves.

The observed efciency of the heat exchanger and

expected air temperatures, i.e. the inlet air temperature

behind the heat exchanger and the temperature of the

air exhausted from the room, are put into the following

relationship tp2

= Φ. ( to1

- tp1

) + tp1

The heat exchanger‘s pressure loss at the given air

ow rate for calculation of the assembly pressure loss

balance needed for the fan selection can be obtained

from the graph. Condensation of the air humidity can

signicantly increase the heat exchanger‘s pressure

loss; it can be in the range from 20% to 50%. If the

outlet air humidity value lies within the range above the

„dry“ efciency curve, it is advisable for pressure lossbalance purposes to increase the value derived from

the graph by at least 30%.

The calculated air temperature tp2 will be used to

dimension the water heater as the inlet air temperature.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Heat Exchanger Working Characteristics

Air ow rate (m3/h)

A

i r p r e s s u r e l o s s ( P a )

E f c i e n c y ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

A

i r p r e s s u r e l o s s ( P a )

E f c i e n c y ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

E f c i e n c y ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s ( P a )

A i r p r e

s s u r e l o s s ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

E f c i

e n c y ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

A i r p r e s s u r e

l o s s ( P a )

E f c i

e n c y ( % )

Air ow rate (m3/h)

E f c i e n c y (

% )


A i r p r e s s u r e

l o s s ( P a )

A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s ( P

a )

HRV 40-20 HRV 50-25

HRV 50-30 HRV 60-30

HRV 60-35 HRV 70-40

HRV 80-50

1) If the outlet air relative humidity is within the range from 25% to 65%, the efciency curve will lie

proportionally between the „dry“ and „wet“ efciency curves. The precise values for any operating

conditions can be calculated using the AeroCAD design program.

Correlation of „wet“ efciency [%] and pressure loss [Pa] relatedto the air ow rate [m3/h] through the heat exchanger

Correlation of „dry“ efciency [%] related to the air ow rate

[m3/h] through the heat exchanger without condensation (appli-

cable for outlet air relative humidity from 0 % to 25 %)

Correlation of pressure loss [Pa] related to the air ow

rate [m3/h] through the heat exchanger

Efciency of heat exchangers

Inlet (outdoor ai r)O utlet (i ndoor air)

Temperatur e° C -152 0

Relative air humidity for "dry" efficiency 1) % max. 25

Relative air humidity for "wet" efficiency 1) % min. 65

Air flow m3/h

Altitude m

It does not affect the result

1400 – 5100 (Ratio inlet/outlet = 1:1)

250

Air ow rate (m3/h)


E f c i e n c y ( % )

HRV 90-50




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Mounting and Installation

Installation of the heat exchanger can be performed

in a way similar to installation of other Vento compo-

nents. The ange dimensions are compatible with Vento

components. The casing of the heat exchanger is pro-

vided with holes in its corners. These holes can be used

to suspend the heat exchanger on M8 threaded rods.


the connecting ange faces.

It is necessary to ensure conductive connection of


least on one ange connection.

Condensate can form on individual vanes (heat ex-

change surfaces); therefore, the heat-exchange insert is

always situated inside the heat exchanger casing with

the side marked with the VRCH (TOP) label up. This

along with the shape of the vane surfaces minimizes

the possibility of accumulation of condensate on indivi-dual layers, and thus continuous draining of condensate

drops from the vane surfaces is ensured.

As the inlet and outlet air line branches intersect within

the heat exchanger, the actual air ow cross-section is

approx. half of its entire cross-section, and the air ow

speed is doubled. Due to the actual air ow speed,

condensate drops can be carried from the vanes down

the air duct. In installations where this can happen, it

is necessary to slope the duct behind the heat exchan-

ger down, solder the joints, and provide the lowest

duct point with a condensate draining outlet. The di-

stance the condensate drops fall extends with increa-

sing air ow speed. Depending on the air ow speed,this distance can be 1-3 m behind the heat exchanger.

A PVC outlet is included in the delivery of the heat

exchanger to drain condensate which may form in

Montáž servis, údržbaInstallation, Service and Maintenance

Figure 11 - PVC outlet

Figure 12 - Flange bar screw clamps

the heat-exchange insert. It must be connected to the

lowest point of the heat exchanger, which serves as a

collecting tray (if the heat exchanger is suspended with

the lid directed downwards) - see gures #9 and # 11.

If the HRV heat exchanger is installed on the oor with

its lid up, the condensate draining outlet is installed only

in the following air duct. Therefore, all condensate runs

out from the heat exchanger into the duct.

Recommendations:

Air lters must be installed in front of the cold and hot

air inlets to avoid fouling of the heat-exchange surfaces,

gradual reduction of the heat exchange effectiveness,

and increasing pressure losses.

To brace anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is

advisable to connect them in the middle with another

screw clamp which prevents ange bar gapping (see

gures # 12 and # 13).

Bypass and Antifreeze Protection

Installation of the plate heat exchanger without the by-

pass is advisable only for applications where condensa-

te ice accretion on the heat exchanger ns cannot form

and the heat exchanger location and operating and

maintenance schedule enable easy access and prompt

operator intervention. In air-handling systems without

cooling, this installation requires seasonal replacement

of the heat-exchange insert by the „summer insert“ to

avoid unwanted heat exchange during the summer sea-

son. If the air-handling system is equipped with cooling

(respectively, if the room is cooled in another way) it ispossible and convenient to use the heat-exchange in-

sert during both winter and summer seasons.

The heat exchanger‘s bypass can be installed using

dampers and a duct bypass connected to the inlet

branch to provide the heat exchanger with antifreeze

protection, or to enable automatic cut out of the heat

exchanger in air-handling systems without cooling. The

bypass control depends on the bypass‘s function (antif -

reeze protection, summer bypass, or both), and using a

suitable sensor (a surface temperature sensor or a dif -

ferential pressure sensor - best equipped with an adjus-

table hysteresis) the bypass control can be autonomous

or ensured in cooperation with a control unit. The cross-

-section of the bypass duct should be dimensioned at

40% of the cross-section1) of the heat exchanger co-

nnecting anges.

Figure 13 - Flange bar screw clamps

1) The bypass duct must be dimensioned, respectively regulated, so that the

air pressure loss in the duct bypass will be approximately the same as the air

pressure loss in the heat exchanger. Otherwise, the parameters of the air-han-

dling system could be changed; respectively the working point of the supply fan

could be shifted into the non-working (forbidden) area. Therefore, the supply

current of the fan must be checked during heat exchange mode as well as

during bypass mode.




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

LKSX

PZ

RP (M2)

KFD

RP (M1)

TKU

N S 1 2 0

PKM

HRV

EOSX

KFD

F3

P33N

LKSX

NS 120

Control unit

TRN

PKM

F3

P33N

TRN

TKULKSX

PZ

N S 1 2 0

Installation without the heat exchanger‘s bypass

An example of the heat exchanger installation in an air-handling system without a bypass.

This gure shows an example of the ventilation system including air heating using an elect-

ric heater, a heat exchanger and a mixing section. If exclusion of the heat exchange during

the summer season is required, it is necessary to install the LV summer insert.

LKSX

PZ

RP (M2)

KFD

RP (M1)

TKU

N S 1 2 0

PKM

EOSX

KFD

F3

P33N

LKSX

NS 120

TRN

PKM

ROOM

F3

P33N

TKU

LKSXPZ

N S 1 2 0

P33N

LKS

LKS

TRN

HRV

Installation with the heat exchanger‘s bypass

An example of the heat exchanger installation in an air-handling system with a bypass. This -

gure shows the same example as the previous gure completed with a heat exchanger bypass

and two inversely working (one closes - the second opens) LKS dampers as a part of the antif -

reeze protection.This application does not require replacement of the heat-exchange insert by

the summer insert. Unwanted air heat exchange can be eliminated by the control of dampers.

Příklady aplikací Installation Examples

Figure 14 - Heat exchanger without a bypass

Figure 15 - Heat exchanger with a bypass

Control unit

ROOM




R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Operation and Maintenance

HRV heat exchangers, when used in accordance with

the chapter „Operating Conditions and Position“, do not

require special maintenance. Recommended checks

(e.g. cleaning and checking the insert for damage)

are included in the service manual, and are usually

performed when changing the winter assembly for the

summer one, and vice-versa. To avoid condensation

problems, it is necessary to keep the condensate drain-

age free. The replacement of the block shaped heat-ex-

change insert (resp. summer insert) can be performed

after removing the four wing screws from the bottom lid

of the heat exchanger. The block is secured inside the

heat exchanger by movable locking pieces. After loo-

sening the securing screws, the locking pieces can be

shifted aside (see g. #16) and the heat exchange insert

can be removed from the casing. If the heat exchanger

is installed using suspensions, rst it will be necessaryto push (lift) the heat-exchange insert to release the

locking pieces.

Fouling can be carefully removed from the ns of the

heat-exchange insert by washing it out with a detergent

solution.


secure

release

Figure 16 - Securing screw




F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Teorie ltraceFiltration Classes Air lters are classied depending on the results of testsmade in accordance with the EN 779 standard, andclassed into three groups and classes according to theachieved ltration parameters (mean rate of synthetic

dust separation or mean rate of atmospheric dust sepa-ration). Group G (Grobstaublter - coarse lter) is divi-ded into the following classes: G1, G2, G3, G4.Group F (Feinstaublter - ne lter) is divided into thefollowing classes: F5, F6, F7, F8, F9.Classication of individual classes is specied by themean rate of separation, and it is included in the table,which also contains classes pursuant to the DIN 24 185standard to enable comparison.

Examples of calculation of the mean rate of synthetic dust separation

* In the course of the last testing dust batch, the value of nal pressure loss was reached or surpassed.

Explanatory notes:

Am

Mean rate of synthetic dust separation [%] A

1...A

nValues of the rate of synthetic dust separation in each measuring cycle [%]

Af

Values of the rate of synthetic dust separation in each measuring cycle* [%]W Total weight of the delivered dust until the reaching the nal point of the test [g]W

1...W

nWeight of the delivered dust in each measuring cycle [g]

Wf

Weight of the delivered dust in the last batch until the moment of reachingthe nal point of the test* [g]

E A...E

nValues of the rate of synthetic dust separation in each measuring cycle [%]

Ef

Last included value of the rate of atmospheric dust separation [%]R

0Initial pressure loss of the clean lter at the nominal air ow [Pa]

R1...R

nValues of the pressure loss of the lter at the nominal air ow in each measuring cycle [Pa]

Rf

Last included value of the pressure loss at the nominal air ow* [Pa]

Delivered dust (holding capacity)

R a t e o f s y n t h e t i c d u

s t

s e p a r a t i o n

[ A ]

R a t e o f a t m o s p h e r i c d u s t

s e p a r a t i o n

[ E ]

P r e s s u r e l o s s

Am

= (W1 A

1+ W

2 A

2+ W

3 A

3+ W

4 A

4+ W

5 A

5)

1W

Glossary

Each table of lter parameters contains basic valueswhich are dened by the EN 779 standard.These values and some of their dependencies (correla-tions) are demonstrated in the gure "Chart of ltrationparameters".

Nominal air ow volume rate – V [m3 /s]

The nominal air ow volume rate is a testing parameter determined by the manufacturer for which the lter isdesigned (for a reference air density of 1.2 kg/m3). De-viations from the nominal air ow during lter operationare common, and do not mean an error in the design. Itis only necessary to consider air ow optimization rela-ted to the lter pressure loss.

Face area – S0

[m2]

The face area is a cross-sectional area of the test duct just in front of the lter (without transition pieces).

Face velocity – v0

[m/s]

The face velocity is the air ow velocity in the face area(i.e. the air ow volume rate divided by the face area).

Effective ltration area – S [m2]

The effective ltration area is the total area of the lter surface area through which testing air ows.

Filtration velocity – v [m/s]

The ltration velocity is the air ow velocity in the facearea (i.e. the air ow volume rate divided by the effecti-ve ltration area).


Figure 1 - Chart of ltration parameters

Table 1 - Filtration Classes

Initial pressure loss – R0

[Pa]

Initial pressure loss is the pressure loss of the clean l-ter at the nominal air ow volume rate; it is often markedas ∆p

0.

Final pressure loss – Rf [Pa]

Final pressure loss is a value related to the nominal air ow and nominal testing conditions. It is often marked

as ∆pf . During operation, pressure loss gradually risesdue to the lter fouling with dust. Therefore, the nalpressure loss represents an economical pressure lossat which the lter should be replaced. Recommendedvalue for G Group lters is 250 Pa and for F Group l-ters 400 Pa.If the actual air ow rate differs from the nominal air owrate, the nal pressure loss will also be different.

Rate of atmospheric dust separation – E [%]

The rate of atmospheric dust separation, also known asopacitometric rate of separation, is the lter capability toseparate atmospheric dust from the testing air. The rate

of atmospheric dust separation is determined by measu-ring the diffuse-transmission factor.



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Initial rate of atmospheric dust separation – EA

[%]

Initial rate of atmospheric dust separation is the rstvalue of the rate of atmospheric dust (opacitometric)separation before delivering the dust into the lter.

Mean rate of atmospheric dust separation – Em [%]The mean rate of atmospheric dust separation is theaverage value of result values of atmospheric dust (opa-citometric) separation.

Rate of synthetic dust separation – A [%]

The rate of synthetic dust separation is the lter capa-bility to separate synthetic dust from the testing air, andit is gravimetrically determined. It represents the ratio of the testing dust weight separated by the lter and thetotal dust weight delivered into the lter.

Initial rate of synthetic dust separation – A1

[%]

Initial rate of atmospheric dust separation is the rst va-lue of the rate of synthetic dust separation got from therst testing dust batch of 30 g.

Mean rate of synthetic dust separation – Am

[%]

The mean rate of synthetic dust separation is theaverage value of result values of synthetic dust separa-tion.

Filter holding capacity (static) – W [g]

The lter holding capacity represents the amount of trapped dust in the course of the test until the nal pre-ssure loss is reached. For the purposes of the static

test, it is expressed in grams [g], and for the purposes of the dynamic test, in grams per square meter [g/m2].

Testing synthetic dust

Testing synthetic dust consists of 72 % of ne "Air Cle-aner Test Dust", 23 % of "Molocco Black", and 5 % of No.7 cotton linters. This testing dust compound must bedelivered by the manufacturer in the above-mentionedcomposition.




Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Application After inserting the required lter insert, the bag lter ca-ssette is intended for trapping solid and bre particlesfrom the transported (outdoor or circulating) air. The baglter protects the environment of the ventilated rooms

and air-handling components (fans, heaters, coolers,and heat exchangers).

Operating Conditions and PositionThe KFD bag lter cassette should be installed in theair-handling duct at the beginning of the assembly (al-ways in front of the exchangers, heat exchanger, andfan). The horizontal or vertical (the air ow directiondownward) positions are recommended. The lters aredesigned for indoor use. When installed outside, theymust be protected against water by a cover. Transportedair must be free of corrosive substances or chemicalsaggressive to zinc and rubber. Acceptable temperature

of transported air can range from -30 °C to +70 °C.Dimensional and Type RangeThe back lter cassettes are manufactured in all tendimensional ranges, from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsThe external casing and connecting anges are made of galvanized steel sheets. The connecting bar anges are20 mm (KFD 30-15 to KFD 80-50) or 30 mm (KFD 90-50 and 100-50) high. Perfect tightness of the lter insertand service panel is ensured by rubber sealing.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceThe KFD bag lter cassettes must be installed in the air --handling duct so that the air-ow direction through thelter will follow the arrow on the casing. Before installa-tion, paste self-adhesive sealing onto the connectingange face. To connect the lter anges, use galvanizedM8 screws and nuts (M10 only for KFD 100-50). It isnecessary to ensure conductive connection of the angeusing fan-washers placed on both sides at least on oneange connection. To brace the anges with a side lon-ger than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them in themiddle with another screw clamp which prevents angebar gapping. The removable inspection panel must beeasily accessible. If installed into a ceiling, space for theservice panel opening and lter replacement must betaken into account. This service space is specied bythe G dimension, see the table.

Accessories

A bag lter of the corresponding size and required l-tration class is an essential accessory of the KFD lter cassette, while the P33N differential pressure sensor isa recommended accessory KF3 – G3 class bag lter

KF5 – F5 class bag lter

KF7 – F7 class bag lter

P33N – differential pressure sensor

ServiceThe lters require regular inspection for fouling and replace-ment, if necessary. Inspection and lter replacement can beperformed after loosening the wing screws and removing theservice panel from the cassette casing. The lter can be remo-ved in the following way: First push its frame back (in the air ow direction), and then pull it out of the guiding rails. Installthe new lter following the reverse way.

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)

Filtration Bag Replacement

1. Loosen the service panel wing screws.

2. Release the service panel from hinges.

3. Remove the lter in the following way: First

push its frame back (in the air ow direction), and

then pull it out of the guiding rails

1 2

3

Bag lter

Service panel

Cassette casing

Pressure sensor

Air ow

direction

KFD Bag Filter Cassette

KFDKFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

KFD

30-1540-20

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

A B C D G L m ±10%

300400

500

500

600

600

700

800

900

1000

150200

250

300

300

350

400

500

500

500

320420

520

520

620

620

720

820

930

1030

170220

270

320

320

370

420

520

530

530

310410

410

410

410

410

410

410

405

410

550550

650

650

650

650

720

800

800

800

6,58

11

12

13

14

18

21

24

27

L

C

DB

A

GG - space for theservice panelopening

F

E

Example of designation

KFD 60 - 35

Flange connection B dimension (cm)Flange connection A dimension (cm)

Type designation of the lter cassette



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

Filtration bags

Filter frame

Frame sealing

Air Pressure Loss of KF3 Bag FiltersClean lter inserts

v0

– Air ow face velocity [m/s]

∆ p – A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P

a ]

V – Air ow rate

[m3/s] [m3/h]

f l t e r d i m e n s i o n s A x B

For the curve numbers corresponding to each air lter, refer to the table

(1 Fouled lter can only be partly recovered via a dry process (dusted or vacuumed); however, impaired lter properties can be expected after the lter recovery.(2 At the nominal air ow

ApplicationKF3 bag lters are designed to be used in KFD lter cassettes. They are used for single-stage air ltration insimpler air-handling systems or as pre-lters for the rstltration stage to separate coarser dust particles.

Operating Conditions and PositionMaximum temperature of the transported air can be upto +100 °C while air relative humidity is not limited (itcan be up to 100 %).

Dimensional and Type RangeKF3 bag lters are manufactured in all ten dimensionalranges, from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsFiltration bags are made of unwoven, thermally and me-chanically reinforced 100 % polyether textile of 150 g/

m2 surface density. After inating, the geometric shapeof the lter bags is maintained by plastic braces whichenable maximum utilization of the bag ltration surface.The xing frame is made of galvanized sheets. The lter bags are xed to the frame and sealed with a PE strip.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceThe lters require regular inspections for fouling. Duringoperation, pressure loss gradually rises due to the lter fouling with dust. Final air pressure loss at the nominalair ow is 250 [Pa]. At air ow rates different from thenominal air ow rate we recommend replacing the lter if the actual air pressure loss is double that of the clean

lter pressure loss. After reaching the nal pressureloss, replace the lter with a new one (1.

KF3 Bag Filters


KF3 60 - 35

Cassette ange connection B dimension (cm)

Cassette ange connection A dimension (cm)

G3 class bag lter

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0

1 0 0 - 5 0



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

KF5 Bag Filters

ApplicationKF5 bag lters are designed to be used in KFD lter ca-ssettes. They are used for the second stage or single air ltration in more sophisticated air-handling systems toseparate ne dust particles.


Dimensional and Type RangeKF5 bag lters are manufactured in all ten dimensionalranges, from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsFiltration bags are made of progressively designed,unwoven 100 % synthetic textile of 185 g/m2 surfacedensity.

After inating, the geometric shape of the lter bags ismaintained by plastic braces which enable maximumutilization of the bag ltration surface. The xing frameis made of galvanized sheet. The lter bags are xed tothe frame and sealed with a PE strip.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceThe lters require regular inspections for fouling. Duringoperation, pressure loss gradually rises due to the lter fouling with dust. Final air pressure loss at the nominalair ow is 400 Pa. At other air ow rates we recommendreplacing the lter if the actual air pressure loss is doublethat of the clean lter pressure loss. This lter cannot be

recovered; after reaching the nal pressure loss, replacethe lter with a new one.

[m3/s] [m3/h]

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0


(1 At nominal air ow

1 0 0 - 5 0

v0


∆ p – A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P a ]

V – Air ow rate


For the curve numbers corresponding to each air lter, refer to the table

Filtration bags

Filter frame

Frame sealing


KF5 60 - 35


Cassette ange connection A dimension (cm)F5 class bag lter



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

KF7 Bag Filters

ApplicationKF7 bag lters are designed to be used in KFD lter cassettes. They are mostly used for second-stage air ltration in highly sophisticated and clean air-handlingsystems to separate ne dust particles.


Dimensional and Type RangeKF7 back lters are only manufactured in eight dimensi-onal ranges, from 50-25 to 100-50.

MaterialsFiltration bags are made of progressively designed,unwoven 100 % synthetic textile of 205 g/m2 surfacedensity.

After inating, the geometric shape of the lter bags ismaintained by plastic braces which enable maximumutilization of the bag ltration surface. The xing frameis made of galvanized sheet. The lter bags are xed tothe frame and sealed with a PE strip.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceThe lters require regular inspections for fouling. Duringoperation, pressure loss gradually rises due to the lter fouling with dust. Final air pressure loss at the nominalair ow is 400 Pa. At other air ow rates, we recommendreplacing the lter if the actual air pressure loss is dou-ble that of the clean lter pressure loss. This lter can-

not be recovered; after reaching the nal pressure loss,replace the lter with a new one.

[m3/s] [m3/h]

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0


(1 At nominal air ow

1 0 0 - 5 0

v0



V – Air ow rate

f l t e r d i m e n s i o n s A x

B

Filtration bags

Filter frame

Frame sealing


KF7 60 - 35


Cassette ange connection A dimension (cm)F7 class bag lter



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

VFK Insert Air Filter Cassette

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

VFK

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

300

400

500

500

600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300

300

350

400

500

500

500

320

420

520

520

620

620

720

820

930

1030

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)

170

220

270

320

320

370

420

520

530

530

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

225

230

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

5

6

7

7

8

8

10

12

13

14

Application After inserting the required lter insert, the lter cassetteis intended for trapping solid and bre particles from thetransported (outdoor or circulating) air. The insert air l-ter protects the environment of the ventilated rooms and

air-handling components (fans, heaters, coolers, andheat exchangers).

Operating Conditions and PositionThe lter cassette should be installed in the air-handlingduct at the beginning of the assembly (always in front of the exchangers, heat exchanger, and fan). It can workin any position. The lters are designed for indoor use.When installed outside, they must be protected againstwater by a cover. Transported air must be free of corro-sive substances or chemicals aggressive to zinc andrubber. Acceptable temperature of transported air canrange from -30 °C to +70 °C.

Dimensional and Type RangeVFK lter cassettes are part of the Vento air-handlingmodular system. They are manufactured in nine dimen-sional ranges, from 30-15 to 90-50.

MaterialsThe external casing and connecting anges are made of galvanized steel sheets. The connecting bar anges are20 mm (VFK 30-15 to VFK 80-50) or 30 mm (VFK 90-50) high. Perfect tightness of the lter insert and servicepanel is ensured by rubber sealing.


The lter cassettes must be installed in the air-handlingduct so that the air-ow direction through the lter willfollow the arrow on the casing. Before installation, pasteself-adhesive sealing onto the connecting ange face.To connect the lter anges, use galvanized M8 screwsand nuts (M10 only for VKF 90-50). It is necessary toensure conductive connection of the ange using fan--washers placed on both sides at least on one angeconnection. To brace the anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them in the mi -ddle with another screw clamp which prevents angebar gapping. The removable inspection panel must be

easily accessible. If installed into a ceiling, space for theinspection panel opening and lter insert replacementmust be taken into account. This service space is speci-ed by the G dimension, see the table.

Accessories

A bag lter of corresponding size and required ltrationclass is an essential accessory of the VFK lter cassette,while the P33N differential pressure sensor is a reco-mmended accessory. VF3 – G3 lter insert (page 198) VF3N – Filter insert spare ltration textile P33N – differential pressure sensor

ServiceThe lter inserts require regular inspection for fouling and repla-

cement of the ltration textile, if necessary. Inspection and lter

insert replacement can be performed after loosening the wingscrews and removing the service panel from the cassette casing.

The lter can be removed by pulling its frame out of the guiding

rails. Install the new lter insert following the reverse way.


VFK 60 - 35

Flange connection B dimension (cm) Flange connection A dimension (cm)

Type designation of the insert air lter cassette

Filter Insert

Casing of the insert air lter cassette

Service panel

1. Loosen the service panel wing screws2. Release the service panel from hinges3. Remove the lter by pulling its frame outof the guiding rails

Filter Insert Removal

2

3

1

L

C

G - space neededfor opening theservice panel

A

G

DB

F

E

A B C D G L m ±10%



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

VF3 Spare Filter Inserts

ApplicationVF3 lter inserts are designed to be used in VFK lter cassettes. They are used for single-stage air ltration insimpler air-handling systems to separate coarser dustparticles.


Dimensional and Type RangeVF3 insert lters are manufactured in all nine dimensio-nal ranges, from 30-15 to 90-50.

MaterialsFiltration insert contains unwoven, thermally reinforced100 % polyether textile of 220 g/m2 surface density. Fil-tration textile is stretched between aluminium braces in

a precise lightweight frame made of galvanized sheets,creating a predened geometric shape. Filtration textileis xed to the frame edges by grip bars.

Accessories

Spare ltration textile is an accessory VF3N – Filter insert spare ltration textile

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceThe lter insert requires regular inspection for fouling and

replacement of the ltration textile, if necessary. During opera-tion, pressure loss gradually rises due to the lter fouling with

dust. Final air pressure loss at the nominal air ow is 250 Pa.

At other air ow rates we recommend replacing the lter if the

actual air pressure loss is double that of the clean lter pre -ssure loss. Fouled ltration textile can only be partly recovered

via a wet process (washing in detergent solution); however,impaired lter properties, compared with the original state of

the lter, can be expected after the ltration textile recovery.


VF3 80 - 50



G3 (class 3) lter insert

Filter insert

textile

replacement

Using pliers, pull off the grip bar of

the ltration textile.

Remove the ltration textile from the

braces, and replace it with a new one.

Release the ltration

textile edge.

[m3/s] [m3/h]

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0

Air Pressure Loss of VFK Insert FiltersClean lter inserts

v0


∆ p – A i r p r e s s u r e l o s

s [ P a ]

V – Air ow rate


VF3 Filter 30-15 40-20 50-25 50-30 60-30 60-35 70-40 80-50 90-50 100-50

A-B dimensions [cm] 29,5-14,5 39,5-19,5 49,5-24,5 49,5-29,5 59,5-29,5 59,5-34,5 69,5-39,5 79,5-49,5 89,5-49,5 99,5-49,5

Mean rate of synthetic dust separation Am

[%] 80 - 85

Filtration area [m2] 0,07 0,11 0,21 0,25 0,33 0,4 0,6 0,86 1 1,17

Weight [kg] 2 2 2,5 3 3 3 4 4 5 5,5Rated nominal air ow [m3/h] 380 600 1130 1350 1780 2160 3240 4640 5400 6000

Initial pressure loss [Pa] 48 39 52 52 60 64 77 78 82 78

Final pressure loss [Pa] 250

Holding capacity [g] 35 56 106 126 167 202 303 434 505 590

Recoverability [ - ] Limited via a wet process (impaired lter properties can be expected)



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

LKR Manual Blade Dampers

ApplicationThe LKR tight blade damper for the square duct is most-ly used to regulate an air-handling system or manuallyclose individual duct branches.

Operating Conditions and PositionThis damper is intended for indoor and outdoor 1) applica-tions in air ow free of solid, brous, sticky, or aggressiveimpurities. Operating position is arbitrary, and the rangeof operating temperatures can be from -30 °C to +70 °C.Pressure loss-air ow rate-opening angle correlation isshown in the graph "Blade damper pressure losses".

Dimensional and Type RangeLKR blade dampers are manufactured in ten Vento di-mensional ranges, refer to the table.

Materials and DesignThe LKR blade damper is equipped with a hand lever and plastic grip which can be arrested in any positionusing a wing screw. The external casing and connecti-ng anges are made of galvanized steel sheets. Theconnecting bar anges are 20 mm (for sizes from 30-15to 80-50) or 30 mm (for sizes 90-50 and 100-50) high.Contra-rotating vanes (blades) are made of galvanized,hollow sectional steel. Individual blades are equippedwith elastic plastic sealing so that the edge of one bladets in the sealed groove of the other. Side sealing isensured by plastic tooth-wheels seated in the bearings,which are also made of plastic.

LKR blade damper equipped

with a hand lever and

a mechanical position

arresting device

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

LKR

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

300

400

500

500

600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300

300

350

400

500

500

500

320

420

520

520

620

620

720

820

930

1030

170

220

270

320

320

370

420

520

530

530

4

4

5

6

7

7

81011

13

Air Pressure Loss of Blade Dampers

LKR, LKS, LKSX, LKSF


Nearly closed, opening angle α = 30°

a l l d

i m e n

s i o n s

Nearly opened, opening angle α = 60°


∆ p – A i r p r e s s u

r e l o s s [ P a ]

[m3/s] [m3/h]

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0

Fully opened, opening angle α = 90°


LKR 60 - 50



Type - Manual Blade Damper

1 0 0

- 5 0

(1 If exposed to intensive moisture condensation or weather conditions, it isnecessary to coat the dampers with anticorrosive paint, provide the actuator and

movable elements with protective shielding against direct effect of precipitation.

v0


V – Air ow rate

A B C D m graph(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no.)

C

1 7 0

B

F

A

60

D

E



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

LKS Driven Blade Dampers


LKS 60 - 30 / 24

Supply voltage 24 V or 230 V



Type - Driven Blade Damper

ApplicationThe LKS tight blade damper is mostly used to closesquare air-handling ducting. After being connected tothe control system, the damper's actuator ensures auto-matic closing, respectively opening of the air inlet (out-let). The damper can also be used for actuated closing

of individual duct branches.

Operating Conditions and PositionThe damper is designed for indoor (1 and outdoor use inair ow free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive, respecti-vely explosive impurities. Operating position is arbitrary,and the range of operating temperatures can be from -30°C to +50 °C. Pressure loss-air ow rate-blade openingangle correlation is shown in the graph "Blade damper pressure losses".

Dimensional and Type RangeThese blade dampers are manufactured in ten Vento

dimensional ranges, refer to the table.Materials and DesignThe LKS closing damper is equipped with the LM 24 actuator (24 V voltage) or LM 230 actuator (230 V voltage). The ex-ternal casing and connecting anges are made of galvanizedsteel sheets. The connecting bar anges are 20 mm (for sizes from 30-15 to 80-50) or 30 mm (for sizes 90-50 and100-50) high. Contra-rotating vanes (blades) are made of galvanized, hollow sectional steel. Individual blades are equi-pped with elastic plastic sealing so that the edge of one bladets in the sealed groove of the other. Side sealing is ensuredby plastic tooth-wheels and bearings, which are also made of

plastic.Actuator A single or two-conductor two-stage control is used.Manual adjustment can be performed using the releasebutton (the gear is taken out of operation as long as thisbutton is pressed). After releasing this button, the actua-

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

LKS

30-15/..

40-20/..

50-25/..

50-30/..

60-30/..

60-35/..

70-40/..

80-50/..

90-50/..

100-50/..

300

400

500

500

600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300

300

350

400

500

500

500

320

420

520

520

620

620

720

820

930

1030

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no.)

170

220

270

320

320

370

420

520

530

530

5

5

6

7

8

8

9

11

12

14

tor will return to the default position. Working angle canbe limited by mechanical stops. The actuator is protec-ted against overloading; there are no end limit switches(it automatically stops on the stop).

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceBefore installation, paste self-adhesive sealing onto the co-

nnecting ange face. To connect the damper anges, usegalvanized M8 screws and nuts (M10 only for dimensions

90-50 and 100-50). It is necessary to ensure conductive co-

nnection of the ange using fan-washers placed on both sides

at least on one ange connection. To brace the anges with a

side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them in themiddle with another screw clamp which prevents ange bar

gapping. If installed into a ceiling, space for the opening ena -

bling inspection of the actuator must be taken into account.

The damper must not be exposed during installation or opera-

tion to any torsion. After installation, it is necessary to check

free movement of the blades by pressing the release button

on the actuator. Deformed blades can cause increased resi-stance, and the actuator will be automatically stopped.

LKS Blade Damper

with LM24A or

LM230A Actuator

Technical Data - LM 24A and LM 230A Actuators

Power supply voltage LM 24A : 24V~ ±20%, 50/60Hz or 24V=, ± 20%

LM 230A : 230V~, 50/60Hz), ± 5%

Dimensioning LM 24A : 2 VA / LM 230A : 4 VA

Input power LM 24A : 1 W / LM 230A : 2 W

Direction of rotation can be selected by the left/right (L/R) selector

Manual adjustment using the button, automatic return to the default position

Torque min. 5 Nm (at the rated voltage)

Working angle max. 95° (mechanical stops, adjustable 0...100%)

Adjustment time 150 s

Noise level max. 35 dB (A)

Position indicator mechanical

Protection Class LM 24A : III (low voltage) LM 230 : II (double insulation)

Degree of protection IP54

Single-conductor

wiring

Two-conductor

wiring

Wiring diagram of damper actuators

LKS .. - .. /24 LKS .. - .. /230

(1 If exposed to intensive moisture condensation or weather conditions, it is necessary

to coat the dampers with anticorrosive paint, and provide the actuator and movableelements with protective shielding against direct effect of precipitation.

LM24A LM24A LM230A

C

1 7 0

BD

A

100

F

E

A B C D m ±10% graph



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


LKSX 60 - 30 / 24 Supply voltage (24 V)



Type designation LKSX

LKSX Driven Blade Dampers

ApplicationThe LKSX tight blade regulating damper is mostly usedto mix air, respectively to close square air-handlingducting. The accurate position of the damper is set bythe actuator controlled by the control system.

Operating Conditions and PositionLKSX blade dampers are designed for indoor and outdoor use (1 in air ow free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive or explosive impurities. Operating position is arbitrary, andthe range of operating temperatures can be from -30 °C to+50 °C. Pressure loss - air ow rate - blade opening anglecorrelation is shown in the graph "Blade damper pressurelosses".

Dimensional and Type RangeThese blade dampers are manufactured in ten Ventodimensional ranges, refer to the table.

Materials

As standard, the LKSX regulating damper is equippedwith an LM 24X actuator (for details, refer to the table).The external casing and connecting anges are madeof galvanized steel sheets. The connecting bar angesare 20 mm (for sizes from 30-15 to 80-50) or 30 mm (for size 100-50) high. Contra-rotating vanes (blades) aremade of galvanized, hollow sectional steel. Individualblades are equipped with elastic plastic sealing so thatthe edge of one blade ts in the sealed groove of theother. Side sealing is ensured by plastic tooth-wheelsand bearings, which are also made of plastic.

Actuator

The actuator is proportionally set to the position given bythe unied control signal of 0 to 10V. Measuring voltagesignal U serves as a feedback signal for an electrical re-presentation of the damper position 0...100%. The angle of the damper shift can be gradually adjusted by an integratedpotentiometer. Measuring voltage signal U is automatically

adapted in the actuator. Manual adjustment can be perfor -med using the release button (the gear is taken out of ope-ration as long as this button is pressed). After releasing thisbutton, the actuator will return to the default position.


nnecting ange face. To connect the damper anges, use

galvanized M8 screws and nuts, for dimensions 90-50 and

100-50 use M10 screws. It is necessary to ensure conductiveconnection of the ange using fan-washers placed on both

sides at least on one ange connection. To brace the anges

with a side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them

in the middle with another screw clamp which prevents ange

bar gapping. If installed into a ceiling, space for the opening

enabling inspection of the actuator must be taken into account.The damper must not be exposed during installation or opera-

tion to any torsion. After installation, it is necessary to check

free movement of the blades by pressing the release button on

the actuator. Deformed blades can cause increased resistan-ce, and the actuator will be automatically stopped. The wiringconnection can be performed via the wiring terminal box. The

actuator is equipped with a 1m-long 3 x 0.75 mm2 cable.(2

LKSX Blade Damper with actuator LM 24A-SR

Technical Data - LM 24A-SR Actuator

Power supply voltage 24V~ ±20%, 50/60Hz, 24V= ±10%

Dimensioning, input power 2 VA, 1 W

Control signal Y 0...10V=, input impedance 100kΩ

Working range 2...10V= (for the set working angle)

Measuring voltage signal U 2...10V=, ≤ 0,5mA (for the set working angle)

Direction of rotation can be selected by the left/right (L/R) selector (L/R)Manual adjustment using the button, automatic return to the default position

Torque min. 5 Nm (at the rated voltage)

Working angle max. 95° (adjustable by the potentiometer within the range 20...100%)

Adjustment time 35 s

Noise and Noise Level max. 35dB (A)


Protection class III (low voltage)


Damper actuator

wiring diagram

LKSX ..-.. /24

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

LKSX

30-15/24

40-20/24

50-25/24

50-30/24

60-30/24

60-35/24

70-40/24

80-50/24

90-50/24

100-50/24

300

400

500

500600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300300

350

400

500

500

500

320

420

520

520620

620

720

820

930

1030

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no)

170

220

270

320320

370

420

520

530

530

5

5

6

78

8

9

11

12

14


C

1 7 0

BD

A

100

F

E

(1 If exposed to intensive moisture condensation or weather conditions, it is necessary tocoat the dampers with anticorrosive paint and provide the actuator and movable elements

with protective shielding against direct effect of precipitation.(2 If the damper is installed in such a way that persons or objects can come into contact

with the moving vanes or gears, the guard grid must be mounted.



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

LKSF Driven Blade Dampers

ApplicationThe LKSF tight blade damper with an emergency functionis mostly used to close square air-handling ducting. If thepower supply fails, the actuator will ensure quick closure of the damper; therefore, the LKSF damper is recommendedas one of the elements of antifreeze protection in systemsequipped with a water heater.

Operating Conditions and PositionThe damper is designed for indoor (1 and outdoor use inair ow free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive, respecti-vely explosive impurities. Operating position is arbitrary,and the range of operating temperatures can be from -30°C to +50 °C. Pressure loss - air ow rate - blade openingangle correlation is shown in the graph "Blade damper pressure losses".

Dimensional and Type RangeThese blade dampers are manufactured in ten Ventodimensional ranges, refer to the table.

Materials As standard, the LKSF regulating damper is equippedwith an LF 230 actuator (for details, refer to the table).The external casing and connecting anges are madeof galvanized steel sheets. The connecting bar angesare 20 mm (for sizes from 30-15 to 80-50) or 30 mm (for sizes 90-50 and 100-50) high.Contra-rotating vanes (blades) are made of galvanized,hollow sectional steel. Individual blades are equippedwith elastic plastic sealing so that the edge of one bladets in the sealed groove of the other. Side sealing is en-sured by plastic tooth-wheels and bearings, which arealso made of plastic.

Actuator The actuator opens the damper and simultaneously takesup the return spring. If the power supply is interrupted, thedamper is moved by the spring energy back to the closed(safety) position. The damper's angle of shift can be set bythe integrated adjustable stop.

LKSF

LKSF

LKSF

LKSF

LKSFLKSF

LKSF

LKSF

LKSF

LKSF

30-15/230

40-20/230

50-25/230

50-30/230

60-30/23060-35/230

70-40/230

80-50/230

90-50/230

100-50/230

300

400

500

500

600600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300

300350

400

500

500

500

320

420

520

520

620620

720

820

930

1030

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no)

170

220

270

320

320370

420

520

530

530

6

6

7

8

99

10

12

13

15

lamelová klapka s pohonemDamper actuator wiring diagram

Power supply voltage 230V~ ±15%, 50/60Hz

Dimensioning 7 VA (Imax

150mA, t=10ms)

Input power 5 W when taking up the spring

4W in resting position

Direction of rotation optional left/right installation

Torque min. 4Nm (at the rated voltage)Working angle max. 95° (adjustable within the range 37...100%,

integrated mechanical limiters of the working angle)

Adjustment time motor 40...75 s, return spring 5 s

Noise Level motor max. 50 dB (A), spring 62 dB (A)


Protection Class II (double insulation)



LKSF 60 - 30 / 230

Supply voltage (230 V)



Type designation LKSF

Damper actuator

wiring diagram

LKSF ..-.. /230

LKSF Blade Damper

with emergency

actuator LF 230

The actuator is protected against overloading; there are noend limit switches (it automatically stops on the stop).


nnecting ange face. To connect the damper anges, use

galvanized M8 screws and nuts (for dimensions 90-50 and100-50 use M10 screws). It is necessary to ensure conductiveconnection of the ange using fan-washers placed on both

sides at least on one ange connection. To brace the an-

ges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect

them in the middle with another screw clamp which prevents

ange bar gapping. If installed into a ceiling, space for the

opening enabling inspection of the actuator must be taken intoaccount. The damper must not be exposed during installation

or operation to any torsion. After installation, it is necessary

to check free movement of the blades. Deformed blades can

cause increased resistance, and the actuator will be automati-

cally stopped. The wiring connection can be performed via thewiring terminal box. The actuator is equipped with

a 1m-long 2 x 0.75 mm2 cable. (2




C

1 7 0

BD

A

110F

E




Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .


SKX 60 - 30 / 24Supply voltage (24 V)



Type designation

SKX Mixing Sections

ApplicationSKX air mixing sections are intended for continuousmixing of fresh and circulating air. The mixing ratio canbe adjusted by three tight blade dampers which are me-chanically interconnected. The dampers are handled byan actuator controlled by the control unit. Two paralleldampers in the SKX section can also ensure the closingfunction.

Operating Conditions and PositionMixing sections are designed for indoor and outdoor 1)appli-cations in air ow free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive,respectively explosive impurities. Operating position is arbi-trary, and the range of operating temperatures can be from-20 °C to +50 °C. Pressure loss - air ow rate - mixingmode correlation is shown in the graph "Blade damper pressure losses".

Dimensional and Type RangeThe air mixing sections are manufactured in eight di-mensional ranges, from 40-20 to 90-50.

MaterialsThe external casing and connecting anges are made of galvanized steel sheets. The connecting bar anges are20 mm or 30 mm (for size 90-50) high. Contra-rotatingvanes (blades) are made of galvanized, hollow sectionalsteel. Individual blades are equipped with elastic plasticsealing so that the edge of one blade ts in the sealedgroove of the other. Side sealing is ensured by plastictooth-wheels and their bearings, which are also made of plastic. As standard, the SKX air mixing section is equi-pped with an NM 24A-SR actuator.

Actuator The actuator is proportionally set to the position given

by the unied control signal of 0 to 10V. Measuring vol-tage signal U serves as a feedback signal for an electri-cal representation of the damper position 0...100 %. Theangle of the damper shift can be gradually adjusted byan integrated potentiometer. Measuring voltage signal Uis automatically adapted in the actuator .

SKX

SKX

SKX

SKX

SKXSKX

SKX

SKX

40-20/24

50-25/24

50-30/24

60-30/24

60-35/2470-40/24

80-50/24

90-50/24

390

440

490

490

540590

690

790

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no)

940

1140

1140

1340

13401540

1740

1960

19

25

33

36

4145

56

68

A B C D G L m ±10% graph

SKX air mixing section

equipped with an NM 24A-SR actuator

SKX Mixing Section Pressure Loss Chart0% fresh air, 100% circulating air

400

500

500

600

600700

800

900

200

250

300

300

350400

500

500

420

520

520

620

620720

820

930

220

270

320

320

370420

520

530

Manual adjustment can be performed using the releasebutton (the gear is taken out of operation as long as thisbutton is pressed). After releasing this button, the actua-tor will return to the default position.


v0

– Air ow face velocity [m/s]V – Air ow rate

∆ p – A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P

a ]

A

L

10 0

B

G C

DF

E

100% fresh air, 0% circulating air






Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

SKX Mixing Sections

Technical Data - LM 24 X Actuator

Power supply voltage 24V~ ±20%, 50/60Hz, 24V= ±10%

Dimensioning, input power 4VA, 2W

Control signal Y 0...10V=, impedance 100kΩ

Working range 2...10V= (for the set working angle)

Measuring voltage signal U 2...10V=, ≤ 0,5mA (for the set working angle)Direction of rotation can be selected by the left/right (L/R) selector

Manual adjustment using the button, automatic return to the default position

Torque min. 4Nm (at the rated voltage)

Working angle max. 95° (adjustable by the potentiometer within the range

20...100%)

Adjustment time 80...110s (0...4Nm)

Noise level max. 35dB (A)


Protection Class III (low voltage)


Actuator wiring diagram

SKX ..-.. /24


nnecting ange face. To connect the anges, use galvanized

M8 screws and nuts. It is necessary to ensure conductive co -nnection of the ange using fan-washers placed on both sides

at least on one ange connection. To brace the anges with aside longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect them in the

middle with another screw clamp which prevents ange bar

gapping. If installed into a ceiling, space for the opening ena -bling inspection of the actuator must be taken into account.

The mixing section must not be exposed during installation or

operation to any torsion. After installation, it is necessary to

check free movement of the blades by pressing the release

button on the actuator. Deformed blades can cause increased

resistance, and the actuator will be automatically stopped. Thewiring connection can be performed via the wiring terminal

box. The actuator is equipped with a 1m-long 3 x 0.75 mm2

cable.

Function of SKX Mixing Sections

100 %

fresh air

approx. 50 %

fresh air

0 %

fresh air

Recommended Connections of LKS(F), LKSX, SKX Mixing Sections in Vento System Assemblies

Figure A shows an air-handling system equipped with an

inlet and an outlet damper. LKS ..-.. /24 (or LKS ..-../230) mixing sections are mostly used in this or similar situa -tions. If the air-handling assembly is equipped with a water heater, it is recommended to use the LKSF ..-.. /230 mixingsection type as an inlet damper .With a simpler air-handling assembly without heating or withelectric heating, the outlet damper and PZ louver can bereplaced with a PK pressure damper.

Figure B shows an air-handling system with air mixing usingthe SKX ..-.. /24 air mixing section . This section is consi-stently equipped with three integrated dampers from whichdampers ‚ also provide inlet and outlet closing functions.

The contra-rotating damper is a mixing damper. If the air mixing section cannot be used, it is possible to ensure thesame functions using three individual LKSX .. -../24 dampersin a similar arrangement . The dampers are controlledby the common control signal from the control unit. The con-tra-rotating damper operation can be set by the selector on the actuator.

Figure C shows an air-handling system with a heat exchanger and an air mixing section. If a heat exchanger is used in theassembly, it is possible to use the SKX air mixing section; ho-wever, air mixing must be situated between the heat exchanger and the room. In this case, the fans cannot be situated arbitrarily.Inlet and outlet closing must be ensured using the LKS ..-../24

(or LKS ..-../230) dampers and . The air-handling assem-bly can also be equipped with a heat exchanger bypass whichis controlled by the LKS ..-.. /24 (or LKS ..../230) closing dam -

per . The heat exchanger's bypass can be used especiallyto protect the heat exchanger against ice build-up, or as aseasonal bypass.

Figure A

Figure B

Figure C



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

TKU

TKU

TKU

TKU

TKUTKU

TKU

TKU

TKU

TKU

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-30

60-3060-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no.)

13

14

19

21

2324

31

40

44

50

300

400

500

500

600600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300

300350

400

500500

500

320

420

520

520

620620

720

820

930

1030

170

220

270

320

320370

420

520

530

530

TKU Attenuators

ApplicationTKU splitter attenuators are intended for attenuation of the

noise transmitted through the air-handling duct both, in theinlet and outlet.

Operating Conditions and PositionTKU attenuators are designed for direct installation into square

air ducts. They are intended for indoor use (when installed out-

side, they must be protected against water by a cover). Transpor -ted air must be free of solid, brous, sticky, aggressive impurities.

Maximum air ow speed between splitters can be 20 m/s. Ope-

rating position is arbitrary, and the range of operating tempera-

tures can be from -40 °C to +70 °C. If possible, we recommend

putting a 1-1.5 m long duct in front of the attenuator to partly

balance the speed prole of the air ow. Two successive atte-nuators can be installed in series to increase insertion loss.

Pressure loss - air ow rate correlation is shown in the graph

"TKU attenuator pressure losses" (two successive attenuators

in series).

Dimensional and Type Range As standard, the splitter attenuators are manufactured in ten

Vento dimensional ranges, refer to the table. Non-standard

dimensions or sizes can be manufactured according to the

customer's requirement. As the attenuator's own noisiness

increases with increased air ow velocity, in some cases it is

advisable to combine the duct system with an attenuator froma higher (larger) dimensional range. The interconnection must

be performed using a 500mm-long transition piece.

MaterialsThe attenuator consists of the casing and hard installed spli -

tters. The external casing is made of galvanized steel sheets(Zn 275 g/m2) reinforced by "Z" proles. The splitters are

created by the proled frame, made of galvanized steel sheets

and non-combustible sound-absorbing lining. The splitters are

mould-resistant and impregnated with water-repellent coating.

The splitter surface is backed with a special glass textile. The

material complies with A2 Combustibility Class (non-combusti-

ble) in accordance with the DIN 4102 standard.


Example of designationTKU 60 - 30 Flange connection B dimension (cm)


Type designation

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceBefore installation, check the surface condition of attenuation spli-tters and paste self-adhesive sealing onto the connecting ange

face. To connect the anges, use galvanized M8 screws and

nuts, for dimensions 90-50 and 100-50 use M10 screws. It is ne-

cessary to ensure conductive connection of the ange using fan--washers placed on both sides at least on one ange connection.

To brace the anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable

to connect them in the middle with another screw clamp which

prevents ange bar gapping.

If two successive attenuators are installed in series, they

must be interconnected by the sides where the faces of

the splitters match with the ange edge!

C

D B

A

1 0 1 0

[m3/s] [m3/h]

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

9 0 - 5 0

TKU pressure loss

TKU pressure loss (2 in a row)

1 0 0 - 5 0


v0


∆ p – A i r p r e s s u r e l o s s [ P a

]



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

TKU 40-20

Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]

O w n N o i s i n e s s L

w

o k t

[ d B ]

Mean frequency of the octave band

Insertion Loss

TKU Attenuators

If two successive attenuators are installed in series, they must be interconnec-

ted by the A sides (i.e. A-A connection), where the faces of the splitters match

with the ange edge. If incorrectly connected (B-B, A-B, or B-A), the splittersdo not bear on each other, and do not create continuous 2m-long splitters.

Alignment of attenuators, when connected together

A side B side

Examples of attenuator arrangements

and installation of leading sheets

v = 0–4,5 m/s

v = 0–4,5 m/s

v > 4,5 m/s

v > 4,5 m/s

One standard attenuator, total effective length 1 m; installation of leading sheets

is not recommended for air ow velocities below 4 m/s.

Two successive standard attenuators in series, total effective length 2 m; installation of leading sheets on the faces of opposite splitters is not recommended for air ow veloci-

ties below 4 m/s. The attenuators must be interconnected by the sides where the facesof the splitters match with the ange edge.

One standard attenuator completed with leading sheets, total effective length 1 m.

Leading sheets on the inlet side are shaped in radius R = approx. 50 mm while theleading sheets on the outlet side are shaped in an equilateral triangle.

Two successive standard attenuators in series, total effective length 2 m. Leading she -

ets on the inlet side are shaped in radius R = approx. 50 mm while the leading sheetson the outlet side are shaped in an equilateral triangle. The attenuators must be inter -

connected by the sides where the faces of the splitters match with the ange edge.

A - A BB

A - A BB

6 ± 5 m m

TKU 30-15

Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ]


Insertion Loss Own Noisiness

Insertion Losses of Attenuators Own Noisiness of Attenuators

Operating Characteristics Absorbent TKU splitter attenuators feature excellent attenuation charac-teristics within the frequency range 500 to 4,000 Hz. Graphs contain the

noise attenuation (insertion loss) of attenuators and their own noisiness.

Insertion loss is a reduction of sound coming through the duct after the

attenuator has been inserted. Attenuation of the attenuator depends on

the width, pitch, and total length of the splitters. Pressure loss and ownnoisiness of the attenuator depend on the pitch of the splitters and the

air ow velocity. The attenuation is expressed by the differential of sound

power levels [dB] within mean frequencies of octave bands from 63 Hzto 8 kHz. All values in the graphs are related to standard attenuators

without leading sheets. This version is suitable for easy assembly of

two attenuators in series and for increased attenuation utilizing re-

ection of sound from the splitter faces back to the sound source. If the leading sheets, made of galvanized steel sheets, are prescribed

in the project (and installed) according to the gure, air pressure loss

lowered by 15 % and lower own noisiness of the attenuator can beexpected; however, at the cost of attenuation decreased by 3 dB in

the whole frequency band. Therefore, use of the leading sheets only

makes sense at air ow velocities above 4.5 m/s.



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

TKU 50-25

TKU 60-30

Insertion Loss

Insertion Loss

TKU 50-30

Own Noisiness

Own Noisiness

TKU 60-35


Air ow [m3/h]

L

o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ]


Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ] frequency


Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B

]

O w n N o i s i n e s s

L w

o k t

[ d B ]

frequency


Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ]

frequency


frequency



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

TKU 70-40

TKU 90-50

TKU 80-50

Insertion Loss


Own Noisiness

Own NoisinessInsertion Loss

TKU 100-50

Own NoisinessInsertion Loss

Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]

frequency


Air ow [m3/h]

L

o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ]

frekvence


Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]


w

o k t

[ d B ] frequency


Air ow [m3/h]

L o s s D

o k t

[ d B ]

O w n N o i s i n e s s

L w

o k t

[ d B ]

frequency



w

o k t

[ d B ]



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

PK Pressure Dampers

[m3/s] [m3/h]

PK pressure loss

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

ApplicationPK pressure damper (louver) is an end element used to automa-

tically close the square outlet of an air-handling unit. If the fans

stop, the damper will automatically close the outlet and prevent air

backdraught to the duct, respectively penetration of water, dust,

insects, etc.

Operating Conditions and PositionThe PK pressure damper is intended to be situated vertically on

the air exhaust. Transported air must be free of solid, brous,

sticky, or aggressive impurities. PK pressure damper is designed

for outdoor use. The range of operating temperatures can befrom -30 °C to +60 °C. Maximum air ow speed can be 6 m/s.

Correlation of pressure loss related to the air ow rate is included

in the graph "PK pressure loss".

Dimensional and Type RangeThe dampers are manufactured in ten Vento dimensional ran-ges, from 30-15 to 100-50. Larger sizes are equipped with a ver -

tical brace to enhance the damper's rigidity and endurance.

Materials

The pressure damper is made of plastics resistant to UV radia-tion and weather effects; grey RAL 7040 colour.

The damper's frame is glued from plastic proles with a closed

air gap. Extremely light and aerodynamic plastic vanes arehinged on plastic pivots, which are inserted into the external

frame. The lowest vane covers the inner frame jut, and thus

creates a weather moulding.

InstallationThe pressure dampers can work in any position. The standard

version of the PK pressure damper must be installed with

the longer side in the horizontal position while the blades are

closed automatically (by gravity). The acceptable air ow di-rection is indicated in the gure. The pressure damper can be

xed with wood or self-tapping screws to an ancillary wooden

or steel frame, respectively to the ange of the air-handling

unit. If used on a façade, it must be embedded 2 cm into the

façade to cover its xing frame.

PK

PK

PK

PKPK

PK

PK

PK

PK

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-3060-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

A B C D m ±10%

300

400

500

500600

600

700

800

900

150

200

250

300300

350

400

500500

376

476

576

576676

676

776

876

976

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)

226

276

326

376376

426

476

576

576

0,5

1

1

11

1

2

2

2


PK 60 - 30



Pressure damper type designation

PK pressure damper with a brace,

sizes from 60-30 to 90-50

PK pressure damper without

a brace up to size 50-30, incl.

PK Pressure Dampers - Installation Diagram

A - Installation on ancillary frameB - Installation on ange of air-handling duct

Plaster

Fixing frame

Wood screw Ancillary frame

Damper frame

Vane

Wood screw

Plaster


s [ P a ]

v0


9 0 - 5 0

D

A

C

B

4 4



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

PZ Louvers

[m3/s] [m3/h]

PZ pressure loss

7 0 - 4 0

8 0 - 5 0

6 0 - 3 5

6 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 3 0

5 0 - 2 5

40 - 2 0

30-15

ApplicationPZ louvers are intended for covering square inlets or outlets. The

louvers prevent penetration of rainwater and small animals into

air-handling ducting.

Operating Conditions and PositionPZ louvers are designed for outdoor use. The range of operating

temperatures can be from -40 °C to +80 °C. The louver must beinstalled vertically on the façade, on the exhaust or intake of the

air-handling duct. Transported air must be free of solid, brous,

sticky, or aggressive impurities. Maximum air ow speed can be

6 m/s. Correlation of pressure loss related to the air ow rate is

shown in the graph "PZ pressure loss".

Dimensional and Type RangeThe louvers are manufactured in ten Vento dimensional ran-

ges, from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsThe louvers are made of galvanized steel sheets (Zn 275 g/m2).

Aerodynamically shaped vanes are rmly xed with their sides

to the louver's prole frame. The vanes are specially shaped toensure high rigidity and rate of water separation at low pressure

loss. A galvanized protective screen with a 10x10 mm mesh

is situated behind the vanes, to protect the duct against small

animals and birds. As standard, the louvers are nished in grey

baking enamel, RAL 7040 colour shade. On customer request,the louvers can also be made of stainless steel, copper or alu-

minium.

InstallationThe standard version of the PZ louver must be installed with

the longer side (vanes) in the horizontal position, and it can be

xed with wood or self-tapping screws to an ancillary wooden

or steel frame, respectively riveted to the air-handling duct

wall. Holes for xing elements (wood or self-tapping screws,

rivets) must be drilled into the louver side (see the gure "PZlouver installation").

PZ

PZ

PZ

PZPZ

PZ

PZ

PZ

PZ

PZ

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-3060-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

285

385

485

485585

585

685

785

885

985

135

185

235

285285

335

385

485485

485

345

445

545

545645

645

745

845

945

1045

195

245

295

345345

395

445

545

545

545

2

2

3

45

5

6

810

12


PZ 60 - 30

Flange connection B dimension (cm) Flange connection A dimension (cm)

Louver type designation

A B C D m ±10% graph(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (curve no)

PZ louver

Louver frame

Ancillary frame

Fixing screw

Vane

PZ louver installation

A - Installation on ancillary frameB - Installation on ange of air-handling duct

N - Fixing wood screw or rivet (holes must be drilled)

1 0 0 - 5 0


s [ P a ]

v0


D

C

B

A

80

A B

9 0 - 5 0



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

C1 2 0

BD

A

N

x ø d

Ø D 2

120

Ø D 1

Ø D

Ø 91),132) F

E

DV, DK Elastic Connections

DV

DV

DV

DVDV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-3060-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

300

400

500

500600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300300

350

400

500500

500

320

420

520

520620

620

720

820

930

1030

170

220

270

320320

370

420

520

530

530

1,6

2

2,5

2,62,9

3

3,5

44,3

4,7

A B C D m ±10%


ApplicationDV square elastic connections are designed to eliminate thetransfer of fan or air-handling unit vibrations to ducting. They

also partly eliminate strain and loading caused by thermal dila -

tation in air-handling ducting.

Operating Conditions and PositionThe range of operating temperatures can be from -30 °C to+80 °C, while the maximum allowed temperature is + 100 °C.Elastic connections can be used up to a pressure of 3,000 Pa.

They are not designed for mechanical loading, and cannot be

used as a supporting part of the assembly. The construction

length is 155 mm, while the usable mounting (planning) length

is 120 mm.

Dimensional and Type RangeThe DV elastic connections are manufactured in all Ven-to dimensional ranges, from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsThe elastic connection is made of galvanized steel sheets and

a PVC sleeve which is reinforced with a polyamide textile. Theelastic connection's anges are interconnected with a copper

girdle of 6 mm diameter, to ensure conductive connection of theanges.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceBefore installation, paste self-adhesive sealing onto the conne-

cting ange face. To connect the elastic connection anges,

use galvanized M8 screws and nuts for dimensions from 90-

50, and for 100-50 use M10 screws. It is necessary to ensure

conductive connection of the ange using fan-washers placedon both sides at least on one ange connection. To brace the

anges with a side longer than 40 cm, it is advisable to connect

them in the middle with another screw clamp which prevents

ange bar gapping. The elastic connection must not be mecha-

nically loaded during installation or operation.

If installed into a ceiling, space for inspection must be taken intoaccount. Usually once a year, the elastic connections must be

checked for tightness of the elastic insert and exibility of the

PVC band. DV elastic connection DK elastic connection

DK 180

DK 200

DK 225

DK 250DK 280

DK 315

DK 355

DK 400

DK 560

180

200

225

250280

315

355

400

560

215

235

260

285315

350

390

445605

240

260

285

310340

375

415

480

640

10

10

10

1010

10

10

12

12

0,40

0,45

0,50

0,550,61

0,69

0,77

1,18

1,62

D D1 D2 d N m ±10%


8

8

8

88

12

12

12

16

ApplicationDK square elastic connections are designed to eliminate thetransfer of fan (RQ or RF inlet) vibrations to ducting. They also

eliminate strain and loading caused by thermal dilatation in air -

-handling ducting.

Operating Conditions and PositionThe same as DV elastic connections.

Dimensional and Type RangeDK elastic connections are manufactured in nine dimensional

ranges, from a diameter of 180 mm to 560 mm.

MaterialsThe same as DV elastic connections.

Installation, Maintenance and ServiceBefore installation, paste self-adhesive sealing onto the round

connecting ange face. To connect the anges, use galvani-zed M8 screws and nuts for dimensions up to 355, for dimen -

sions from 400 up use M10 screws. It is necessary to ensure

conductive connection of the ange using fan-washers placed

on both sides at least on one ange connection. The elasticconnection must not be mechanically loaded during installati-

on or operation.If installed into a ceiling, space for inspection must be taken

into account. Usually once a year, the elastic connections

must be checked for tightness of the elastic insert and exibili -

ty of the PVC band.

1) Applicable for sizes 30-15 to 80-502) Applicable for sizes 90-50 to 100-50



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

ØD2

ØD1

ØD

N x ød

α

A

BD

C

Ø 91),132)

EP, GK Counter-Flanges

GK 180

GK 200

GK 225

GK 250GK 280

GK 315

GK 355

GK 400

GK 560

180

200

225

250280

315

355

400

560

215

235

260

285315

350

390

445605

240

260

285

310

340

375

415

480

640

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

12

12

0,40

0,45

0,50

0,550,61

0,69

0,77

1,18

1,62

D D1 D2 d N α m ±10%


ApplicationGK counter-anges can be used to terminate the round air -

-handling duct at the place of connection to the inlets of RQ,RQ Ex, RF fans (not used if the RF fan is connected to a roof

adaptor).

Dimensional and Type RangeGK counter-anges are manufactured in nine dimensional ran-ges, from a diameter of 180 mm to 560 mm.

MaterialsGK counter-anges are made of galvanized steel sheets (min.

Zn layer of 275 g/m2).

InstallationThese anges can be mounted on the free ends of

a round duct of corresponding diameter using self-tapping

screws or rivets. They must be sealed with permanently exi-

ble cement.

ApplicationEP counter-anges are used to terminate the air-handling

duct, and thus to enable its connection to Vento system stan-

dard elements.

Dimensional and Type RangeEP anges are manufactured in all Vento dimensional ranges,

from 30-15 to 100-50.

MaterialsEP counter-anges are made of standard 20 mm or 30 mm

high bar ange proles, which are rolled from galvanized steel

sheets (min. Zn layer of 275 g/m2). Galvanized corner irons

are pressed from 11 373 steel sheets.

InstallationThese anges can be mounted on the free ends of a square

duct of corresponding dimensions using self-tapping screws or rivets. They must be sealed with permanently exible cement.

8

8

8

88

12

12

12

16

45°

45°

45°

45°

45°

30°

30°

30°

22,5°

EP counter-ange GK counter-ange

1) Applicable for sizes 30-15 to 80-502) Applicable for sizes 90-50 to 100-50

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 20/

EP 30

EP 30/

30-15

40-20

50-25

50-30

60-30

60-35

70-40

80-50

90-50

100-50

300

400

500

500600

600

700

800

900

1000

150

200

250

300300

350

400

500500

500

320

420

520

520620

620

720

820

930

1030

170

220

270

320320

370

420

520

530

530


0,51

0,65

0,80

0,85

0,95

1,02

1,15

1,35

1,65

1,95

A B C D m ±10%



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

EKP Drop Eliminators

Application

Drop eliminators are intended for the separation of condensate drops from the air, from simple venting in-stallations to sophisticated air-handling systems. Theyare designed to be installed directly in square air ducts.

Ideally, they can be used along with other componentsof the Vento modular system, which ensure inter-com-patibility and balanced parameters.

Operating Conditions

Eliminated air must be free of solid, brous, sticky, or aggressive impurities, and without corrosive chemicalsor chemicals aggressive to zinc. The air must be free of

corrosive chemicals or che-micals aggressive to zinc.

Dimensional Range

EKP drop eliminators are

manufactured in a rangeof eight sizes according tothe A x B dimensions of theconnecting ange (see g.#1). Drop eliminators canbe connected to air ducts inthe same way as any other Vento duct system compo-nent. Drop eliminators ena-ble designers to cover thefull air ow range of Ventofans.


When projecting the layoutof the drop eliminator in theair-handling system, werecommend observing thefollowing principles:

Drop eliminators can work only in any position inwhich condensate draining is possible (tray at thebottom).

Fig. 3 – type designation

EKP 60-30 / L

Side arrangement

L - Left-hand

P - Right-hand

Dimensional Range

Drop eliminator

Fig. 2 – Description of Drop Eliminator Components

External casing, Drop eliminator, Condensate tray, Condensate Drainage

It is necessary to keep easy access to the drop eli-minator, especially to the condensate drainage, to ena-ble inspections and service. It is advisable to situate the drop eliminator behindthe cooler (providing it is not a part of it) or heat exchan-

ger. The connections between the cooler (heat exchan-ger) and drop eliminator should be watertight.

Materials and designMateriály, konstrukce

The external casing of the drop eliminators is made of galvanized steel sheets insulated against moisture con-densation.

All used materials are carefully checked so they ensurelong service life and reliability. As standard, drop elimi-nators are delivered in a left-hand version, looking at

the air ow direction, and are equipped with an insula-ted condensate drainage tray.

Drop Eliminator Designation

The type designation of coolers in projects and orders isdened by the key in gure # 3.The above-mentioned specication without an orderingcode corresponds to the stock conguration of the pro-duct, i.e. the left-hand arrangement. The drop eliminator is a congured product which should be preferably or -dered using AeroCAD software, which will generate itsordering code.

400-200

500-250

40-20

50-25

500-300 50-30

600-300 60-30

600-350 60-35

700-400 70-40

80-50800-500

90-50900-500

Fig. 1 – dimensions

A x B [mm]



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .

28

2500

The nomogram of pressure losses is valid for all VO drop eliminators. For the selected air ow rate , the air ow velocity inthe free drop eliminator's cross-section ‚ can be read in the lower graph, and then the drop eliminator's corresponding air pre-

ssure loss at the known velocity can be determined in the upper part .

Example:

At an air ow rate of 2,500 m3/h, the velocity of the air ow in the EKP 70-40 drop eliminator will be 2.45 m/s.

The drop eliminator's air pressure loss for the above-mentioned air ow rate will be 28 Pa


[ P a ]

V - a i r o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / h ]

V - a i r o w

r a t e

[ m 3 / s ]


1

2

3

5

Nomogram of air pressure losses for all drop eliminators

The curve of pressure losses is valid for all drop eliminators. The air pressure loss depends on the air ow

velocity, and it is calculated for the air velocity in a free cross section of all Vento system dimensional ranges.

4

E l i m i n

a t o r

S i z e

v - velocity [m/s]

R o z m

ě r o v é ř a d y

2,45

Air Pressure Losses in a Drop Eliminator



Accessories

R P

R Q

R O

R F

R P

H

E X

. . .

E O . .

V O

S U M X

C H V

C H F

H R V

. . .

Drop Eliminator Parameters

Drop Eliminator Dimensioning

To dimension the drop eliminator, select the correspon-ding size of the drop eliminator from the dimensionalrange of Vento duct units.The air pressure loss for all drop eliminators can bedetermined from the nomogram on page 245. As the design of the drop eliminators is standardized,the pressure loss only depends on the air ow velocitythrough the drop eliminator. The nomogram also inclu-des air ow rate - velocity conversion curves for all dropeliminator sizes.

Figure 4 - Drop eliminator dimensions

Tabulka 1 – souvztažnost napětí a stupňů regulaceTable 1 - Drop eliminator dimensions

Dimensions and Weights

For important dimensions and weights of drop elimina-tors, refer to gure # 4 and table # 1.The connection of the drop eliminator depends on theselected dimensional range.


Installation, servicing and maintenance can be perfor -med only by a specialized company possessing theappropriate tools. There is no need for individual suspensions when

installing the EKP drop eliminator. The drop eliminator can be inserted into the duct line, but it must not be ex-posed to any strain or torsion caused by the connectedduct line. Before installation, paste self-adhesive sealing ontothe connecting ange face. To connect individual partsof the Vento units, use galvanized M8 screws and nuts.It is necessary to ensure conductive connection of theange using fan-washers placed on both sides at leaston one ange connection, or use Cu conductor wiring.

Dimensions (mm)Size



Accessories

F a n s

R P

F a n s

R Q

F a n s

R O

F a n s

R F

F a n s

R P

H

F a n s

E X


. . .

E l . h e a t e r s

E O . .


V O

M i x i n g s e t s

S U M X


C H V


C H F


H R V


. . .



Index

DK.........................................Elastic connections ............................................. 242

DV.........................................Elastic connections ............................................. 242

EKP ......................................Drop eliminators .................................................. 244EO ........................................Electric heaters ................................................... 144

EOS ......................................Electric heaters ................................................... 144

EOSX....................................Electric heaters ................................................... 144

EP .........................................Counter-anges ................................................... 243

GK ........................................Counter-anges ................................................... 243

HRV ......................................Plate heat exchangers ........................................ 214

CHF ......................................Direct coolers ...................................................... 202

CHV ......................................Water coolers ...................................................... 188

KF3 .......................................Bag flters ............................................................ 225

KF5 .......................................Bag flters ............................................................ 226

KF7 .......................................Bag flters ............................................................ 227

LKR.......................................Manual blade dampers........................................ 230

LKS .......................................Driven blade dampers ......................................... 231

LKSF.....................................Driven blade dampers ......................................... 233

LKSX ....................................Driven blade dampers ......................................... 232

NDH ......................................Roof adaptors........................................................ 79

NK.........................................Roof adaptors........................................................ 79

PE .........................................Electronic controllers ........................................... 142

PK .........................................Pressure dampers ............................................... 240

PZ .........................................Louvers ............................................................... 241

RO ........................................Fans ...................................................................... 50

RP .........................................Fans ........................................................................ 4

RQ ........................................Fans ...................................................................... 50

RF .........................................Fans ...................................................................... 58

SKX ......................................Mixing sections .................................................... 234

SUMX ...................................Mixing sets .......................................................... 180

TACO .................................... Air-venting valve .................................................. 177

TKU ......................................Noise attenuators ................................................ 236

TRN ......................................Controllers ........................................................... 130

TRRD....................................Controllers ........................................................... 140

TRRE ....................................Controllers ........................................................... 140

VF3 .......................................Insert flters.......................................................... 229

VFK.......................................Insert flters.......................................................... 228

VO ........................................Water heaters ...................................................... 156

VS .........................................Low-pressure dampers ......................................... 82

PageName Description



Printing and language mistakes are reserved.

This Catalogue (as a whole or a part) must not be printed or copied without prior written permission from

REMAK a. s., Zuberská 2601, Rožnov pod Radhoštěm, Czech Republic.This „Catalogue“ are the sole property of REMAK a. s.

The up to date version of this document is available at our website: www.remak.eu

Changes reserved.

Issued: 19th March, 2012

Further, applicable national regulations

and directives must be observed.







t e c h n i c a l m o

d i fi c a t i o n i s r e s e r v e d .

R 0 8 0 4 0 2 0 5

Date post:	03-Apr-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	kasztakatika
View:	221 times
Download:	0 times

En Vento Katalog

Documents